Home

MAPublisher 8.3 User Guide

1. r MAP GPS Device Settings Port Name Select the proper serial e Port Name sg port for the GPS device CMT Cx Genet Baud Rate Select the baud rate for Refresh List the GPS device Port Settings Data Bits Select the data bits for ae Baud Rate 4800 X the GPS device Parity Select the proper parity for Parity r the GPS device Stop Bits Select the proper Stop Flow control Software XOn XOff v Bits for the GPS device 3 Test this Configuration Select button to Flow Control Select the propel ensure all the specified features are control for the GPS d inputted correctly before continuing 204 Chapter 16 MAP GPS MAP GPS Panel Menu MAP GPS Point Plot Settings Accessed from the MAP GPS panel options menu Scale Sets the size of the chosen symbol prior to or during plotting if required Every Sets the intervals at which E points will be plotted Ever Symbol Choose a symbol to use Click the symbol name to open the list of symbols to choose from Type Select the type of Plot you would like to apply the setting to Either Manual Plot Plot By Time Plot by Distance Plot by Change in Speed or Plot By Change in Heading may be used Enable this Auxiliary GPS Plot Type This setting becomes enabled only for the Plot by Change in Speed or Plot By MAP Symbol 15 Change in Heading options If the check eae box is selected the
2. Apply locale formatting to numbers Choose The delimiter will be the one selected above to apply locale formatting e g decimal To change the attribute order edit the schema in the MAP separator as dot or comma see Attributes panel MAPublisher Preferences Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes FUNCTIONALITY When a grid index or measured or set of graticules have been created the Make Index filter can be used to generate a map index based on the position of text elements or map features in grid cells Index files generated using this function are produced as a simple text file and sorted alphabetically by label or cell reference A typical file would be formatted as follows Melrose Place B4 Sesame Street A4 Wisteria Lane B5 For text elements the position of the first letter of the text is indexed For map features of type Line or Area all cells intersecting the feature are index For map feature of type Point the center of the symbol is indexed The index file has a header indicating the name of each column name attribute name if applicable and grid locations PREREQUISITES To create a map index an Index Grid Measured Grid or set of Graticules must have been created using the Grids and Graticules function This grid must exist on a Legend layer and not be expanded in order to access the function An index will be created even if grid labels are hidden T Text layer containing the labels to be in
3. Delimiter 9 Comma default Semicolon Tab Delimiter Set the field delimiters to either comma semicolon or tab L Suppress Pen and Brush lines Check this option to remove all pen and brush styles in the output MapInfo MID MIF files Master 5 UOR Seed File If required select a seed file to be applied to the exported dgn file Click Clear to remove the seed file selection L Coordinate Units Specifies how feature coordinates Settings e Do not export attributes Google Maps compatible Genie C Keep format extension V Export visible attributes only po not export attributes Check this option for export to KML to be used in Google Maps Google Maps does not support KML files with attribute values E00 Settings Settings V Export visible attributes only V Keep format extension E00 Compression Level None Partial 5 Full E00 Compression Level Set the compression of the exported E00 file default is None Units of Resolution will be interpreted and converted Master Sub or L Allow area fills Controls whether or not fill linkages will be written out for ellipses shapes and solids Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 69 Export FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher supports the export of single MAP Layers or whole MAP Views to various G
4. Add Area Width Height Enter the width and height for the area to be drawn eWidth 200 usft Height 150 usft Cancel Center area on click Check this option e F Center area on dick Units Select a map or page unit to be if you want the area to be drawn used for width and height values centered on the click point FUNCTIONALITY Use the MAP Area tools to quickly add areas of exact map dimensions to any MAP Layer and its related attribute table Whenever an area is created using the MAP Area tools any objects that fall inside the area in whole or part will be automatically selected USING THE MAP AREA TOOLS Overview MAPublisher offers Ellipse and Rectangle drawing tools Select the shape you require from the main Adobe Illustrator Toolbar and select the MAP Layer which contains the coordinate system on which you want to draw the shape There are two methods of using the MAP Area tools As with Adobe Illustrator shape tools you can either click and drag to create a shape at an unspecified size Alternatively you can single click in the MAP document to open the Add Area dialog box where you specify exact width and height values for the shape Draw using Click and Drag To draw shapes at unspecified sizes click and drag over the Map document while holding down the left mouse button until the desired area has been outlined as is done with the standard Adobe Illustrator area drawing tools Use the Alt key Windows or t
5. Tip Edit an existing grid by selecting it and clicking on the menu Object gt Edit Grid Coordinate Values along Grid Graticule Border X Axis style L Normal Character Style W X Axis label rotation Horizontal wi Y Axis style T Normal Character Style E Y Axis label rotation Horizontal If line does not hit bounds label None Place labels offline by amp pt Number of decimals 0 2 E Label values Coordinates 7 Gi Normal Chara amp C Append units to labels LL INormal Charade C Apply locale formatting to numbers Dialog units poi Meter B i e degree symbols or m to Line Labels Apply locale formatting to numbers Choose to apply locale formatting e g decimal separator as dot or comma see MAPublisher Preferences Append units to labels Choose to include units E Cancel C Preview Advanced Preview Click this button to ipreview the grid Hide on preview Minimizes this dialog box during preview Advanced Access the Advanced dialog box to specify additional options for the grids or graticules Coordinate Values along Grid Graticule Border XandY Axis style Select the 1 Character Style to use for the X and Y labels Xand Y Axis label rotation Choose Horizontal or Vertical rotation i If line does not hit Specify if the lines that do not intersect with the graticule bounding box s
6. New line colour PE Show azimuths Positive angle direction Counter dockwise Positive angle direction Set the positive angle MAP Selections Preferences direction as either counter clockwise or clockwise Units Choose to use the current layer s units or select a specific unit in the drop down list Display precision Set the number of decimals shown on the MAP Measurement annotations line colour Set the colour of the digitized measurement path New line colour Set the colour of the current segment between last digitized point and current mouse position The MAP Selections preference category does not contain general settings but has a sub category for the MAP Selections panel see chapter 11 for a full description of the MAP Selection Filters panel MAP Selections gt Panel Preferences MAPublisher Preferences foo Expression Builder 4j General Import Map Data MAP Attributes QY MAP LabelPro MAP Location S MAP Measurement 4 f MAP Selections E Panel MAP Stylesheets MAP Views Spatial Database 32 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher Preferences MAP Selections gt Panel 7 Show selections on two lines mcm Show selections on two lines Enable this option to display the selection filter name and its expression on two separate lines MAP Stylesheets Preferences The MAP Stylesheets preference category does not co
7. T MAP View Boled al eT a Layer Name Search amp Replace tA My Documents it Layer No Load Custom Coordinate Systers Edit Custom Coordinate Systems My Computer Import MAP Objects E i m nom Preferences MNewek Flescfbpe Geodetic Data Source Cm I Coa Selecting a geodetic datasource to load Note Coordinate systems may also be extracted from the input data formats during import process COORDINATE SYSTEM EDITOR MAPublisher includes an extensive geodetic parameter database The contents of the Geodetic Datasource can be browsed or searched by using a search frame Users can extend MAPublisher Geodetic Datasource to support an unlimited number of custom linear and angular units ellipsoids datums datum shifts and coordinate systems MAPublisher Custom Coordinate Systems Editor is accessed from the MAP Views panel options menu Edit Custom Coordinate Systems Coordinate systems may also be edited created from the Specify Destination Coordinate System dialog box started from Specify button in MAP Views panel and import dialog boxes but the other geodetic objects are only accessible through Edit Custom Coordinate Systems Note Individual entries in the Geodetic Datasource are known as Objects There are different types of objects for different types of definition Objects contained in the Geodetic Datasource are Angular Units Type of units for measuring
8. reve Cobwedtons F Name USA MAP View Page Alignment Scale 1 20000000 000000 AutoScale L 65 878906 pt BEBE LLY 625 410095 E Ange 0 00 degrees Ht goog Note Adobe Illustrator CS4 allows users to move artboards However this action does not preserve the georeferencing same effect as moving art on the active artboard Instead of moving the artboard users must do the following Create a new artboard at the desired position on the canvas Open the MAP View Editor and move the data from the initial artboard to the new one e Delete the initial artboard 68 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP View Editor Export MAP Views panel gt Export and buttons gt MAP View ue gt MAP Layer Export World area Settings Opens a Settings dialog box for Format Select the export format for the selected layer or MAP View gt Format Dataset Displays the directory path for Dataset the export of the currently selected layer or MAP View ESRI Shapefile shp Character encoding System the input of extra parameters see below Character Encoding Assign a codec if the attribute information held in the selected EXPORT SETTINGS General Settings Settings Keep format extension Check Export visible attributes this option to export layers with their feature extension are
9. No DropShadowDistance Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 193 Web Export Dialog Fixed Position Callout Bubble Top Left Width Height Corner Radius Draw Bubble Fill Colors Start Fill Colors End position and style of a static position callout bubble Click Highlight Line Visible Color Transparency Line Thickness Hover Highlight Line Visible Color Transparency Line Thickness Search Highlight Line Visible Color Transparency Line Thickness Search Box Top Left Position of the search box Layer List Top Left Width Height Position and size of the map layer list Overview Map Top Left Proportion Position and proportion relative to map size of the overview map For advanced users the appearance of the MAP Web Author map viewer can be fully customized using CSS Enable the Use External CSS File option and browse to a CSS file The file will overwrite any of the configurations made in the Viewers Style list Using an external CSS file for styling the viewer is advantageous because more visual aspects of the viewer can be set such as callout bubble style text font images for buttons and external CSS can be reused for multiple maps If the need arises the external CSS file can be updated after the map has been exported The CSS implementation is based on the Adobe Flex 3 CSS system Only class selectors are supported Full documentation is located at http www avenza com mapublishe
10. SUBSTITUTE SPLIT GEOLOGIC UNIT 1 y Removes all closing parenthesis i e subtitute all closing parenthesis with nothing in the result of the same SPLIT as above that returns the second text block found index 1 For example if GEOLOGIC UNIT equals Qmw Qc the result is Oc first the SPLIT function returns QC and then is removed with a SUBSTITUTE More examples of each individual function can be found in the Expression Builder dialog box Expand the Expression Components choose a function or constant on the Objects list and the Description tab is updated with explanations and examples Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 87 Expression Builder EXPRESSION LIBRARY Expressions already entered in the MAP Attributes panel MAP Stylesheets panel see chapter 9 or MAP Selections panel see chapter 11 can be re used by selecting them from the Expression Library Expressions are sorted in three categories Recent Named Expressions or Attribute Filter One or more entries can be selected per category Click the Insert button to add the selection to the Expression Builder multiple selections are concatenated with the AND statement Note It is not possible to insert multiple expressions from different categories at once Recent E Expression Library Select one or more expressions Post Recent Expressions 9 Recent Named Expressions f Attribute Fil List of expressions
11. z Create MAP Stylesheet Legend Output Layer Select a layer of feature type legend Output layer O Legend I mtd betweenrules 20 00 pt Space between rules Specify the ae EHE CT TUS Le distance between each rule Style preview Check to include Include the box with graphic style e V Style preview 100 00pt t x 100 00pt _ Preview size Specify the size Rule name Check to 7 Rule name cleric include the rule name V Rule expression Rule expression Check to include the rule expression Point Stylesheets Legend Create MAP Stylesheet Legend Ga Space between rules 20 00pt Include V Style preview 100 00pt Actual size Style preview Check to include the symbol style Actual size Use the actual symbol EE size from the Symbols panel Ss Rule expression Preview size Specify a fixed size for all symbols Text Stylesheets Legend ic Create MAP Stylesheet Legend Space between rules 20 00 pt Include Style preview Check to include a Style preview preview of the word style with F Rule name a character style applied 7 Rule expression FUNCTIONALITY A legend can be quickly created using any MAP Stylesheet Any area line point or text MAP Stylesheets can be used for a legend The legend is composed of a series of boxes for areas or
12. Connect to a GPS device for real time symbol or line tracing MAP GPS And more viii Introduction MAPublisher 8 Features MAP Web Author Export Adobe Illustrator documents with GIS data to interactive Flash maps complete with callout bubbles rollovers layer control pan and zoom controls and with all the underlying GIS attributes intact Export Flash maps without any additional coding or software requirements and embed them to any Web page Further customization using advanced CSS and MAP Web Authort Javascript API is available for advanced users MAPublisher Spatial Database import Import spatial data from ESRI Personal Geodatabase mdb File Geodatabase gdf and ArcSDE servers This function requires ESRI software and a valid license installed on the computer and consequently it is only available on Windows operating systems Supported feature types are Point Polyline Polygon Circular Arc Eliptical Arc Bezier Curve Annotations text The MAPublisher Spatial Database import allows for SQL queries and spatial filters MAPublisher LabelPro MAPublisher LabelPro revolutionizes the way users can label map data including using symbols as labels and label conflict resolution with a high degree of customizable rule based labeling options The MAP LabelPro engine uses your map data attributes for labeling with styles rules and controls configured through an intuitive easy to use Graphical User Interface This fun
13. For best results set up a character style for type font size justification and color Adobe Illustrator menu Window Type Character Style Select the appropriate style in the Character Style panel while using MAP Tagger tool and MAPublisher will generate labels based on these settings Otherwise labels applied will appear in the current default color font and font size The MAP Tagger Tool can be found towards the bottom of the Adobe Illustrator Toolbar Double click the tool to enter new label settings or to edit settings MAP TAGGER TOOL SETTINGS Source Layer and Column First set the options in MAPublisher to determine the attribute values that will be converted to text labels The Source Layer list shows all Area Point and or Text layers in the current document For each layer the Column drop down list is populated with the attribute structure of that layer Select the column that holds the desired attributes to label the data with Target Text Layer In the Text layer drop down lists s specify the Text layer that the labels will be output to Note that labels can only be created in text layers in the same MAP View as the Source Layer LABEL SETTINGS MAPublisher provides options to specify label preferences such as label position alignment to lines of latitude minimum font sizes and horizontal scaling to best place labels within polygons and paths These Label Settings are common to Label Features and MAP Tagger T
14. If no coordinate system is recognized during the import the resulting MAP View source coordinate system is set to No Coordinate System Specified In order to rescale rotate or transform the MAP View a coordinate system must be specified To do so click the Specify button to open the Specify Source Coordinate System dialog box explained below Alternatively use From File to set the source coordinate system using an external file e g wkt map prj or tab 66 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP View Editor Note If you are referencing a non geo referenced Adobe Illustrator file it is not enough to specify the source coordinate system to reference your map you ll also need to specify appropriate MAP Anchor See Georeferencing an Adobe Illustrator file in appendix A1 General Tips In some rare cases the source coordinate system may have been wrongly assigned during the import process due to a wrong manual selection or file issue In this case users may want to specify another coordinate system This should be used with caution because data integrity may be lost if the current coordinate system is overwritten by mistake Changing the source coordinate system does not affect the data geometry on the page To reproject a MAP View to a new coordinate system use Perform Coordinate System Transformation Coordinate System Transformation To reproject a MAP View to another coordinate system using the MAP View Editor click the Pe
15. Intersects Contains Relationship Specify which features should be included Source Coordinate System NAD83 Pennsylvania South ftUS e Intersects includes features that Browse Opens a file folder browser File Geodatabases have the extension gdb Personal Geodatabases end with mdb ource Coordinate System Coordinate system of the selected feature class Input Coordinate System Coordinate ystem specified for entering the filter oordinates if different from source Clear Input Coordinate System Revert to the source coordinate system for intersects with the boundaries Specify Input Coordinate System Clear Input Coordinate S Contains includes only features that are entirely contained within the entering the filter positions boundaries Data Coordinate System Original coordinate Data Coordinate System Ca system of the selected file NAD83 Pennsylvania South ftUS From File mm Alternate Coordinate System Check this option and click Specify to select an alternate Use alternate input coordinate system coordinate system Destination ste Same As Check this option to use a coordinate system that matches an existing MAP View Datum Shift Datum Shift Click to specify a new datum shift Same as San Francisco Downtown From File Spedfy 236 Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geod
16. The following are some examples of basic expressions which can be assigned to columns in Edit Schema Basic expression Result Ontario applied to column NAME All items are assigned the value Ontario in the NAME column All area items are assigned the value MAP Area 01 in the Style column and 1 9 i MAP Area DI applieatorolumn es SEM are assigned the Graphic Style MAP Area 01 on the page All point items are assigned the value 45 in the Rotation column and are 45 applied to column Rotation rotated to 45 on the page Note String values are case sensitive and must be entered in between quotation marks Add Delete and Re Order Columns Columns display in the MAP Attributes panel according to the display order established in Edit Schema The display order of attribute columns in the MAP Attributes panel can be set by reordering the existing column list Any column may be moved up or down the list by selecting it and clicking the Up and Down buttons To create a new column click the Add button and input the desired column properties To delete an existing column choose it from the column list and click the Delete button Click OK to confirm the edits to the schema These edits will be immediately visible in the MAP Attributes panel 82 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Edit Schema Expression Builder Accessed from Edit Schema Apply Expression New Edit MAP Selection MA
17. 223 MAPublisher LabelPro Settings MAPublisher LabelPro Styles POINT AND AREA STYLES The Style dialog box is used to set label style properties for each map layer To access the dialog box click the Style edit button Set the text properties for font family style size and colour A sample preview of the stylized text is shown in the large text box Once the desired settings have been made they can be collectively saved into a style file by clicking Save As MAP LabelPro offers a pre configured default style of 12 point Arial as a base labeling option Once saved Styles are added to the Styles drop down list in the MAP LabelPro Configuration dialog box Style m n 3 Preview Text sample result may not Family Specify the font for the labels Family l Arial be exact for some font families Style Indicate the desired font style e Style Regular Size Specify the font size pes kda Sa m le Save As Save the current settings Colour Click the color chip to Colour C p into a style file open the Adobe Illustrator a sue a E Label case leaveass vje Label Case Select the appropriate erected colour values will be g label case from the drop down list converted to the document Opacity 10096 Leave as is keep case set in colour mode e g CMYK to RGB attribute value Convert to lower case e g abcd Convert to upper case e g ABCD
18. For Label Features and MAP Tagger Tool Text layer For each Source Layer select the Label Features paves sabes ox Source Layer Lists the Point Line and Area e Source Layer Column Destination layers which can be labeled Only selected 1 P uscties_point S CITY_NAME osse es features are listed 2 I Lower area IS STATE NAME I State Names 3 E Interstate SI ROUTE taba cies re Source Column Select the column that contains the values you wish to use to label the selected features aia V 1 i label Settings Click the appropriate button 1 1 Bj ON to assign label settings and rules for each feo T See Settings panels below layer type see below d E i potes i 1 i ios Line Labels Distance from start Controls how text is placed relative to the line Auto places text at the midpoint for straight lines and find the smoothest portion closest to the midpoint for curved lines Fixed allows for precise placement of text along a line Adjust label if larger than line Specify rules for the scaling of text if the text will not fit onto the text path in its entirety Click the Up or Down buttons to adjust the order in which the rules will be implemented in the labeling process Area Labels Line Label Settings destination text layer you wish to place the generated text labels on LabelType 9 Follow line create text
19. Make a selection on the MAP layer concerned and click Add Calculated Data from the MAP Attributes panel options menu Calculate Centroid or Position If the selected data is on a MAP layer of type Line or Area set the Calculation drop down list to Centroid to calculate the x and y position of the line or area centroids If the selected data is on a MAP layer of type Point set the Calculation drop down list to Position to calculate the x and y position of points in a specific coordinate format Note Centroids positions are calculated using the low accuracy method see chapter 6 on Plot Centroids for details In the Column X and Column Y drop down lists users have the option to keep the default new column names new position x and new position y type names of their choice or select an existing column Only existing columns of data type Real are listed Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 95 Add Calculated Data The positions coordinate format is set in the Type drop down list The options are e Page coordinates x and y positions relative to the Adobe Illustrator page reference in page units as specified in the Adobe Illustrator document setup Projected coordinates x and y positions in the source coordinate system of the MAP View containing the selected layer if this system is projected Geodetic coordinates longitude and latitude positions calculated from x and y positions if the source coordinate systems of the MAP View containin
20. Note It is not possible to import multiple files with a mix of unknown and known coordinate systems Therefore the unknown coordinate systems will need to be specified before import Destination MAP view Although the Advanced Import allows users to import files with multiple source coordinate systems they have to be imported into a single coordinate system This information is stored in the Destination MAP View section for more information on MAP Views please refer to chapter 4 Users have three options to select the coordinate system of the Destination MAP View New based on option choose the coordinate system of one of the files selected for import Useexisting option if the Adobe Illustrator document already contains map data choose the MAP View with the desired coordinate system from the list of existing MAP Views in the document With these two options check the option Resize MAP View to fit to rescale all the data existing and incoming to fit on the artboard If this option is not checked the imported data may fall outside the page extents Create new option specify the parameter for a new MAP View Click the Editor button to open the MAP View Editor In the Destination Source Coordinate system section click the Specify button to select a coordinate system from a large list of existing system or to create a custom one The MAP View Editor is explained in depth in chapter 4 in brief it allows for the edition of the scale
21. Opens a dialog box which allows string attribute columns for the the user to create a new string attribute Current Value Clear Vale 3 4 current layer column on the layer Current Value Allows for input of a Clear Value Will clear the current value value to be added as an attribute entered in the Current Value text field to the current column FUNCTIONALITY The Edit User Attribute for Current Layer dialog box provides the options to create a new attribute column for the current layer or use an existing string text attribute column and have custom attribute values automatically entered in that column for plotted features Attribute values will be added each time a new point is plotted For example if points are being plotted along a street a Street column could be created and the street name could be added as an automatic attribute value each time a new point is plotted PREREQUISITES Prior to using this feature the current document requires a MAP View and at least one MAP layer If a MAP layer is selected the Edit User Attribute for Current Layer menu option is enabled and is accessible through the panel options menu Otherwise the menu item will be greyed out and unavailable USING THE EDIT USER ATTRIBUTE FOR CURRENT LAYER DIALOG BOX The Edit User Attribute for Current Layer function can be accessed whenever a valid MAP layer is selected Upon opening the dialog box the current layer n
22. Opens the New Stylesheet dialog box to specify aname and feature type for the new MAP Stylesheet New MAP Stylesheet New MAP Stylesheet Name MAP Stylesheet 1 e Feature Type A Area eme e New MAP Stylesheet Opens the New Stylesheet dialog box to specify a name and feature type for the new stylesheet Duplicate Selection Creates a duplicate of the selected MAP Stylesheet Edit Selection Opens the MAP Stylesheet Editor dialog box to edit the selected MAP Stylesheet Delete Selection Removes the selected MAP Stylesheet from the panel Create MAP Stylesheet Legend Creates a legend using the selected MAP Stylesheet rules Export MAP Stylesheets Export stylesheets to an Adobe Illustrator document Import MAP Objects Import stylesheets from another document Preferences Opens MAPublisher Preferences on the MAP Stylesheet Panel property sheet see chapter 1 MAP Stylesheets are used to quickly style MAP Layers using Adobe Illustrator symbols graphic styles and character styles Stylesheets are defined based on specific values contained in map data MAP Stylesheets can be applied to data on a one to one basis where specific attribute values are assigned with a specific style or symbol i e Style 1 Value A or with attribute value ranges i e Style 2 Greater than Value B and Less than Value C All MAP Stylesheet information is saved in t
23. Specify Anchors Export Coordinate System to File Export LAKES area Layer Name Search amp Replace Sort Art on LAKES area Edit Layer Note Load Custom Coordinate Systems Edit Custom Coordinate Systems Import MAP O Preferences Delete Selection Delete the currently selected MAP View or MAP Layer provided it does not contain any Adobe Illustrator layers Add MAP Layer Create a new MAP Layer through Add MAP Layer dialog box Specify Anchors Manually establish the tie in point between Map and Page Anchors should only be used for new MAP Views or for the correction of georeferencing errors Export Coordinate System to File Exports the selected MAP View coordinate system to a WKT definition wkt see appendix A2 Export Selection Enable the export of the selected MAP View or MAP Layer to various GIS formats Layer Name Search amp Replace Search for text within layer names and specify an alternative Useful for multi layer imports Sort Art on Layer Sort art in ascending or descending order based on attribute Edit Layer Note Add or edit the selected layer s note Load Custom Coordinate Systems Load external coordinate systems in xml format see appendix A2 Edit Custom Coordinate Systems Open the custom coordinate system editor to create new coordinate systems and edit the parameters of existing ones in the data source see appendix A2 Import MAP Objects Import MAP Vie
24. The graphic below shows results of a typical labeling result using options such as stack labels repeat labels allow labels to cross lines and many others Verify that labels were successfully placed in accordance to the rule base set out in the MAP LabelPro configuration Also verify that labels were placed on the appropriate Destination text layers Text failing to meet the labeling criteria will be placed in a Suppression layer if one is available and has been set If no Suppression layer is available the non compliant text is ignored and is not generated Once placed the labels are considered standard text and may be modified using Adobe Illustrator or MAPublisher operations Note Undo and Redo operations are supported when labeling Be aware that undoing a labeling operation will also undo any changes to rules styles or settings made at the same time It may be useful to save without labeling close the MAP LabelPro Editor re open it then proceed to click Save amp Label OPTIONS None Default No statistics panel will display after labeling Just overall totals Totals for all placed and unplaced labels not separated by layer Just layer totals Totals for each layer Shows both placed and unplaced labels Show all Show all statistics The Statistics type drop down lists several options for displaying statistical information after the labeling process is completed This information is useful in determ
25. cells that are smaller than this minimum will not get labeled and will not be used as base for indexes LABELING OPTIONS A number of labeling options are available for use in grids and graticules The Cell Reference options are relative to the indexing labels of grids and graticules In the label placement control click on the axes labels A B or 1 2 and cell labels A1 A2 to enable or disable the display of these labels Use the arrows to change the direction of axes and flip the numeric labels Click a corner graphic to swap which axes are labeled numerically and which are labeled alphabetically Then specify the axes label distance from the grid border Place Labels of cell by option a negative value places labels inside the grid and choose a character style for the Center and Axis styles Note Indexing labels for graticules are always generated as if the graticules covered the full map extents regardless of the actual graticules bounding box The Coordinate Values along Grid Graticule Border options are relative to the coordinate labels of the grids and graticules X Y for indexed and measured grids Lat Lng for graticules In the label placement control click on the X Y or Lat Lng axis labels to select which values are labeled disable X Y or X amp Y for grids disable Lat Lng Both for graticules These options are useful for rotated grids where grid lines may intersect on the wrong border of the grid or curved lines of
26. for MAPublisher 8 3 User Gu A 6 Microsoft MacOS My E Windows e nza Ave SYSTEMS Avenza MAPublisher 8 User Guide Copyright 2000 2010 Avenza Systems Inc All rights reserved e 9 e 9 MAPublisher 8 for Adobe Illustrator User Guide for Windows and Macintosh Avenza MAPublisher and When Map Quality Matters are registered trademarks of Avenza Systems Inc Adobe Illustrator Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc or its subsidiaries and may be registered in certain jurisdictions All other software product names and brands including trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners This manual and the software described in it are furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license The content of this manual is furnished for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Avenza Systems Inc or its related companies or successors Avenza Systems Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors omissions or inaccuracies that may appear in this book Except as permitted by such license no part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical recording or otherwise without prior written approval of Avenza Systems Inc Avenza Systems Inc Tel 41 416 487
27. Al Area layer LI Line layer or P Point layer sorted by MAP View and document To select which layers will have their attributes exported Click the Export Attributes check box for each individual layer to enable or disable the export of attributes Click the Export Attributes check box for a given MAP View to enable or disable the export of attributes for all layers within the MAP View Click the Export Attributes check box next to the document name or next to MAP Views to enable or disable the export of attributes for all layers of all MAP Views Layers that are exported without attributes will be visible in the Adobe Acrobat Layers panel but not in the Model Tree Notes Due to Adobe Acrobat limitations attributes of T Text layers cannot be exported In addition compound path objects that have an element outside the artboard are exported without attributes 214 Chapter 17 Export Geospatial PDF MAP Geospatial PDF Export Model Tree Preferences In Adobe Acrobat the Model Tree displays a list of all the map objects in the document along with their attribute information if applicable organized in a tree structure in MAP View Layer Name Object Name see next section on how to view MAP Geospatial PDF The Model Tree Preferences options control by layer how objects will be displayed in the Adobe Acrobat Model Tree To set these options first select a layer in the Export Attributes for Layer tree The name of the selec
28. Assign Georeferencing Information To Adobe Illustrator Layers Existing Adobe Illustrator layers that do not contain georeferencing or attribute information also appear in this panel under the default MAP View entitled Non MAP layers Such layers can be moved into a specified MAP View with a matching geospatial configuration coordinate system scale position on the page etc Note Moving a non MAP layer to a MAP View does not imply any transformation the artwork is not redrawn Users must ensure that the art on the non MAP layer is positioned and scaled properly on the page with regard to the MAP View definition Moving a non MAP layer into a specified MAP View prompts the Define Layer dialog box in order to specify the feature type of the layer Multiple layers may be selected and moved together to a specified MAP View Use the Apply to all option to assign the same feature type to all layers being moved The Advanced option Base attribute schema on copies the attribute schema from an existing MAP Layer see chapter 5 for details Specify Anchors The Specify Anchors function should only be accessed when referencing a new MAP View for example in the process of georeferencing an Adobe Illustrator file see appendix A1 or to correct an inaccurate referencing The MAP Anchor is entered in the unit of the selected coordinate system MAP Anchor coordinates must be known from information written on the map e g graticules crossing or from e
29. Convert to proper case e g Abcd Opacity Specify the level of opacity for the labels Save As Name Enter a name to Name Land Label Style M save the style This is very helpful in maintaining labeling consistency among similar mapping projects or when multiple users are working on the same project Existing styles may be deleted by selecting it from the Style drop down list and then clicking on the delete button Style files are saved to either a point line or area folder depending on the type of map layer it is associated with By default styles are saved in the following location Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Styles Windows Vista 7 C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Styles Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In LabelPro Styles The default save path for the Styles can be modified in the MAP LabelPro section of the MAPublisher Preferences dialog box Choose Edit gt MAPublisher Preferences Windows or choose Illustrator gt MAPublisher Preferences Mac Notes On Windows labeling with PostScript Type 1 fonts that are not placed in the Windows system font folder will produce an error message Failed to perform label placement FontNotFound Exception In these very rare cases the font files should be copied from the Adobe font folder usually under C Program Files Common Files Adobe Fonts Reqrt B
30. Editing this property will alter the stroke weight of the art describes whether or not the path is closed yes or no Editing this value will open close the path describes the length of the path in world units This property cannot be set describes the scaling of the line stroke Editing this value will scale the stroke weight describes the name of the containing layer This property cannot be set describes the x coordinate in the document units of the current point describes the y coordinate in the document units of the current point describes the internal unique ID to refer to Adobe Illustrator artwork within the document Read only describes the name of the point Editing this property will change the name in the Layers panel describes the horizontal scaling of a point object Editing this value will scale the symbol in the X axis describes the vertical scaling of a point object Editing this value will scale the symbol in the Y axis describes the rotation in degrees of the art around its anchor point Editing this value will rotate art describes the Symbol in use Editing this property will apply the selected symbol to the art describes the x coordinate in the world units of the current point describes the y coordinate in the world units of the current point describes the name of the containing layer This property cannot be set describes the x coordinate in the document units of the current point text For text on a path or
31. F to search the database BE amp 7 7 69 8 for coordinate systems if Search Results are displayed in the ROS Search category e Find n Name Sy Dataset Coordinate Systems Automatically opens if multiple datasets have been selected and they do not have a matching coordinate system r Dataset List of all the datasets selected for import Dataset Coordinate Systems their associated coordinate system You cannot select multiple datasets with different coordinate systems Below you will find a list of your selected datasets and Dataset Coordinate System canada shp NAD27 ukpolyshp WGS84 Coordinate System List the coordinate system of each individual dataset 46 Simple Import Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Settings Opens a Settings dialog box if the file format requires the input of extra parameters such as for the import of DGN DXF DWG E00 GML KML MIF MID Tab and Delimited Text Data see facing page Browse Opens a Data Source browser to enable the selection of files for import Character Encoding Assign a codec if the attribute information held in the selected dataset uses a double byte character set Coordinate System Information This area shows information about the Coordinate systems i e Name Type Envelope EPSG Code To choose a known source coordinate system select it from this list Search Click this
32. File will be exported in UTF 8 Options Delimiter Specify the field delimiter Select Comma Semi Colon Space or Tab from the Scope Export all attributes Export visible attributes only drop down list FUNCTIONALITY Delimiter Comma m 7 Indude column names on first line e Include column names on first line Click this option to export the column names on the first line of the exported text file The Export Attributes function exports all selected attribute information from the current MAP Layer to a delimited text file comma semi colon space or tab separated PREREQUISITES Attributes will be exported as they are in the MAP Attributes panel For example users can change the number of decimals for attributes of type Real prior to exporting see Edit Schema in this chapter to limit the size of the exported file or to turn on off the visibility of some attributes with Edit Schema or the MAP Attributes panel Show Hide function USING EXPORT ATTRIBUTES Export attributes is accessed from the MAP Attributes panel options menu In the Export Attributes dialog box click the Browse button to navigate to the directory where the exported file will be saved and type a file name By default the exported file will be appended a txt extension to export in another delimited text format type another file extension csv or tsv in the fi
33. Identification Definition Semi Major Axis Value 6378137 m Units Meter BT Semi Minor Axis Value 6356752 31424518 m Units Meter Je Inverse Flattening Value 298 257223563 v Inverse Flattening Definitive Coa Eee Ellipsoid Editor Envelopes The use of an envelope is not required but very much recommended to indicate the geographical extents where a given coordinate system is applicable To define Envelopes you must select whether or not there are extents points and if so what point style they are in and what the values of the minimum and maximum points are v Envelope Editor t3 Identification Definition V Specify Extents Points Point Style Geodetic Point 2d in Degree m Minimum Point Longitude 28 64 deg Latitude 59 87 deg Maximum Point Longitude 10 32 deg Latitude 69 23 deg Lu Lome Envelope Editor A2 9 Horizontal Datums For Horizontal datums you must select the Ellipsoid the datum is based on as well as the prime meridian used Linear Units Horizontal Datum Editor E3 Identification Definition Ellipsoid Bessel 1841 Prime Meridian Greenwich Horizontal Datum Editor For Linear units you must enter a conversion for the new unit in terms of the scientific standard metres The abbreviation is used to identify the unit within th
34. In order to use line patterns and fill patterns you must have opened or accessed the style library equivalents Two library files have been created MIF LineStyles ai and MIF AreaStyles ai which provide support for many of the standard MapInfo pen styles stroke patterns and brush styles fill patterns These files can be found in the Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder on the MAPublisher DVD Please refer to your Adobe Illustrator User Guide for details about how to add these libraries to your Adobe Illustrator Graphic Style panel A1 7 MAPINFO TABLE TAB TAB is a proprietary geospatial vector data format for geographic information systems software used by MapInfo mapping products A minimum of two files are required for the tab format The DAT file which stores the attribute data and the TAB ASCII file which is the link between all other files and holds information about the type of data file The MapInfo TAB importer is closely patterned after the MapInfo MIF MID reader and writer This commonality makes it easy to support both MIF and MapInfo native formats in the same mapping file A single logical TAB file consists of a number of physical files having the following file name extensions tab The main file for a MapInfo table it is associated with the appropriate dat map id and ind files dat Tabular data for a table in MapInfo native format id An index to a MapInfo graphical objects MAP file map Contains geograph
35. Layer Name Search and Replace i Layer Name Search amp Replace Find what _area Replace with polygon Cancel Replace with Type in the Find what Type in the variable you wish to change variable contained in the the layer names to current layer names on which you wish to search 58 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP Views Panel Specify Anchors Should only be accessed when creating a new MAP View or correcting inaccurate georeferencing information Caution editing anchors can damage the accuracy of the data Specify Anchors Map Anchor The location e Map Anchor Cx Ce ciim Spey cie LLL m which the anchor position the units of the selected P coordinate system Co Seca id 5 is entered Use the current MAP View s Page Anchor The location Page Anchor coordinate system or ofthe Page Anchors in X 179 193048 E specify a different one by the units of the current default the geodetic system document see File Li 269705 oj base of the projection Document Setup or WGS84 in latitude Coordinate System e longitude format Click Use MAP View s coordinate system the Select button to open the Select Coordinate System dialog box and choose any coordinate system Use NAD83 1986 Select OVERVIEW The MAP Views panel displays a list of all the Adobe Illustrator layers in the current document and all MAP Views defined configurations for geos
36. MAPublisher Preferences fe Expression Builder Spatial Database General Spatial Database Editor mama Jj General Import Map Data EES ey 5 MAP Attributes Number of default datasets to remember 30 amp Y MAP LabelPro Number of SQL queries to remember MAP Location Select the number of queries S MAP Measurement memorized in the Recent category f MAP Selections MAP Stylesheets Number of default datasets to remember Q MAP Views 4 j Spatial Database Select the number of default datasets E Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Editor saved in memory for later use E ESRI Geodatabase Editor General Spatial Database Editor RESET MAPUBLISHER PREFERENCES TO DEFAULT SETTINGS MAPublisher Preferences can be reset directly from the MAPublisher Preferences dialog box A right click ona category will display the choice to reset the preference setting of this category or the entire MAPublisher Preferences Reset MAP Views and sub preferences amp Reset all preferences MAPublisher Preferences will also be reset if the Adobe Illustrator preferences are reset or deleted Adobe often recommends this to solve some problems with the application Adobe Illustrator preferences are reset by doing one of the following Press and hold Alt Control Shift Windows or Option Command Shift Mac OS as Adobe Illustrator is starting The current settings are deleted Remove or rename the A Prefs file
37. Note When MAPublisher is un installed or a newer release is installed an option will be given to backup the custom coordinates systems and view file Windows only The backup files can be found Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista 7 C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Backup LOADING A CUSTOM COORDINATE SYSTEMS A geodetic datasource or coordinate system database can be loaded into MAPublisher thus greatly extending the coordinate systems available for use You can load a geodetic database within MAPublisher by choosing Load Custom Coordinate Systems from the MAP Views panel options menu The directory containing the xml file must also contain the file geocalc xsd This file can be found in the directory of the default geodata xml file see above So the custom xml file can either be copied to the Data Source File directory prior to loading or geocalc xsd should be copied from there to the custom xml directory Any additional change will be saved into the loaded xml file A2 3 New MAP View New MAP View For Photoshop Paths ed Duplicate MAP View v Cj mar view Bait MAP Vie es e GER A teverarea D B w Z INon MAP layers Jelete Selection B a Z taver 1 B Add MAP Layer SL Specify Anchors B Export Coordinate System to File ae Export MAP View
38. Select the coordinate format of the data to be imported e g Decimal Degrees Packed DMS see chapter 6 Coa cance 11 White Lines and Fills Import as is 9 Change white lines and fills to black Create black background import black lines instead of the files native white lines Create black background incorporate a layer containing a black background to mimic the AutoCAD environment Decimal Degrees with optional direction indicator Examples 7 5444W 54 9777 79 44 Notation items in are optional means zero or more digits and means one or more digits Direction can be indicated with 7 N or W Coordinate Columns irotae Longitude 123 127416 ette Latitude 49 295093 V Use first line as a header detected Settings Coordinate Format um Format Decimal Degrees D 4 m em Use first line as a header Check this box if the first line of the text file contains column headings Latitude Longitude or X Y Columns These two drop down lists hold the names of all the numeric columns in the selected file Select the columns containing the coordinate information GML validation GML validation must GML Simple Features 2 0 Settings Settings e Disable GML validation no attribute types be disabled to import GML files with a missing xsd file or with an invalid attr
39. Set the feature type to Text To copy the attributes from the source MAP layer to the label destination layer check the option Base attribute schema on and select the appropriate layer to copy its attribute schema For each source layer MAPublisher LabelPro derives the labels from a selected attribute column Use the MAP Attributes panel to analyze and or edit the information prior to labeling For instance to force some labels to be stacked users can insert the characters amp amp in the MAP Attribute value to indicate a Carriage Return this can be done by combining two columns into a new one or using the Find and Replace function It is not possible to label based on an expression e g a road layer with classes such as street highway and toll road can only be labeled with a single style and rule To label multiple classes of a layer use the Split Layer option of the MAP Selection Filter to create new layers for each class see chapter 11 In the MAPublisher Preferences section for MAP LabelPro base rule and style folder paths can be set By default invisible objects are ignored by MAPublisher LabelPro they will not be labeled or used as obstacle To take them into consideration uncheck the option gnore invisible artwork See chapter 1 on MAPublisher Preferences for more information on this topic USING MAPUBLISHER LABELPRO To start MAPublisher LabelPro click the MAP LabelPro button Cor on the MAPublisher Toolbar or choose f
40. Sort list using natural string comparison Enable this option to use the natural sorting for layer and MAP Stylesheet names using numbers e g 1 2 10 instead of 1 10 2 The MAP Views preference category does not contain general settings but has sub categories for the MAP Views editor and panel see chapter 4 for a full description of the MAP Views editor and panel MAP Views gt Editor Preferences MAPublisher Preferences fe Expression Builder General Import Map Data MAP Attributes QY MAP LabelPro MAP Location MAP Measurement P MAP Selections MAP Stylesheets 4 MAP Views E Editor 77 Panel Spatial Database MAP Views gt Editor Start centered on Current artboard E Show Latitude Longitude ordering option Start centered on By default the current artboard is centered in the preview area of the MAP Views dialog box Change the option to have it centered on the current MAP View Show Lat Long ordering option Enable this option to show the Latitude Longitude ordering drop down menu in the MAP Views dialog box This effectively swaps the order of how latitude and longitude values are shown Chapter 1 Getting Started 33 MAPublisher Preferences MAP Views gt Panel Preferences MAPublisher Preferences feo Expression Builder I General Import Map Data MAP Attributes TY MAP LabelPro MAP Location Q MAP Measurement P MAP
41. Then click OK 11 If you have not previously done so ensure that each layer in your Adobe Illustrator file contains only one feature type Point Area Line Text Legend 12 In the MAP Views panel drag each of the layers which contain your data in to your new MAP View ensuring that you set the appropriate Feature Type in the Define Layer dialog box 13 Repeat steps 1 13 for any other coordinate systems which exist in your document such as inset maps for example 14 Your document is now a georeferenced MAPublisher file wherein each feature is also georeferenced and capable of accepting attributes using the MAP Attributes function see chapter 5 You can also use the MAPublisher Export function to create a GIS file from this newly georeferenced Adobe Illustrator map g A1 23 TIPS ON EXPORTING TO OTHER GIS SOFTWARE WITH MAPUBLISHER These strategies do not focus on how to do the procedures as these are discussed in the Export section of the MAP Views chapter but more on what you need to know and understand for successful export results First and most importantly you need to understand that the MAPublisher export was designed to export MP imported or created data one layer and one feature at a time Why is it important to know this MAPublisher only recognizes objects that have been imported by or created with its filters If a layer was not imported with MAPublisher or is not hosted by a designated MAP View then MAPublisher will no
42. Windows or Adobe Illustrator Prefs file Mac OS New preferences files are created the next time Adobe Illustrator is restarted Chapter 1 Getting Started 35 MAPublisher Preferences Preparing the Workspace Before using MAPublisher you must first set up your Adobe Illustrator document It is at this point that you define your page size and units set your print orientation and generally prepare your Adobe Illustrator workspace Establish the desired page size and orientation before importing map data as MAPublisher will establish georeferencing based on the current page However editing page dimensions after import will maintain correct georeferencing based on the new page dimensions Note If no document is open MAPublisher Simple and Advanced Import initiate the New Document dialog box SETTING UP A DOCUMENT 1 Create a new Adobe Illustrator document by selecting File New or Select File Document Setup if you already have a blank document open The Adobe Illustrator Document Setup dialog box appears 2 Select the size to use for your page Letter 8 5 x 11 is the default size You may wish to change the orientation to landscape for some files For example a map of Chile may be best displayed in portrait but a map of Indonesia may be best displayed in landscape Select your desired page units The default unit type is Points 4 Ensure the page origin is at 0 0 To do this select View gt Show Rulers Double click t
43. and choose any additional settings that may be required The lower section displays the coordinate system of the selected file if available and provides an option to specify one manually Adding Files First specify the format of the file to be imported Set the Format drop down list as Auto detect format or to a specific format With the Auto detect format option all supported GIS files will be displayed in the browser Choosing the required format directly is recommended to ease navigation Once a format has been selected click the Browse button to select the file s to be imported and then click Open Alternatively type in the full path of the file s in the Dataset text box Only files in a same format and sharing the same coordinate system can be imported at once with the MAPublisher Simple Import dialog box Notes The import of multiple Delimited Text files is not supported Data provided in a generic latitude and longitude unprojected coordinate system will usually be recognized as a WGS 84 World Geodetic System 1984 EPSG 4326 coordinate system by the MAPublisher importers Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 49 Simple Import Source Coordinate System Once the Dataset text box has been populated with a valid path MAPublisher will read the file s to determine if a valid coordinate system can be found and will display it in the Source Coordinate System section If the program returns the message No Coordinate System Spe
44. change the path Symbol folder Directory path to the symbol folder Click the browse button Eto open a folder browser and change the path Ignore invisible artwork Enable this option to ignore individual invisible artwork If this option is disabled individual invisible artwork will be taken into account as labelling source and obstacle Default rules and styles folders respectively Rules and Styles subfolders in the directory Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Windows Vista 7 C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In LabelPro Default symbol folder Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Symbols Windows Vista 7 C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Symbols Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In LabelPro Symbols Chapter 1 Getting Started 31 MAPublisher Preferences MAP Location Preferences The MAP Location preference category does not contain general settings but has a sub category for the MAP Location Tool panel see chapter 4 for a full description of the MAP Location Tool MAP Location gt Panel Preferences MAPublisher Preferences foo Expression Builder I General Import Map Data MAP Attributes amp MAP LabelPro 4 MAP Location E Panel MAP Measurement
45. data as of the raster Minnesota Most countries or geographic areas have published standards or usual North Dakota way for representing the land e g for road maps or meteorological maps eom RE In this case the user should make some test with the systems listed in f ussmermeMEncr E MAPublisher For a convenient use coordinate systems are sorted by 1 m x continent gt country gt sub division state or county for example A2 1 In doubt it is recommended to test different coordinate systems and visualize the results For more information on the supported coordinate systems and projections in MAPublisher please refer to the Avenza Projections Guide pdf document installed with MAPublisher Examples of appearance of the USA depending of the chosen coordinate system Geodetic gt World gt WGS84 unprojected A2 2 The Geodetic Datasource MAPublisher includes an extensive geodetic parameter database called the Geodetic Datasource It contains all the latest updates from the widely used EPSG Geodetic Parameter Dataset maintained by the Geodesy Subcommittee of OGP International Association of Oil and Gas producers as well as custom systems maintained by Avenza In addition the MAPublisher Geodetic Datasource supports user s custom definitions and allows for importing external WKT Well Know Text and PRJ ESRI projection file parameter files Over 3500 pre defined coordinates systems are readily available for use
46. e Layer s Use current layer i Expression Enter or edit the expression directly into the entry field or access Expression Empty expression In position 0 34 gt Expression Builder see chapter 5 i s Expression Library see chapter 5 Expression Validity Indicates if the tanien selected ORD E Legend QO 0 Sar expression is s valid or invalid le Bar B ancel PON wn n MEM I State Names 5 If invalid additional information is IP uscities point Q reported I usroads line v p PB Capitals B U Select All Clear Show Selection Highlights the Art Selection on the artboard Show Selection Replace Art Selection New Art Selection No parameter required Type Store the currently selected art Cancel Edit Art Selection Add Cancel 1 Replace Replaces the saved Art Selection with the current artboard selection Spatial Relationship Choose the method applied for the spatial filter Intersect and contain objects that intersect or are contained within the delimiting features will be selected Fully contained only objects that are fully contained within the delimiting features will be selected Filter Text By Choose the specific behavior for selecting text First letter of text the position of efilter Text By the first letter of a text is used to make a selection Ful
47. latitude or longitude The label rotation Horizontal or Vertical can be modified Other options for the coordinate labels are Graticules only If line does not hit bounds label None Latitude Longitude or Latitude amp Longitude Place labels off line by a negative value places labels inside the grid e Number of decimals decimal places for grid labels Label values coordinates or distance from the lower left corner of the grid index and measured grids only Append units to labels e g degree symbol m Apply locale formatting to numbers apply number formatting according to the locale settings in the MAPublisher Preferences e g 10000 may be written 10 000 or 10 000 or 10 000 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 167 Grids and Graticules ADVANCED OPTIONS Click the Advanced button to access additional grid extents and labeling options Modify the bounding box extents of the grid or graticules by entering new coordinates for the Lower Left and Top Right position of the grid It is also possible to edit the first value used for cell labels by editing the Start alpha numeric index at values Omit certain alpha characters from cell references with the Do not use characters option For example it may be useful to omit the characters I and O for indexing purposes when entering alpha characters to omit separate characters with a comma The Reference label order option can be edited to change the center labels
48. make copy and modify existing objects The custom objects are stored in a separate xml file saved by the user Users can also re organize the Geodetic Datasource default and custom parameters into categories and sub folders These changes are saved to a view file xvw The view file may be deleted to reset the Custom Coordinate Systems Editor to its default state gt na Edit Custom Coordinate Systems Datasource File containing the default geodetic je Datasource C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files geodata xml OK parameter geodata xml je Custom Data C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8lcustomsystems xml Save Save As Save changes Folder lg 7 Display Name Name Units per Degree Abbrev EPSG Code me to a custom file data to Custom Data File containing rers Units LL Aue Arin 60 30 xml and view to xvw 1 Coordinate Points ArcSecond ArcSecond 3600 arc 9104 Save As the custom geodetic i Coordinate Systems d Centesimal Minute Centesimal Minute 1111111111111 9112 seres parameter File loaded or J Se dj Centesimal Second Centesimal Second 11111 111111111 9113 amp Elipsoids fe Degree Degree 1 deg 9102 2 i _ saved by the user Envelopes d Degree supplier to define repre Degree supplier 1 9122 Lock Icon Indicates rea
49. scale value is a real world scale exact ratio linear distance on the page over distance on the ground For MAP Views in a geodetic coordinate system i e Lat Long format in angular unit the scale value is approximated using the common formula 1 111 353m metres per degree at the equator This is not an accurate number because the formula is only valid at the equator but it is more intuitive for cartographic considerations The scale can be edited manually typing in a precise value or by using the Up and Down arrows to increase or decrease the scale by 1096 of the starting value The Auto Scale button applies the scale to fit the visible data in the preview to the page extent and centers the map on the page see Preview Pane Rotation A rotation figure can be applied or edited by specifying an angle in the entry field or by using the arrow buttons Notice that changes to rotation will be automatically previewed in the Preview Pane with the green rectangle and arrow depicting the new orientation of the data Click button to reset the angle to 0 Click iN button to orient the MAP View True North up True North is calculated at the center of the data extents Set Source Coordinate System In most cases the MAP View source coordinate system is initially assigned during the import process if the imported data file contains such information see chapter 3 To view the properties of the source coordinate system click the info button
50. will find the smoothest portion of the curved line closest to the midpoint When selecting Fixed the distance from start is set as a percentage of the length of the line Flip upside down labels is enabled by default and will automatically orient labels uniformly if some lines are flipped Disabling this feature will not flip labels If the Line Smoothing option is used MAPublisher creates a smoothed version of the selected path for each text object in the layer and places the text along this path at the specified Offset value The labels can then be dragged and positioned at any position along a line If the Line Smoothing option is not selected the labels follow the original path Note Forlines with a high number of vertices e g contour lines using the Line Smoothing option significantly speeds up the labeling process The Label Position option allows for the selection of the vertical position of the labels relative to the line Three options are available e Baseline places labels above the generated text path e Descender places the portion of a letter in a Latin derived alphabet that normally extends below the baseline of a particular font above the generated text path Center places the label on the generated text path Labels can be modified if they exceed the length of the line in the current default font size First check the Adjust label if larger than line option to activate the label rules Rules are executed by MAPublishe
51. 1984 EPSG 4326 coordinate system by the MAPublisher importers Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 43 Import and Export Supported Data Formats Importing Map Data The Import functions are the starting point for most users wanting to work with GIS map data in Adobe Illustrator These functions are used to import GIS data set the initial map scale and define your cartographic workspace to start making maps MAPublisher 8 supports import of the following GIS data formats CAD dxf dwg Digital Line Graph dlg opt ESRI ArcInfo Generate gen ESRI Interchange File e00 ESRI Shapefile shp GML Simple Features 2 0 MapInfo Interchange mif mid MapInfo Table tab MicroStation Design dgn Delimited Text Data txt csv tsv KML KMZ kml kmz S 57 000 Spatial Data Transfer Standard SDTS ddf TIGER Line rt1 bw1 Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabase ESRI File Geodatabase gdb ESRI Personal Geodatabase mdb See chapter 2 for a description of these formats Two import functions are discussed in detail in this section Simple Import designed to provide a fast way to import one file or several files of the same data format and coordinate system into Adobe Illustrator Advanced Import provides functionality to import a number of files of differing data type and or coordinate systems into Adobe Illustrator t Import settings for
52. 5116 124 Merton Street Suite 400 Toll Free North America 1 800 884 2555 Toronto Ontario MAS 2722 Fax 1 416 487 7213 Canada Email info avenza com Web http www avenza com Support Tel 1 416 487 6442 Support email support avenza com Data import export and co ordinate conversion powered by GeoTranslate and GeoCalc 2010 Blue Marble Geographics Inc All Rights Reserved MAPublisher LabelPro powered by text placement engine from MaprText Inc Copyright 2010 MapText Inc All Rights Reserved Protected by U S Patent 7 583 273 Patents Pending in the U S and other countries Cover and Chapter Intro maps courtesy of Carta Topografica Del Monte Calisio e Altipiano Argentario Nature Dynamics snc Rovereto Italy e Geologic Map of Washington State Washington State Dept of Natural Resources Olympia WA USA Hawkesbury River Australian Geographic Terreay Hills NSW Australia Fostering Transit Oriented Development in Boston Boston Redevelopment Authority Boston MA USA Official Map of Louisiana 2000 Louisiana Department of Transportation and Development Baton Rouge LA USA Wandkaart Apeldoorn City of Apeldoorn Apeldoorn The Netherlands Grand Canyon Sky Terrain Boulder CO USA The World Physical XYZ Digital Map Co Ltd Glasgow and Edinburgh Scotland The Long Path South Central Catskills New York New Jersey Trail Conference Mahwah NJ USA Birmingham CityMap Paperba
53. 8 Features ix MAP Point Plotter Panel MAP Point Plotter places points e g locations of towns or cities based on user input locations onto any projected map in projected units or lat long format decimal degrees or Degrees Minutes Seconds MAP Point Plotter also offers the option to instantly plot centroids for line or area features Import Export Data Import data from mapping applications such as ArcGIS MapInfo MicroStation Google Earth and other sources with all attributes and georeferencing intact Make vector and database edits data edits additions and save your changes to a variety of GIS data formats Newly supported formats are KMZ GML and S 57 import only MAP Views The MAP Views panel controls the Adobe Illustrator layers organization into geographically referenced entities It offers many ancillary tools export to GIS format layer lock and display control Switch to MAP View exchange MAP Objects between Adobe Illustrator documents Several geographical references can be maintained per document e g main map and inset maps stored as MAP Views Each MAP View scale transformation position on the artboard is configured through the MAP View Editor with many option for display zoom rescale rotation etc MAP Attributes The attribute table holds map attribute information for line area and point data Add and remove columns edit schemas join tables calculate and apply expressions to customize map attributes
54. Acrobat documentation that can be found under the Adobe Acrobat menu Help gt Adobe Acrobat Help or on the Adobe Website www adobe com Not all tools are available for every Adobe Acrobat version below is a matrix showing the features availability per Adobe Acrobat version Acrobat 9 Reader Acrobat 9 Standard Acrobat 9 Pro Acrobat 9 Pro Extended Windows only Geospatial Measuring Tool Measure distance perimeter area v v v Store measurements as comments vV v v Export import PDF comments v v v Geospatial Location Tool Show on screen coordinates v v v Search for zoom to a location v4 v v Mark location with right click x v v Copy coordinates to clipboard x v v Geospatial PDF Registration Tool Create from geoTIFF JPG2000 x x v Georegister a PDF map image x x A Add shapefile layers to a map x x A To enable the measurement tool in Acrobat Reader 9 the file must first be opened in Acrobat Standard Pro or Pro Extended to enable annotations on the PDF menu Comments Enable for commenting and analysis Note The extended tools of Adobe Acrobat Pro Extended are not necessary for MAPublisher users because these functions can be performed by MAPublisher Adobe Acrobat Pro Extended is currently not supported for Mac operating systems 218 Chapter 17 Export Geospatial PDF View MAP Geospatial PDF 3 Mile Tree Mt Hollywood ms Dante Captain s View Roost an Berlin Forest Dp Gul Gri
55. Anchor values must be relative to the Global Rulers Switch to the Global Rulers by choosing View Rulers Change to Global Rulers Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 61 MAP Views Panel Layer Name Search amp Replace To quickly change the names of multiple Adobe Illustrator layers use the Layer Name Search amp Replace function located in the MAP Views panel options menu For example MicroStation Design or CAD imports can contain a large number of similarly named layers and doing a name search and replace is more efficient than manually changing each of them Zoom to MAP Layer or to MAP View To zoom to a MAP Layer select one and click the Layers Operations button a at the bottom of the MAP Views panel Click the Zoom to Layer in the context menu When a MAP View is selected this option becomes Zoom to all layers in IMAP View This is particularly useful for documents containing a large number of layers Layers Operations The Layer Operations button EEA allows to perform multiple layers hide lock operations at once If a MAP Layer is selected use the context menu to Lock Unlock Hide or Show Layer or to Lock Unlock Hide or Show all layers except Layer If a MAP View is selected the same options become for all layers in MAP View or all layers except layers in MAP View MAP Layer Note MAP Layer Notes are meant to contain general information on the layer such as how it was created or on its sour
56. Categorized graphic style library for use in Area Stylesheets QuickMap Styles Line ai Categorized graphic style library for use in Line Stylesheets QuickMap Styles Point ai Symbol library with common map symbols for use in Point Stylesheets Helpful Styles amp Symbols gt Graphic Styles This folder contains five graphic style libraries with various useful styles for areas and lines MAP AreaStyles ai A custom library of styles for use in Area Stylesheets MAP LineStyles ai A custom library of style for use in Line Stylesheets DGN LineStyles ai A library of MicroStation DGN line styles 1 7 for use in Line Stylesheets MIF_AreaStyles ai A library of MapInfo MIF MID area styles 1 71 for use in Area Stylesheets MIF_LineStyles ai A library of MapInfo MIF MID line styles 1 77 for use in Line Stylesheets Helpful Styles amp Symbols gt Symbols This folder contains eight symbols libraries categorized per topics Aeronautical symbols ai A library of aeronautical point symbols Bank Symbols ai A library of symbols for major world banks for use in Point Stylesheets MAP Symbols ai A library of useful map symbols NorthArrows ai A library of north arrow symbols for use in the Create North Arrow filter Parks Symbols ai A library of symbols composed from the US National Parks Service font library Subway Symbols ai A library of symbols from the major subway lines in the world Transit Symbols ai A library of symbols for the
57. Digital Line Graph dlg opt ESRI ArcInfo Generate gen ESRI Interchange File e00 ESRI Shapefile shp GML Simple Features 2 0 MapInfo Interchange mif mid MapInfo Table tab MicroStation Design dgn Delimited Text Data txt csv tsv KML kml kmz 57 000 Spatial Data Transfer Standard SDTS ddf TIGER Line rt1 bw1 Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabase ESRI File Geodatabase gdb ESRI Personal Geodatabase mdb Export Formats CAD dxf dwg ESRI Interchange File e00 ESRI ArcInfo Generate gen ESRI Shapefile shp GML Simple Features 3 1 1 MapInfo Interchange mif mid MapInfo Table tab MicroStation Design dgn Delimited Text Data txt csv tsv KML KMZ kml kmz This section provides an overview of the supported formats For an in depth analysis of further considerations when using these formats during Import please see appendix A1 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 37 Import and Export Supported Data Formats DATA FORMAT DESCRIPTIONS AutoCAD Drawing dwg and Drawing Exchange dxf Import and Export These file types are most commonly created by Autodesk AutoCAD product though other software programs such as Bentley MicroStation and various other computer aided design CAD programs are capable of creating files in this format There are two formats used by AutoCAD DXF draw
58. ESRI Geodatabases 231 Overview A Geodatabase is a native ESRI ArcGIS data format for storing geographic data It is a collection of geographic datasets of various types used in ArcGIS and managed in either a file folder or a relational database such as A Feature classes of points lines polygons and annotation for discrete features Feature datasets group of feature classes Descriptive attributes held in tables e Raster datasets and raster catalogs for imagery ESRI supports several types of Geodatabases that can all be imported in MAPublisher File User access Size limit RDBMS ESRI Licensing MAPublisher extension Technology create Import access Personal Geodatabase Single Microsoft Access Arcinfo Folder browser Jet Engine ArcEditor ArcView File Geodatabase Single No RDBMS uses Arcinfo Folder browser local file structure ArcEditor ArcView ArcSDE Desktop Multiple SQL Server ArcGIS Engine ArcSDE server Geodatabase limited Express Arcinfo connection called Personal in 9 2 ArcEditor ArcSDE Workgroup Multiple 4GB SQL Server ArcGIS Server ArcSDE server Geodatabase limited Express Workgroup connection ArcSDE Enterprise Multiple Depends on DB2 ArcGIS Server ArcSDE server Geodatabase unlimited the server Informix Enterprise connection Oracle PostgreSQL SQL server For all Geodatabases an ArcEngine license is the minimum requirement for direct read of vector and raster data MAPublisher has the
59. ESRI geodatabases formats are covered in chapter 19 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 45 Format Select the data type you wish to import This drop down list shows the names of all MAPublisher Simple Import File gt Import Map Data gt Simple and MAP Toolbar Simple Import C _ supported data types Dataset Displays the directory e Format ESRI Shapefile shp x Settings path and filename for the currently selected file s You can also manually type in the dataset location here Dataset lisher 8 Tutorial Guide amp Data Tutorial Data canada shp Browse z Encoding Unicode 8 bit UTF 8 xj Source Coordinate System Provides a description of the coordinate Source Coordinate System NAD27 I re 7 Same as alaska system and units detected in the data source Sameas Check this option in order to assign a coordinate system that matches that of an existing MAP View RELATED TOOLS 49 Co Clear Click this button to clear the existing source Coordinate system View Coordinate System Information Click to view more information about the current coordinate system Specify Source Coordinate System Accessed via the Specify button Specify If the coordinate system of the selected file s is known but it was not automatically detected by the program Click here This
60. Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions rt1 bw1 Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute tiger type Line Yes Text No Supported Versions 1992 1995 1997 1998 1999 2000 2002 USGS SDTS CATD DDF SDTS is the USGS robust way of transferring Earth referenced spatial data between dissimilar computer systems with the potential for no information loss It is a transfer standard that embraces the philosophy of self contained transfers i e spatial data attribute georeferencing data quality report data dictionary and other supporting metadata all included in the transfer More info can be found at http mcmcweb er usgs gov sdts Files in the SDTS format will have the extension ddf More information on this format can be found at http mcmcweb er usgs gov sdts A group of ddf files is normally identified by the catalog file or CATD DDF file which relates the files of a single SDTS transfer and binds together all the files with a common prefix Always select the SDTS file which ends in CATD i e HPOTCATD DDF Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions ddf Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes
61. FINAL MAP COORDINATE SYSTEM Most of cartographic projects are restricted in the choice of coordinate system for the final map This parameter is usually part of the project requirement It is the task of the professional cartographer to analyze carefully the situation to make the wise decision For general purpose mapping projects interpretive or marketing maps for example a more approximative selection of the coordinate systems might be acceptable Following the request from some of our users who may not have a cartographic expertise here are a list of simple considerations to take into account before making a choice Use of a Geodetic Coordinate system angular coordinates Lat Long A Geodetic Appropriate for overlay with GPS data recorded in Lat Long format ain WGS84 system is required to export vector data to KML format for display essa in Google Earth Google Maps die c Useofa Projected coordinate system S Appropriate for printed map so that users can use a ruler to measure p mai SORE distances on the map T Canada Required to add a scale bar pire PN 3 Greenland Use of a particular system within the list of projected and geodetic systems a Maps that are part of a portfolio or Atlas have to comply to the same ue system to be consistent When a geo referenced image geotiff or world tiff is to be used together Surat tee with the data it is easier to use the same coordinate system for the vector a
62. FeatureClass ld Tableid Import and inner join a feature class to a related table and AND Table Attribute ABC apply a query SELECT FROM Feature Class WHERE FeatureClass ld IN SELECT Import a feature class without joining to a related table but Table Id FROM Table WHERE Table Attribute ABC usea table value to make a query Note SQL syntax may vary depending on the database server type Once the vector data is imported into Adobe Illustrator the database relationships rules do not apply anymore It is however possible to use the MAP Attributes panel Join Table function to join Geodatabase tables with MAPublisher vector data For more information please refer to chapter 5 Note When the non spatial table information is imported together with the feature class using a SOL query only the vector features that have a record in the related table are imported Import first the feature class and use Join Table in a second step all vector features are imported and the related table information is added where a record match is found This second option might be recommended if the database is not well known Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases 235 Overview Import ESRI Personal and File Geodatabases Simple Import Advanced Import gt Add a Simple Import Format Select ESRI File Geodatabase Format ESRI Personal Geodatabase mdb x settings or ESRI Personal Geodatabase Cancel Dataset sel
63. Getting Started 17 Installation Instructions MAPublisher Compatibility Notes MAPublisher 8 3 is compatible with Adobe Illustrator CS3 CS4 and CS5 Please read the following important compatibility information for use when opening legacy MAPublisher and Adobe Illustrator documents BACKWARDS COMPATIBILITY All MAPublisher documents are not backwards compatible with previous versions of MAPublisher Saving the Adobe Illustrator document to an older version e g saving a CS5 document as CS4 may have unexpected results such as loss of data attributes It is recommended to save a copy of the file in the current Adobe Illustrator version before attempting to save to a legacy version MAPUBLISHER 5 OR EARLIER DOCUMENTS Point Data MAPublisher introduced new standards on dealing with point data in MAPublisher 6 Pre MAPublisher 6 documents will have font based points converted to symbols on opening of the document MAPUBLISHER 6 OR EARLIER DOCUMENTS Grids and Graticules Grids and Graticules were redesigned in MAPublisher 7 Please note that grids created in previous versions of MAPublisher 6 x and earlier will need to be recreated with the new tool if the generation of an index is required Legend to Stylesheet Conversion Legend functionality Assign Legend Info Draw Legend etc was ported into MAP Stylesheets in MAPublisher 7 Legend information held in legacy MAPublisher documents 6 x and earlier will be converted into style
64. Getting Started MAPublisher Compatibility Notes ALL MAPUBLISHER DOCUMENTS IN ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR 10 OR EARLIER FORMAT Legacy Text Conversion Adobe introduced new methods on dealing with text art in Adobe Illustrator CS Therefore files containing MAPublisher text objects must be converted using Adobe Illustrator and MAPublisher text conversion utilities If the Illustrator Legacy Text Conversion message appears when opening a legacy document you should click OK if the text contains attributes that need to be retained This will allow MAPublisher to use its own conversion utility to update text items maintaining the text attributes If you click Update the document will be opened however all attributes associated with this text will be lost When receiving the MAPublisher Legacy Text message choose one of the following Alltext art to convert both MAPublisher text and regular Adobe Illustrator text to the new Adobe Illustrator text format Y MAPublisher text art only to convert only MAPublisher text to the new Adobe Illustrator text format X Nothing to open the file but lose attribute information associated with MAPublisher text elements Legacy Document Format MaP isher Adobe Illustrator 10 or earlier Open in Adobe Illustrator CS3 or CS4 Adobe Illustrator This file contains text that was created in a previous version of Illustrator This legacy text must be updated before you can edit
65. Inter change File ESRI Arcinfo Generate FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES ESRI Shapefile GML Simple Features MapInfo MID MIF MapInfo TAB FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES MicroStation Design When using system encoding on Windows XP for example using the default Japanese encoding on Japanese Windows XP Filename Export Image YI xt When using non system encoding on Windows XP for example using Japanese encoding on English Windows XP v Ix A1 14 Data Format World File tfw Image Report irp Mapinfo TAB tab ListGeo 1go GeoTIFF tif DIETS oS X Unicode Support Working with Images Filename Register Image File Directory Register Image File Directory Export Image Filename Export Image Limited support not all combinations of Unicode characters are supported A1 15 Technical Support Options FAQ MAPublisher support is provided free of charge to customers with a current MAPublisher Maintenance Program MMP subscription All new license and upgrade purchases include a one year MMP subscription Customers without a current MMP subscription may obtain support from a qualified MAPublisher technical specialist at the rate of US 49 per incident TECHNICAL SUPPORT Please consult the FAQs the additional how to s on the following pages as well as the following online option
66. LabelPro MAPublisher Preferences fe Expression Builder I General Import Map Data MAP Attributes Qf MAP LabelPro l MAP Location S MAP Measurement P MAP Selections MAP Stylesheets MAP Views Spatial Database MAP LabelPro Base rule folder Base style folder Symbol folder C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Rules C ProgramData Avenza MAPubiisher 8 LabelPro Styles C Program Files x86 Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Symbols V Ignore invisible artwork Co Ce bd Note The default directories for the rule style and symbol folder are as follow Table font Set the text font for headers and attribute values Table font size Set the text font size Show icons in column headers Enable this option to display the data type in front of the attribute column name Bl Boolean Integer I Real and ISI String Show display names in column headers Enable this option to show the display name of a column header instead of the actual column name Show recordset navigation Enable this option to show navigation buttons in the MAP Attributes panel Use them to scroll through attribute records Base rule folder Directory path to the rule folder Click the browse button J to open a folder browser and change the path Base style folder Directory path to the style folder Click the browse button Eto open a folder browser and
67. MAP Area Tool Ellipse a MAP Vector Crop Tool MAP Measurement Tool MAP Tagger Tool EH MAP Location Tool Chapter 1 Getting Started 25 The MAPublisher Tools MAPublisher Toolbar Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Toolbar The new MAPublisher Toolbar allows the user to launch the MAPublisher tools described in the previous paragraph in a single click The MAP toolbar is divided in five sections MAPublisher Import MAPublisher Lines MAPublisher LabelPro MAPublisher Legends MAPublisher Imaging and MAPublisher Panels I i i 82 Ha l masm a BEB Xe L PY C SW qae MAPublisher Import Export MAPublisher Imaging MAPublisher Lines MAPublisher Labeling MAPublisher Legends Document Operations MAPublisher Panels Note MAPublisher Toolbar cannot be saved in a workspace Adobe Illustrator main menu Window gt Workspace MAPUBLISHER IMPORT EXPORT Simple Import Advanced Import a T2 tee Export Geospatial PDF MAPUBLISHER LINES Buffer Art Line Plotter Flip Line Simplify Lines Join Lines Join Points MAPUBLISHER LABELING Create Knockouts MAP LabelPro Label Features 26 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher Toolbar MAPUBLISHER LEGENDS North Arrow Scale Bar Grids Graticules Make Index MAPUBLISHER IMAGING Export Image Register Image 4 m t ge P MA
68. MAP Attributes are the base to many other MAPublisher tools such as line functions MAP Stylesheets MAP Web Author they can be exported to text file for further usage MAP Stylesheets MAPublisher quickly and easily styles points lines areas and text Specify rules in MAP Stylesheets to apply preset or custom symbols graphic styles and character styles to artwork based on exisiting map attributes MAP Selections Build edit and apply multiple selection criteria based on the attributes and properties contained in MAP Layers using MAP Selections Selection criteria are created in an expression builder and can be applied to any MAP layer and can be saved so they can be edited or applied later MAP Measurement Tool The MAP Measurement Tool measures straight distances between two points path distances multiple points azimuths and the perimeter and area of closed paths in page or map unit real world distances Furthermore the measuring path can be converted to a line or area in the currently selected layer X MAPublisher 8 Features Line functions Join lines or points and flip lines while keeping attributes intact Use Simplify Line to reduce the number of vertices in a point with preview and information on the number of filtered points Create lines based on a series of point locations Use Buffer Art to create buffer areas around line area or point features Labeling Create labels for map objects using values from
69. MAP Stylesheet To use the same style for multiple rules the style must first be duplicated in the appropriate Adobe Illustrator panel PREREQUISITES The desired symbols graphic styles or character styles must be available in the Adobe Illustrator document See previous section on Loading Symbol and Styles or refer to the Adobe Illustrator documentation on how to create new symbol and styles All Adobe Illustrator symbols and styles are supported by the MAP Stylesheet As stated above it may be necessary to duplicate some symbols prior to accessing the MAP Stylesheet Editor It may also be useful to rename symbol and styles to make them more easily identifiable Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets 129 MAP Stylesheet Editor USING MAP STYLESHEET EDITOR Select a MAP Stylesheet that hosts at least one MAP Layer click the stylesheet name and choose Options gt Edit from the panel options menu Alternatively double click the new MAP Stylesheet The Name of the MAP Stylesheet is displayed at the top of this dialog box and can be edited Beside it an icon representing the feature type is displayed The workflow to create rules for the stylesheet is simple click Add then specify a Name Style Expression and Scale Click the Apply button at any time to preview the results In order to delete a style rule from the list click anywhere in its row to select it and click the Remove button Click OK to exit the dialog box and to assign the MAP St
70. MAPublisher Compatibility Notes 2 0 0 2 0 0 c cece eee cnet I 18 MAPublisher License Management 0 cece e eee teen ee 20 The MAPublisher Tools cre rhe he rtr rt Rr rmn 24 MAPublisher Toolbar sesser eorr ee Ex Rr n a Re RE rn He E EXPE ER 26 MAPublisher Preferences sec ee eee eee eee e et rivene titenana 28 Preparing the Workspace 0 ccc cece dr irada teeh em hene 36 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 37 Import and Export Supported Data Formats cce cece cence eee enee 38 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 45 SiMPleIMPONE assiro rote ele E xol eux Urn eet o ao A peienun 46 Advanced Import 5 cuore eteee here ES reb ueste e Erie e e helbE o 52 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 55 GEOTETEFENCING senses ode seo ORE UI EEUU ES UIN Op d Un expands 56 MAP Views Panel cee eeciaaaccede Re rre ode xe kei ree re canis Pelea 57 MAP View Editor 4 cor v pU E I Rr Eb EESAT PSCE EOR CERES ET YE PES 64 adde ET 69 Import MAP ODJECIS nene naien a xen se ya ee Eee REA ERN 72 MAP Location Tool ceret rh ee rye VAR ee eR ERE ER ance 73 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 75 Attributes Foreword oorr eerta a ia EEN E EAER AEE TE 76 MAP Attributes Panel iccc ceceeecwcca e rhe opere nre rate Exe Rhea 79 Edit Schema 2S ry v eter ERPREREERTS Meare ee bea ERRARE 81 Expression Builder os erem t Ren RUE RED ERI KT RE E e P nn 83 Find amp Replace Attributes cece cece cece cece nee 90 Conten
71. Ona G Zaire A orte ares D Ss el Path Ga G Yugoslavia W INon MAP layers 5 F lt Compound Path gt Om E Yemen jon MAP layers 52 Western Samoa Z tayer 1 B a Sa Path On G Western Sahara 5 9 lt Path gt Om E Vietnam Am 77 Veneniela m 2 MAP Views eg RIuT 3 3 4a a S MAP Views Panel Adobe Illustrator Layers Model Tree Objects List The Item Sorting options control the order of the objects in the object tree even if objects are not renamed In the Use attribute for item name drop down list choose the attribute column that will be used for sorting In the Sort Order drop down list choose Ascending or Descending order Enable Use natural string comparison to sort numeral values by natural order e g 1 2 10 instead of 1 10 2 Note The sorting order of the objects in the Adobe Illustrator document itself is affected Chapter 17 Export Geospatial PDF 215 MAP Geospatial PDF Export Include Round Trip Data The Include round trip data option preserves the Adobe Illustrator editing capabilities in the resulting PDF If the Adobe Illustrator editing capabilities are preserved users will be able to retrieve MAP Views MAP Layers and MAP Attributes when re opening the exported Geospatial PDF in Adobe Illustrator If the Include round trip data option is disabled the Geospatial PDF will open in Adobe Illustrator with no georeferencing or attribute information and all layers will be merged into one
72. P Use the Simplify Lines tool to reduce the number of vertices in your data Metadata xml File Size Size of Export as few attributes as possible Only attributes that appear in Web Tags are exported the created metadata xml file Un check the Use Preserve Appearance Setting for Flash Export setting e Use a lower JPEG Image Quality amp Resolution setting Less than 50 KB compressed Reduce the number of raster images used in your map xml zip is ideal Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 195 Web Export Dialog Flash Security and Permissions When exporting a Flash map intended for Web distribution choose the Network option in the Flash Player Security Sandbox drop down list If a Flash map is intended for only local use choose the Local option By default the Auto option is chosen and automatically detects whether the Flash map is run on a network or locally If the Network option is selected the Global Security Settings must be configured in the Adobe Flash Player Settings Manager before an Internet browser can properly view the Flash map without posting it on a server If the Local option is chosen it is not necessary to set folder permissions However files exported with this option will not work for a Website and will have to be exported again with either the Network or Auto option Click the Set Permissions button in the Web Export Log dialog box to access the Adobe Flash Player Settings Manager http www ma
73. P MAP Selections MAP Stylesheets Q MAP Views Spatial Database MAP Location gt Panel Lat Long display format Decimal Degrees 0 d4 T Display precision ee V Indude latitude and longitude when copying coordinates e i MAP Measurement Preferences lat Long display format Set the latitude and longitude display format Decimal degrees Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds Degrees Minutes Degrees MinutesSeconds Packed DMS with decimal point Packed DMS Display precision Set the number of decimals shown on the MAP Location Tool panel Include latitude and longitude when copying coordinates Enable this option to copy the positions in both projected WX WY and geodetic coordinates longitude latitude when using Shift click in the MAP Location Tool panel see chapter 4 The MAP Measurement category contains display settings for the MAP Measurement Tool see chapter 7 for details MAPublisher Preferences fe Expression Builder General Import Map Data MAP Attributes Q MAP LabelPro l MAP Location S MAP Measurement P MAP Selections S MAP Stylesheets MAP Views Spatial Database Show azimuths Display forward and reverse azimuth when using the MAP Measurement tool MAP Measurement Units Use current layer s units x Display precision Se Line colour Ji
74. Points or only Selected Points Specify a name for the Destination Layer that this function will generate By default the program will generate a Line layer To generate an A Area layer by linking the line end to the start check the Close paths option In the Group By Column drop down list select the attribute column containing the common attributes used to join the point together For example to join points based on a unique ID select the column containing the common ID names This will result in point symbols containing the same name being joined together A logical order by which the points are being joined must be specified because each point will be represented by a node in a line string To properly join points a sort order must be chosen based on an attribute columns These should be attribute columns which contain rising alphabetical or numerical values For example GPS data may contain an attribute that specifies the order in which the points were collected first node second node etc In the Sort By Available Columns list select the primary sorting column This should be the attribute column that contains the best fit for rising alphabetical or numerical values For example if points have rising values from 1 10 the point with a value equal to 1 will be at the start of the generated line and the point with a value equal to 10 will be at the end of the line Select a column and then click the Add button to place the column int
75. Remove all from labeled list e the selected layer to obstacle list Remove from labeled list 4 Setup layers amp Setup layers e Remove from labeled list Remove all or selected layer from the source list B9 Resize Source to fit content c Resize all to fit content lj r Add to labeled list Add all or the Obstacle MAP View selected layer to the list of Obstacle MAP Layer source layers Add all to labeled list eum L Add to labeled list Moveall to labeled list m Move to labeled list Remove from gt Moveto labeled list Removesllfrom obstacle list the obstacle list and add allor Remove from obstacle list the selected layer to source list Setup layers Setup layers Remove from obstacle list Remove Chapter 18 MAP LabelPro all or selected layer from the obstacle list Setup Layers dialog box to choose which layers are to be used for labeling and or obstacles Advanced Specify user defined extents for labeling operations __ Edit style Opens the Style dialog box L Edit rules Opens the Rules dialog box Setup layers Opens the Setup Layers dialog box FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher LabelPro labeling engine offers advanced labeling capabilities beyond those available in MAPublisher Feature Text The MAP LabelPro engine contains sophisticated algorithms that solve many of the most common map labeling p
76. Selections gt MAP Stylesheets 4 MAP Views E Editor 77 Panel Spatial Database MAP Views gt Panel 71 Sort list using natural string comparison V Show note indicators V Show tooltips while dragging Spatial Database Preferences Sort list using natural string comparison Enable this option to use the natural sorting for layer and MAP Stylesheet names using numbers e g 1 2 10 instead of 1 10 2 Show note indicators When enabled it displays the note icons next to the layer name in the MAP View panel Show tool tips while dragging When dragging a layer from one MAP View to another a tooltip displays information on the destination MAP View Clear this check box to prevent tool tips to be displayed The MAPublisher Spatial Database preference category does not contain general settings but has three sub categories Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Editor ESRI Geodatabase Editor and General Spatial Database Editor see chapter 19 for a full description of the MAPublisher Spatial Database Spatial Database gt Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Editor Preferences MAPublisher Preferences fo Expression Builder I General Import Map Data 5 MAP Attributes RY MAP LabelPro MAP Location MAP Measurement P MAP Selections MAP Stylesheets Q MAP Views 4 j Spatial Database E Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Editor E ESRI Geodatabase Editor E General Spatial Database Editor
77. Separated tsv and Comma Separated csv files Import Settings dialog box In order to import point data with MAPublisher the parameters must be set by clicking the Settings button This operation is required to choose the columns of the selected attribute file that will be used to derive the X and Y coordinates of the data and ensure correct georeferencing These and further settings are discussed in chapter 6 and in the Delimited Text Data Settings section in appendix A1 ESRI ArcInfo Generate gen Import and Export Arcinfo Generate files are created by ESRI ArcInfo product and have a simple ASCII from x y to x y format Due to its simplicity you can also use a text editor such as Notepad to create text files and save them with a gen extension which can then be imported with MAPublisher 38 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats Import and Export Supported Data Formats ESRI Interchange File e00 Import and Export ESRI Interchange File files are created by ESRI Arclnfo product A single E00 file describes a complete ArcInfo coverage The file itself is actually an archive of several smaller files or sub files which will have fixed names and follow a predefined data format MAPublisher will reproduce these sub files as distinct Adobe Illustrator layers on import Therefore importing a single e00 import can result in the generation of point area line and text layers Note the hierarchy of layers in multi feature imports is by
78. Spatial Database gt Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Editor ArcGIS Bin Directory C Program Files ArcGIS Bin E Automatically connect to Spatial Database gt ESRI Geodatabase Editor Preferences MAPublisher Preferences fo Expression Builder 4 General Import Map Data MAP Attributes amp MAP LabelPro MAP Location MAP Measurement P MAP Selections MAP Stylesheets Q MAP Views 4 jj Spatial Database E Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Editor E ESRI Geodatabase Editor E General Spatial Database Editor Load subtypes as separate layers Enable this option to use create new layers per subtype Sort feature datasets alphabetically when selecting for import Enable this option to sort feature datasets alphabetically in the import dialog boxes 34 MAPublisher Preferences Chapter 1 Getting Started Spatial Database ESRI Geodatabase Editor V Use alias as layer name e mecum 7 Use abbreviated table name for layer name e Display coded domain subtype description Instead 1 Load subtypes as separate layers 79 Sort feature datasets alphabetically when selecting for import 7 Sort feature classes alphabetically when selecting for import 7 Sort attributes alphabetically when selecting for import e 7 Automatically connect to Automatically connect to Check this option to automatically connect to a specific serv
79. as a means of promoting the standard For SDTS import select the catd file xxxxcatd ddf which is the index file that contains a description of the other files in the SDTS transfer Individual DDF files cannot be imported Generally all SDTS downloads will contain the CATD file TIGER Line rt1 bw1 Import only TIGER is an abbreviation of Topologically Integrated Geographic Encoding and Reference System and was developed by the U S Census Bureau TIGER Line files are a digital database of geographic features such as roads railroads rivers lakes political boundaries census statistical boundaries etc that cover the entire United States The database contains information about these features such as their location in latitude and longitude the name the type of feature address ranges for most streets the geographic relationship to other features and other related information TIGER Line files are the public product created from the Census Bureau TIGER database of geographic formation TIGER was developed in order to support the mapping and related geographic activities required by the census and sample survey programs More information on the TIGER Line file format and data product can be found on the US Census web page at http www census gov geo www tiger MAPublisher considers the rt1 or bw1 file as the TIGER dataset Even though each county will consist of a series of files with a common base name there may be a number of
80. automatically when creating layer through MAPublisher operations e g during import plot centroid buffer lines Chapter 1 Getting Started 29 MAPublisher Preferences Import Map Data Preferences The Import Map Data preference category allows users to sort the order of the attributes columns upon import By default attributes are imported in the same order as in the source GIS data file and the MAPublisher Property attributes are created in front of the imported attributes see chapter 5 for additional information MAPublisher Preferences foo Expression Builder I General Import Map Data MAP Attributes QY MAP LabelPro l MAP Location Q9 MAP Measurement F MAP Selections MAP Stylesheets Q MAP Views Spatial Database Import Map Data mcm Attribute sort on import Do not sort MM Property disposition on import Move properties to start r V Append feature type as suffix on imported layer names e V Ensure imported layer names are unique e V Show extensions in Format drop down list 7 Show full filename in Advanced Import table 7 Show extents in Advanced Import table Show extensions in Format drop down list By default the Format drop down list in the Simple and Advanced mport dialog boxes shows the format extensions e g shp Clear this check box not to display format extensions Show extents in Advanced Import table C
81. benefit from some advanced features The information for these features is provided on the Avenza Systems Inc Website www avenza com to allow for frequent updates This information is available to all MAPublisher customers EXTERNAL CSS As explained earlier in this chapter the visual aspects of the widgets that appear in the MAPublisher Web Author viewer can be configured using CSS Cascading Style Sheet The CSS implementation is based on the Adobe Flex 3 CSS system Only class selectors are supported Refer to the Web page http www avenza com mapublisher mapwebauthor css for information on how to edit the CSS file and for a reference to the list of classes available for styling and their supported properties MAP WEB AUTHOR JAVASCRIPT API The MAP Web Author JavaScript API allows developers to embed and interact with maps produced by MAPublisher in web pages Some Web pages have been developed on the Avenza Systems Inc Website to provide a guide to the API and are available to all MAPublisher customers They include an API reference FAQs and examples For more information please refer to http vwww avenza com mapublisher mapwebauthor api The Web Author examples are also provided on the MAPublisher DVD Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 199 Advanced Features The MAP GPS feature allows for the collection display and styling of raw GPS data directly in Adobe Illustrator Using the MAP GPS feature you can connect to many NMEA compli
82. capacity to import all types of Geodatabases categorized as Personal File and ArcSDE Geodatabases The connection to an ArcSDE server requires server access user account and versioning information to be provided by the database administrator These parameters are exactly the same required to establish a connection using ESRI ArcCatalog with a small exception for SQL Server Express connections explained later on in this chapter Once imported in Adobe Illustrator data does not maintain a link with the original database and database functions are not valid topology table feature class relationships subtypes and attributes domains rules However MAPublisher can make use of the Geodatabases spatial and non spatial relationships subtypes and attribute domains information during the import process to populate layer names and attributes 232 Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases Overview SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS To be able to import ESRI Geodatabases or to access an ArcSDE server using MAPublisher Simple and Advanced Import functions a valid ESRI software and licensing must be installed To use ESRI Geodatabases the minimum license required is ESRI ArcGIS Engine higher licenses that may be used are ArcView ArcEditor and Arcinfo The direct access to feature classes on an ArcSDE Server requires only the free ESRI desktop application ArcReader However File and Personal Geodatabases cannot be read using ArcReader With this licens
83. chapter 10 and 18 or for information purposes 78 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Attributes Foreword MAP Attributes Panel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Attributes and MAP Toolbar El Edit Schema Edit the properties of remain active after unselecting art all columns of the current attribute table column names visibility type and width assign expressions Click header to sort column Pin Current Selection Attributes are values alpha numerically to columns Layer Selection If data is e Layer Al Lower48 area 49 areas selected X Find amp Replace Click to find and selected on a number of Sl Style Bl PathClosed RAREA SISTAT NAME S SUBREGION POPULATION replace attributes in the current an select mn cael 1 Aidt g 51715786 Alabama ES Cen 4 447 100 attribute table CONTAINING ENE debes AO 2 E Aids2 E 113 712 679 Arizona Mountain 5 130 632 i i B icd L E tci Apply Expression To assign attribute pe viewed with nis list 3 Aidsi gl SETS 232 Massa WS Cen SARUM Pn i raphical i erties to 4 B Aids a 157 776 310 California Pacific 33 871 648 grap as Attributes and Properties 5 W Aids ig 104101231 Colorado Mouraain 4301261 selected art via the input of an Attribute and property 6 Aids2 7 4976566 Connecticut N Eng 3 405 565 expression values on the selected layer 7 Aids vi 2 054586 Delaware SA 783 600 Join Table Click to join an external data are dis
84. clipboard An example of a use for this function is to build point files in an external text editor files which can be imported with MAPublisher Coordinates are copied with the X value first and Y value second and are delimited by a comma For example 79 396527 43 631979 USING THE MAP LOCATION TOOL To use the MAP Location Tool click the button in Adobe Illustrator Tools panel in the MAP Toolbar or open the panel through Window MAPublisher MAP Location The map coordinates update in the panel with every change of the location of the mouse cursor The map units correspond to the units of the currently selected layer If the selected layer is a MAP Layer the units are taken from the MAP View s source coordinate system If the selected layer in a Non MAP Layer the units of the Adobe Illustrator documents are used see File Document Setup Note The map coordinates update even when other tools are selected Note When the cursor is placed outside of the MAP View extent of the selected layer positions values are indicated as Unavailable When the MAP Location Tool button is enabled in the Adobe Illustrator Tools panel users are able to copy the coordinates of a specific location position of the cursor The appropriate layer must be selected in the MAP Views panel as the MAP View containing the layer will determine the MAP units and coordinate system used to display the geographic position To copy the position to the c
85. corner of the grid or actual i coordinates X Y or lat long Units Set the units for Measured Grid dimensions if appropriate Cell Size in Page Unit Select this option to specify the cell size in page unit as specified in the Adobe Illustrator Document Setup Partial cells get labeled Check this option to label partial cells cells that do not reach the full size in page units Minimum size of cells set the minimum size of partial cells to be labeled Graticule Settings Latitude Longitude Latitude Interval Specify the interval for e nterval 10 Ct ees 10 oe Longitude Interval Specify the interval each line of latitude EE oo 3 BENEUSulo ie for each line of longitude Pass through latitude Specify a line of Pass through longitude Specify a line of latitude that must be included any Display Options longitude that must be included any great circle Vertices Fewer More meridian r Don t label First row C First column O Last column O Last row Vertices Use the slider to increase or decrease the number of nodes which will be used in the construction of the graticules use a higher number if graticules are curved Grid Style Options Grid Style Options see Index Grid settings i Line Style MAP Grid Style 5 Don t label Enabling any of these MERE T MAP Grid Style 9 boxes will prevent the corresponding row or column from being labeled Mea
86. created When the settings are entered click OK View the newly created layer and its attributes in the MAP Attributes panel Note that the only attribute columns present are the default Property columns and the attribute column specified for the join 120 Chapter 8 Line Functions Join Lines Join Points Object gt MAPublisher gt Join Points or MAP Toolbar Destination Layer Enter the name of the output layer This new layer will contain the generated lines Group By Specify the attribute column Input Layer Use this drop down list to gon ont select the Point layer containing the OUTRE symbols you wish to join es PREE C All Points Selected Points Alpoits Selected points You can choose to join only those points that have been selected or all TIU points on the selected MAP Layer cS joned ponts Jayer 0 Close paths Check this option to Eli Close pitis generate an Area layer If unchecked a Line layer will be generated Group By E Column S Name Sort By Available Columns Select an attribute column containing Sort By ascending values to sort by Then click DAE SECOS C the Add button to add the column to the Sort Order S LayerName II Order e R PageX d IR sPageY IE sla gt IR HorizontalScale IR 5VerticalScale 4 Rotation B Style IR Mapx R MapY 5 Name FUNCTIONALITY containing similar valu
87. data vendors or indicated as text on the original map Also anchors have to be specified manually Map Anchor information can be entered in any coordinate system unit for example latitude and longitude in degree Page Anchor are entered in the document units The most common way to set up an Adobe Illustrator page is to set the page origin 0 0 to coincide with the lower left corner of the map extents If this information is not known any point on the map can be used as long as its geographic location is known e g a building or graticule grids on a scanned map this information is usually given by the data provider if not obvious on the map itself The position in page coordinates for the same point is found using the Adobe Illustrator nfo panel Once the relationship between the real world coordinates and the page coordinates is established these two points are dynamically linked MAPublisher uses this anchor point in subsequent data transformations such as rescaling and transforming as well as in the creation of grids and to maintain georeferencing on export During the import process MAPublisher reads the coordinate system settings from the input file and calculates the scale to best fit the map data to the page MAPublisher treats the point at 0 0 in the document Page Anchor as being coincident to the lower left corner of the data in real world coordinates Map Anchor Note When importing GIS data if the coordinate system of the
88. design environment that enable GIS data files to be used as a base for cartographic production destined for print or Web contents Working from a traditional Adobe Illustrator document users create and edit their data organized through layers either new or imported with MAPublisher Users benefit from the Adobe Illustrator graphic tools as well as additional custom MAPublisher functions and panels to create edit and query the map data MAPublisher Simple and Advanced Import functions allow the import of major GIS and CAD formats ArcGIS MapInfo AutoCAD MicroStation KLM and more into Adobe Illustrator while retaining their native geometry Point Line Text Area layer structure geographic location and attribute data The cartographic workspace is managed through MAP Views that control the geospatial parameters coordinate system map anchor map scale and rotation Layers organized under the same MAP View share the same geographic frame of reference A layer must reside within a MAP View to be managed by MAPublisher functions and keep its spatial and attribute information however layers not related to a MAP View may still be used for presentation purposes such as title scale and legend An Adobe Illustrator document may contain more than one MAP View For example a map with an inset map at a larger scale to represent a zoomed in area of interest The MAP Attributes panel allows for creating editing and querying attribute information
89. different extensions Remember to select the rt1 or bw1 file when importing TIGER data Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Import only ArcSDE geodatabases are multi user ESRI spatial databases that allow users to store use and manage their GIS data in one of the following commercial database management systems DBMS IBM DB2 IBM Informix Microsoft SQL Server or Oracle They are available in three levels of flexibility desktop workgroup and enterprise The Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server import option allows users who have a free ESRI desktop application called ArcReader to import feature classes from ArcSDE geodatabases but with some limitations on the selection functions see chapter 19 relative to spatial databases for more information t Basic ESRI ArcSDE Servers are not supported on Mac OS due to limitations of the related ESRI libraries files ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabase Import only ArcSDE geodatabases are multi user ESRI spatial databases that allow users to store use and manage their GIS data in one of the following commercial database management systems DBMS IBM DB2 IBM Informix Microsoft SQL Server or Oracle They are available in three levels of flexibility desktop workgroup and enterprise The ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabase import option allows users who have ArcGIS software and a valid license to import all ArcSDE geodatabase types with advanced options for the selection see chapter 19 relative to spatial databases for more inform
90. elevation contour line SHAPE FROM elevation contour line P ial Eil e E c SELECT obscured area SHAPE FROM obscured area WHERE obscure Specify Spatial Filter Opens Specify jal Filter e z pecify Ms e b Seat pit SELECT spot elevation point SHAPE FROM spot elevation point WH Cancel the Spatial Filter dialog box SNS see previous page Delete Click to delete recent SQL queries FUNCTIONALITY Import ESRI Personal and File Geodatabases through the Simple Import and Advanced Import functions of MAPublisher The file selection is done in two steps first the database is selected mdb for a Personal Geodatabase gdb for a File Geodatabase then feature classes are selected directly or through SQL queries Additionally a spatial filter can be set to limit the geographic extents of the data being imported When feature datasets are present in the database MAPublisher uses them to group feature classes per parent feature dataset to ease the selection process but feature datasets are not imported as such The feature dataset name may be prepended to the name of the data layer created during import using an import setting For each format multiple feature classes sharing the same source coordinate system may be selected at once in the Simple Import or Advanced Import gt Add dialog box To import feature classes that do not have matching spatial reference use Advanced Import and add the feature classes in severa
91. exporting If not the Adobe Acrobat data tools see later in this chapter will not function properly Note Some Adobe Illustrator effects are not supported during export The attributes will not be visible for objects with the following effects All Photoshop effects Any effect that modifies the outline shape of the artwork will cause attributes to fail i e warp effects Convert to Shape 3D effects Distort and Transform and some of the Pathfinder effects Any effect that rasterizes the art will cause attributes to fail several SVG filters do this e A Gradient Fills are supported with the caveat that transparency gradients going from opaque to transparent and Gradient Mesh are not supported Geospatial Information Extents The document exported to geospatial PDF only contains geographic information in the extent covered by a MAP View In other words Adobe Acrobat Geospatial Location Tool and Measurement Tool will not work outside the MAP View s extents To increase the extents of the MAP View so that it covers a larger part of the document create a polygon on a MAP Layer of type area that bounds the required new extents Layers and MAP Views Structure All layers in the Adobe Illustrator document are exported including locked and hidden layers The visibility status is maintained in the exported geospatial PDF however not the locking status Locking layers must be done within Adobe Acrobat Layer order and name are
92. feature allows for all information gathered from the GPS to be saved to a text file This information can be used for back up or debugging purposes or imported at a later time into a new document In addition to being able to record to the file the user is given the options of adding to an existing file or overwriting any information which may be in the specified file USING THE RECORD LOG SETTINGS DIALOG BOX The Record Log Settings dialog box requires either navigation to a directory or manual specification of a location to which the log file is to be saved Once a directory has been specified the file name for the Record Log must be specified This file will be saved as a standard text file that is readable in Notepad or any other plain text capable application It may also be used at a later date to import the log information into a new or existing document as MAP features In addition to specifying a file name and location either the Append option or the Overwrite option must be specified The Append option will add all new information to the end of the file if the selected file contains information The Overwrite option will overwrite any information currently contained in the specified file with the new information received Note Once a Record Log file has been specified the Overwrite option chosen and plotting has started any interruptions e g clicking Stop Scanning operation will result in the saved log file being overwritten by new log d
93. for the import of DGN DXF DWG E00 GML KML MIF MID Tab and Dataset Displays the directory Ee Unicode sit UTF 8 z path and filename for the currently selected file s You can also manually type in the dataset location here Source Coordinate System Source Coordinate System This section allows the manual selection of the coordinate Delimited Text Data see chapter 2 system if this information is not held in the data source Same as Check this option in order to assign a coordinate system that matches that of an existing MAP View View Coordinate System Information L Browse Opens a Data Source browser to enable the selection of files for import Character Encoding Assign a codec if the attribute information held in the selected dataset uses a double byte character set Click to view the parameters of a selected coordinate system Import Settings Specify Click to open the Specify Source Coordinate System tool see Appendix 2 enabling you to search for coordinate systems by specifying a text string Results are displayed in the Search category Clear Click to clear the existing parameters of the source See the Simple Import various Import Settings dialog boxes and options 52 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Advanced Import coordinate system ADVANCED IMPORT FUNCTIONALITY Advanced Import provides an alte
94. from to z Anew point is added on the path but the measurement does not end Keep holding the Shift key while adding more points along the path As the mouse moves on the artboard a total distance label indicates the length of the path already digitized and the distance from the last added point to the current mouse position While digitizing the measuring path hold the Alt key Windows or Control key Mac OS to display the length of each digitized path segment Before adding the last point release the Shift key As soon as the last point is clicked the measurement is ended and the total distance is displayed Hold the Alt key Windows or Control key Mac OS while clicking the last point to display all annotations segment lengths and total distance I qe T 1147 345156 usft SSIS A XC D Segment 833 592 usft Total distance 2846 431549 usft Chapter 7 Drawing Tools 111 MAP Measurement Tool Measure Perimeter and Area To measure the perimeter and area of a closed path follow the same steps as measuring the distance of a path When digitizing the last point release the Shift button and place the mouse cursor over the start point a box is drawn around the starting point click to close the path and end the measurement Hold the Alt key Windows or Control key Mac OS while digitizing to display the length of each segment Perimeter 2483 107094 m Area 288885 023926 m2 Note Holding down the Shift key
95. from alpha numeric A 1 to numeric alpha 1 A or vice versa When creating graticules users may need to edit the maximum graticule extents allowed By default MAPublisher automatically detects the maximum graticule extents as 180 from the central meridian specified in the coordinate system definition of the current MAP View for longitudes and 90 from the Equator for latitudes The graticule is then created as the intersection of the bounding box and the maximum graticules extents In some rare cases the bounding box specified may extend beyond the default limit with some polar projections or some cases where the data crosses the 180 degrees west east meridian and the created graticule will be truncated or wrapped In these cases users may enter specific values for the Graticule Start and Graticule End coordinates in the Advanced dialog box e g Start 180 90 End 360 90 In most cases this is not necessary so we recommend using Auto Detect Graticule Bounds and only edit the graticule start and end coordinates if the resulting graticule is truncated increase extents or wrapped reduce extents Advanced Grid Settings Advanced Graticules Settings Advanced Advanced Bounding Box CoD Bounding Box Co Lower Left Adjust X and Y values for Lower Left Jenova Cancel the lower left of the grid extents x 3941900 20072 2 _ Cancel _ x m Y 2031557 74296 m Y 2031557 7429
96. graticules in their default grouped state Manual editing is possible however if the grid is first expanded Object Expand though this will negate any opportunity to subsequently edit the art via the Grids and Graticules dialog box When expanded grids cells are converted to both polygons from index and lines Measured grids cannot be labeled properly using actual coordinates when the data is projected using a stereographic or orthographic coordinate system because some areas may have some high curvature If the generation of a grid graticule causes blank or incomplete results the following workflow should be used Transform the MAP View to a geodetic coordinate system e g WGS 84 Generate a grid or graticules on this MAP View Expand the object Object Expand Create a new area layer in the MAP View Drag the expanded grid to this new layer Transform the MAP View back to the original projection voe w Please see Appendix A3 for more information on working with grids and graticules in MAPublisher 8 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 169 Grids and Graticules Make index based on label position An index will be created by assigning one index location for each label found on the selected label text layer Make index based on label and matching feature position MAPublisher will determine what features to index by matching label text on the selected Label layer to the indicated attribute on the Feature layer An in
97. hide underlying lines to enhance the map readability See chapter 10 New MAP Selections Panel The formerly known MAP Selection Filters panel has been redesigned and is now known as MAP Selections Three selection methods are now available see chapter 11 Attribute Filters traditional selection method based on MAP Attributes values e Art Selections save the currently selected art Spatial Filters select features depending on their position relative to selected MAP Objects New Expression Library feature The new Expression Library allows users to save the expressions created in the MAP Selections MAP Attributes or MAP Stylesheets panel into a single library for inter usability See chapter 5 New Line Plotter function The new Line Plotter function lets users enter a list geographic coordinates eastings northings or Latitude Longitude to plot lines Another option is to plot using real world distances and headings angles between points See chapter 8 New MAP Attributes Panel features Major enhancements to the MAP Attributes panel have been made The MAP Attributes panel can now be pinned to maintain an attribute selection even when the parent objects are deselected on the artboard Additionally recordset navigation buttons are available to make viewing attributes easier A new option has been added to the Add Calculated Data function rotation to north for point symbols Xii What s New in MAPublisher 8 3 E
98. in a string Replaces a regular expression by characters in a string Tangent of an angle Removes all spaces in a text except the single ones between words Strings converted to upper case Notes String values are case sensitive and must be entered in double quotes For functions using indexes for text position MID SEARCH and SPLIT the first index number is O Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 85 Expression Builder Examples of Basic Expressions APPLY EXPRESSION Expression Result Ontario applied to column NAME All items are assigned the value Ontario in the NAME column MAP Area 01 applied to column Style All area items are assigned the value MAP Area 01 in the Style column and are assigned the Graphic Style MAP Area 01 on the page 45 applied to column Rotation All point items are assigned the value 45 in the Rotation column and are rotated to 45 on the page MAP SELECTIONS Expression Result NAME Ontario All items with the value Ontario in the NAME column are selected POPULATION lt 1000000 All items with values less than one million in the POPULATION column are selected NAME Ontario OR NAME Alberta All items with the value Ontario OR Alberta in the NAME column are selected NAME Ontario AND POPULATION lt 1000000 Only the items containing the value Ontario
99. in the Feature Layer drop down list select the line layer that contains the knockouts to be deleted and click the Clear button Chapter 10 Labelling Functions 145 Create Knockouts MAP Selections amp Operations MAPublisher contains tools for selecting data graphically and by attribute values The MAP Selections panel provides functionality to create edit and save multiple selection criteria based on attribute expressions manual art selections or spatial filters MAP Selections are saved with the document The Split Layer function allows to split MAP Layers based on attributes values to facilitate data management The topics covered in this section MAP Selections Split Layer Chapter 11 MAP Selections and Operations 147 MAP Selections Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Selections or MAP Toolbar P MAP Selections Panel MAP SELECTIONS foo ess ADMN_CLASS Interstate Layer usroads line e in the current document Three different types of MAP Selections Attribute Filter foo Art Selection _ Spatial Filter Invalid MAP Selections for the currently selected layer are marked with an additional sign Panel options New MAP Selection Duplicate My MAP Selection fa Toll TOLL RD Y Layer Using current layer Texas State Selected Art Select roads within texas Based on MAP Selection Texas State Output layer usroads line Duplicate MA
100. in use Editing this property will apply the selected style to the art describes the stroke weight of the path Editing this property will alter the stroke weight of the art describes the perimeter of the area in world units This property cannot be set describes whether or not the path is closed yes or no Editing this value will open close the path describes the scaling of the line stroke Editing this value will scale the stroke weight describes the area of the path in world units This property cannot be set 76 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Attributes Foreword Line layers LayerName ID Name VertexCount Style StrokeWeight PathClosed Length ArtScale Point layers LayerName PageX PageY ID Name HorizontalScale VerticalScale Rotation Style MapX MapY T Text layers LayerName PageX PageY ID FontSize FontFamily Name Text TextLength Rotation Style MapX MapY HorizontalScale VerticalScale describes the name of the containing layer This property cannot be set describes the internal unique ID to refer to Adobe Illustrator artwork within the document Read only describes the name of the polygon Editing this property will change the name in the Layers panel describes the number of points in the art This property cannot be set describes the Graphic Style in use Editing this property will apply the selected style to the art describes the stroke weight of the path
101. index label listed in the output index file corresponds to the value of the selected Attribute Advanced Formatting Options To set additional options to control the formatting of the index file click the Advanced button The Sort index by option controls the order of the index entries The default setting is Feature label entries are ordered based on the label text alphabetical Alternatively Grid cell can be selected to sort by the cell indexes The Specify Index Separator indicates which delimiter is used to separate the different columns in the index file label additional attributes and indexes To change a specific delimiter click the separator button in between the two desired elements The separator options are Tab None or a Custom delimiter When using a custom delimiter type the desired character s in the adjacent text field The separator settings are reflected in the Sample Indexes section The Treat group text as single entry option is required to create a single index for grouped text Enabling this option is recommended to create index for labels created with MAPublisher Label Pro because the generated text is often grouped e g multiline labels or along a curve 172 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes Make Index MAPublisher offers three types of Output Format examples are using the default separators Single line condensed One index for each unique label is created The grid cell references are compressed in th
102. inset map PREREQUISITES At least two documents must be opened to use Import MAP Objects The active document does not need to contain any MAP View but the second document must at least contain one MAP View Note Import MAP Objects imports all the layers contained in the selected MAP View To choose specific MAP layers to import in the source document make a duplicate of the MAP View and copy or move only selected layers to it Then proceed to import the duplicate MAP View USING IMPORT MAP OBJECTS To access the function click Import MAP Objects in the MAP Views panel options menu or click the Import MAP Objects button on the MAPublisher Toolbar The Import MAP Objects dialog box shows all other documents currently open along with all the MAP Views MAP Stylesheets and MAP Selections they contain Select at least one MAP object to be imported into the current document and click OK to import it Note Import MAP Objects can also be accessed from the MAP Stylesheets and MAP Selections panel options menus 72 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing Import MAP Objects MAP Location Tool MAP Toolbar or Tools MAP Location Tool t and Window MAPublisher MAP Location Displays the parameters of the currently selected layer WX WY The X and Y coordinates of the MAP Location x Latitude Longitude The latitude and longitude cursor in current map units Wit 6735373
103. labeling Point layers and follows the same conventions mentioned for the previous two data types Placement Click the placement buttons in the desired order of priority Use the Clear Last or Clear All options to remove selections Unselected positions will not be considered Centered on point Labels are placed on the center of the point Allow use of leader lines Incorporate the use of leader lines Allowed Line Crosses permits the number of lines the leader line will be allowed to cross Leader Width and Arrow Style adjusts the thickness and style of the leader line respectively Note x Point Rules e Placement s IV aw stacking Lo Ca s Num e Save As Gs V Allow labels to cross lines Select positions in order of priority V Allow font reduction e Unselected positions will not be tried A a Steps 4 Centered on point A Each step allows LabelPro to shrink the A selected font by 0 5 pt if necessary Allow use of leader lines Z p du C Allow overlapping labels New f e Ci Vo Allow stacking Labels are allowed to stack up to a maximum of two three or four lines Allow labels to cross lines Labels are allowed to cross line features and area boundaries Allow font reduction Automatically reduces the label size incrementally when necessary Each step shri
104. maintained as in the Adobe Illustrator document with the exception of nested layers Adobe Acrobat does not support nested layers therefore only top most layers are maintained in the exported geospatial PDF Objects in nested layers are exported but they are included in the top most layer It is not recommended to use nested MAP Layers because their attributes will not be exported unless the master layer is also a MAP Layer Layers must have a unique name If multiple layers have the same name a warning message is prompted upon export All MAP Views are exported in the order that they appear in the MAP Views panel alphabetical the top most is exported first and lowest is exported last If some MAP Views are overlapping the positions shown in Adobe Acrobat are calculated based on the coordinate system of the latest exported MAP View the lowest one in the MAP Views panel When working with inset maps the inset MAP View should be placed at the bottom of the tree in the MAP Views panel using an appropriate MAP View name since the order is alphabetical Chapter 17 Export Geospatial PDF 213 MAP Geospatial PDF Export MAP Attributes The Geospatial PDF Settings dialog box allows the user to customize which layer attributes to export When attributes are exported only visible attributes for map objects are exported to PDF The attribute name displayed in the Adobe Acrobat Model Tree Property list corresponds to the attribute Display Name speci
105. map units the Adobe Illustrator file must contain at least one MAP View with an assigned coordinate system The map units used by the MAP Measurement Tool are set in MAPublisher Preferences Use the current layer s map units or select alternative units The layer s map units are defined in the coordinate system definition of the selected MAP View The current map units can be viewed in the MAP View Editor by clicking the information button of the Source Coordinate System called Point Style in the Definition tab see chapter 4 and appendix A2 for details The Adobe Illustrator page units can be accessed and changed in the Document Setup dialog box Adobe Illustrator menu File gt Document Setup gt Units drop down list To use vector snapping while measuring enable the Adobe Illustrator Smart Guides Adobe Illustrator menu View gt Smart Guides The snapping tolerance is set in the Adobe Illustrator Preferences for Smart Guides Adobe Illustrator menu Edit gt Preferences gt Smart Guides USING THE MAP MEASUREMENT TOOL Click the MAP Measurement Tool button amp in the Adobe Illustrator Tools panel The mouse cursor becomes a cross To measure distances in map units real world distances select a MAP layer i e layer belonging to a MAP View in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel The unit of the layer s parent MAP View will be used in the measurements To measure distances in page units distances on the page select a non M
106. not function This option is recommended when distributing Flash maps on CD for example 192 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Web Export Dialog The Compress Map Data File map xml or map xml zip is used by the Flash viewer to get information on the initial zoom level Web tag content tagged object geographic coordinates It is recommended to keep this option enabled to use a compressed version of this file map xml zip to maintain a fast loading map However advanced users may use the uncompressed version map xml For example an advanced user could create programs that automatically update the Web Tag contents Once compressed this file cannot be uncompressed to map xml If this file is required the export must be run again with this option disabled Note In MAPublisher 8 0 the metadata file was named map afm or map afm compressed The decision was made to change the file extensions because these file formats were not recognized by all Web servers WEB EXPORT DIALOG VIEWER STYLE To set the style and position of the MAP Web Author map viewer controls users can edit the Viewer Style list or use a CSS Cascading Style Sheet CSS is a style sheet language that enables the separation of document content HTML JavaScript from document presentation it is a simple mechanism for adding style e g fonts colors spacing to multiple Web pages at once The Viewer Style list contains MAP Web Author map viewer controls which include n
107. not met all placement conditions For best viewing results after labeling hide the suppression type text layers Alternately the suppression layer can be set to Ignored and unsuccessfully placed labels will not output to any layer Note Rows that have incomplete configuration settings locked destination or suppression layers unspecified destination layers are displayed in red under the Source list in the configuration dialog box It is normal for a certain percentage of labels to not succeed in being placed due to rule or data conflicts Information regarding the success rate of placement can be reviewed by enabling one of the Statistic type options located in the Options frame PRIORITY Destination Priority Sle The Priority setting allows for complex hierarchical labeling sequences The priority is the order of preference in which labels are placed Layers ID STREET labels 1 Street Label Style with a priority of 1 will be placed first or have a high priority Layers with UD PARK labels 2 Land Label Siyie a priority of 12 will be placed last or have a low priority Consequently layers with a low priority might have more suppression labels generated for them Priorities are set by selecting a number in the Priority drop down list for a respective layer Note A maximum of twelve priorities may be assigned at any given time however the same priority number can be assigned to multiple layers Chapter 18 MAP LabelPro
108. of a document session but there are Adobe Illustrator operations that can cause the value to change Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 77 Attributes Foreword IMPORTANT ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR COMPATIBILITY NOTES Some Adobe Illustrator functions may cause the link between artwork objects and their attributes to be broken resulting in possible data loss These functions are Compound path Make Pathfinder Live Paint Gradient mesh Blob brush Adobe Illustrator CS4 Shape builder tool Adobe Illustrator CS5 By default releasing a compound path also breaks the link between released paths and the attributes To avoid this behaviour users may enable the option Replicate attribute data to compound path sub components in the MAPublisher Preferences for MAP Attributes This option must be enabled before the attribute schema is created or updated for the attribute data to be copied to the compound path components To fully enable this option follow the simple steps below 1 Enable Replicate attribute data to compound path sub components 2 Change the visibility status of one attribute column to force the attribute schema to update itself 3 Release the compound path Note This option has an impact on performance so it should only be enabled if necessary If required users should first duplicate their working layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel before using these functions The original layer can be kept for labelling see
109. of ascenders and descenders e g and g characters The Limit to cap height option reduces the knockout size to the height of the capital letters For example this option is useful when labeling contour lines that are close to one another the regular knockout size could create masks that overlap from one contour to the next King Street King Street Default knockout size Cap Heights knockout size To increase the size of the knockout three buffer options are available Side Buffer Top Buffer and Bottom Buffer Buffer sizes are entered as pixel values King Street Buffer knockout size Replace Existing Knockouts The Replace existing knockout option clears the existing knockouts on the selected Feature Layer before adding the new knockouts This is useful when running the Create Knockouts function again after adjusting the settings slightly To append the new knockouts to the existing one make sure this option is not checked 144 Chapter 10 Labelling Functions Create Knockouts KNOCKOUT RESULTS All lines in the Feature Layers are masked by the text objects in the selected Text layer where appropriate To achieve the knockout effect Create Knockout applies an opacity mask at the layer level as can be seen in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel 4 Layer with Opacity Mask In Adobe Illustrator a dashed line under a layer name indicates that the layer has an opacity mask L lt Path
110. on a path Don t follow line create point text Distance from start 9 Auto 7 Fixed 0 Follow Don t Follow Line Select whether text should follow paths or be placed at a point near the selected line Flip upside down labels Always enabled by default it automatically orients labels Reverse right to left paths flip upside down text Enabled Line Smoothing Enabled Offset Smoothed Line 4pt Label Position Baseline Q 5 Descender J Center 7 Adjust label if larger than line Reduce font size to a minimum of 5 pt Reduce horizontal scaling to a minimum of 50 uniformly Disabling this feature will not flip the label Line Smoothing Offset Line Check to smooth the generated text path Then specify an offset distance for the text path from the original Label Position Choose how the text will be placed on the generated text path Set all labels to same minimum size If at least Set all labels to the same minimum font Area Label Settings Placement Accuracy 9 Low faster High slower forces label within area boundaries Labels curve with lines of latitude For projected layers choose this option to generate curved text along latitude lines Adjust label if larger than line Specify rules for the scaling of text if the text will not fit inside the area object in its entirety Click the Up or Down buttons to adjust the order in w
111. or any external Web page for example http www avenza com In the Target drop down list enter the name of the destination frame type in the name given by Web designers or use one of the four available reserved names Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 189 Web Tag Dialog Web Export Dialog Export Settings m Web Export Dialog Export Location The destination Export Settings viewer Style Viewer Settings Export Export the document to folder of the exported Flash P e Export Location C lUsersynlaw Documents Untitled 1ndex html Browse Close Stasi mee Flash documents Layer Controls Lists all the layers ES User Toggle Layer Name e in the active artboard All layers x 3 Map Settings will be visible but only checked vi Public Schools point Width and Height Size of the layers under User Toggle can be m Post_Offices_point B Flash map in the browser shown hidden by a user Fl Interstates line i Cannot be larger than the Options Set layer export 7 Highways_line i Adobe Illustrator document options Show a layer at certain a Ramp fine Set to Artboard Reset the width zoom levels set initial layer V Pian and height to its original values visibility and static content is x x i i Pan X and PanY Initial pan shift affected by pan and zoom 2l pests ane ap
112. other operators Advanced Expressions The Advanced Expression panel is used to construct more complex expressions and to use read only and property attributes Enter a valid expression in the Expression field The Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report Q and include additional warning notes Alternatively click on the Expression Builder button to create and edit expressions To use a saved or recent expression click the Expression Library button il See chapter 5 for more information on both Advanced expressions are saved in memory for the time of the Adobe Illustrator session and can be selected in the Recent tab in the Expression Library dialog box The following are some examples of basic expressions that can be entered for styling rules Expression Result All items with the value Ontario in the NAME column NAME Ontario are selected All items with values less than one million in the POPU POPULATION Thon LATION column are selected All items with the value Ontario OR Alberta in the in NAME Ontario OR NAME Alberta NAME column are selected Only the items containing the value Ontario in the NAME Ontario AND POPULATION lt 1000000 NAME column AND values less than one million in the POPULATION column are selected Note String values are case sensitive and must be ent
113. single or compound path symbols are located on the center of the polygons lines or at the center of the biggest polygon longest line of a group Example result of plotting centroids on a Canadian provincial Area layer 104 Chapter 6 Plotting Points Plot Centroids Drawing Tools MAPublisher benefits from Adobe Illustrator drawing tools Any artwork created on a specified MAP layer is incorporated into the map data and can be rescaled and reprojected If the new artwork is of the same feature type as the MAP Layer it will automatically be added to the attribute table Similarly objects can be deleted and moved between layers with basic Adobe Illustrator tools which makes it very easy to quickly add and delete features to MAP Layers 4 i In addition MAPublisher provides its own tools for creating i it i a and managing artwork MAP Area Tools are designed to draw Ne iW rectangular and elliptical areas of specified dimensions UPE in MAP Units The MAP Vector Crop Tool trims all the vector NY 5 A data on all active layers falling outside of a crop area The Js N C MAP Measurement Tools allows users to measure distances in page or world units and to save the measuring path as an art Topics covered in this section MAP Area Tool MAP Vector Crop Tool MAP Measurement Tool Chapter 7 Drawing Tools 105 MAP Area Tools Tools gt MAP Area Tool Box w MAP Area Tool Ellipse
114. source data is not stored or was not saved MAPublisher determines the scale and anchor automatically only the Source Coordinate System must be set For further information please refer to the appendices See appendix A1 General Tips on Georeferencing an Adobe Illustrator file Appendix A2 provides general information on the MAPublisher coordinate systems as well as customizing options Illustration of page and map anchors Map Anchor Page Anchor gt 40 Y page 0 7 ES s 0 40 80 00 Xmap page 56 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing Georeferencing MAP Views Panel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Views and MAP Toolbar CPI ro MAP Views Lists of the distinct configurations for alaska_area geospatial parameters MAP Layers An alphabetical list of the layers that comprise each MAP View symbolized by feature type Lock button Click box to lock or unlock a MAP Layer lock check box is mirrored in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel ze Z Non MAP layers Non MAP layers Lists the Adobe Illustrator layers that are not part of a specified MAP View and do not contain georeferenced information Export MAP View amp s MAP Layer Export the selected MAP View or MAP Layer to various GIS formats MAP Views Panel Options Menu New MAP View New MAP View For Ph
115. source listed it use any internet search browser such as Google to get access to the websites FREE MAP DATA Many sites on the Internet that offer free download of GIS data Data is available from these and other Internet sites in a wide variety of formats Please consult the sections in this manual on file formats chapter 2 and MAPublisher Import Format section to ensure that you obtain usable data For example AUSLING data Australian mapping agency CAST data Center of Advanced Spatial Technologies University of Arkansas Directions Magazine Data Center internet publication e EROS Data Center access to USGS digital datasets e Geocommunity and GIS Data Depot very good source of free GIS data e Geoconnections Geoconnexions Canada Ministry of Natural Resources site Geography Network world wide geographic contents e Geogratis maps offered by Natural Resources Canada e GlSuser provides latest news resources and tools for the GIS industry e National Atlas of the United States excellent data source for the United States NOAA ENC Download free download of electronic nautical charts in S 57 format USA e Doug Price s list of Free Digital GIS Data Tennesse Geographic Information Council Robert E Kennedy Library California Polytechnic State University US based map inventory United State Geological Survey various data formats available DLG GeoTIFF etc from the USGS website United S
116. supported by Avenza Technical Support 16 Chapter 1 Getting Started System Requirements Installation Instructions MAPublisher is licensed for use on a single computer and once activated will be node locked and will only function on that computer Therefore before proceeding with installation and activation please ensure that MAPublisher is installed on the appropriate computer Different version releases of MAPublisher e g 8 x and 7 x can be installed on the same computer if two versions of Adobe Illustrator are present For example MAPublisher 8 3 with Adobe Illustrator CS5 and MAPublisher 7 6 3 with Adobe Illustrator CS2 However two point releases of MAPublisher 8 x cannot be on the same machine For example MAPublisher 8 3 with Adobe Illustrator CS5 cannot operate together with MAPublisher 8 2 with Adobe Illustrator CS4 on the same computer It is recommended to uninstall older versions of MAPublisher before installing the newest release During the uninstall process an option will be given to backup custom coordinates systems and MAP LabelPro rules WINDOWS Make sure that a compatible version of Adobe Illustrator is installed on the computer If Adobe Illustrator is running exit the program DVDversion Insert the MAPublisher 8 3 DVD If Autorun is disabled on the system navigate to the MAPublisher 8 3 directory on the DVD and double click the Setup exe file e Electronic version Double click the mp83wi e zi
117. system information IRP Image Report File irp IRP Image Report files are ASCII report files indicating the coordinates of the four corners of the raster file and the pixel size in ground units to allow for georeferencing of the image in other image processing CAD or GIS programs MapInfo TAB File tab MapInfo Table file formats save the complete reference point list information such that it can be loaded again in the future MapInfo TAB files support storing coordinate system information Supported projections when saving the coordinate system are listed below Albers Equal Area Hotine Oblique Mercator Hotine Oblique Mercator 1pt Azimuthal Equidistant Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area Polyconic Cylindrical Equal Area Lambert Conic Conformal Robinson Eckert IV Mercator Sinusoidal Eckert VI Miller Cylindrical Swiss Oblique Mercator Equidistant Conic Mollweide Stereographic Transverse Mercator Gall Stereographic New Zealand Map Grid Coordinate Systems using this projection will not be stored when saving the reference file Blue Marble Reference File rsf The Blue Marble Reference Settings File saves the complete reference point list information such that it can be loaded again in the future Within a Blue Marble Reference File the first line contains the version of the file format not to be confused with the version of the software and the total number of points in the file The remaining lines contain in each line
118. the data geometry on the page as map art is redrawn to match the new coordinate system properties 64 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP View Editor USING THE MAP VIEW EDITOR The MAP View Editor can be accessed as part of the Advanced Import dialog box or from the MAP Views panel A Advanced Import click the Create new option in the Destination MAP View section and then click the Editor button to open the MAP View Editor MAP Views panel select a MAP View and then select Edit under the Options arrow in the upper right corner of the panel Alternatively double click the MAP View name in the MAP Views panel Preview Pane and Configure Previews By default the Preview Pane displays the data extents with a green rectangle and the MAP View orientation with an arrow pointing north To move the data on the page click inside the green rectangle and drag the data to a more suitable position within the page Use the Zoom In Zoom Out and Center buttons to set the magnification of the preview To move the page within the Preview Pane click outside the MAP View extent and drag to move the page The Previews drop down list changes the preview to Coloured boxes previews up to ten MAP views each with different colours as specified in the Configure Previews settings Thumbnails preview a reduced image of the document contents including all MAP views and Thumbnails amp Boxes shows both thumbnails and coloured boxes of up to 10 MA
119. the MAPublisher labelling tools MAP Tagger tool and Label Features see chapter 10 Labelling Functions e When applying graphic styles with a brush pattern to paths manually or using MAPublisher MAP Stylesheets patterns are not applied at the right side of the line or in the expected orientation In order for the labels or patterns to be consistent for a group of lines flipping lines may be necessary PREREQUISITES Lines can be flipped on L Line and A Area layers USING FLIP LINES To flip lines select the lines and then choose Object gt MAPublisher gt Flip Lines or click the Flip Lines button on the MAPublisher toolbar Notes Flip Lines is a discrete operation It may not be apparent that the lines are flipped When exporting Area layers to GIS formats polygon outlines must have a positive Area value in the MAP Attributes panel If some values in the Area column are negative and AreaDirection is equal to Counter Clockwise Flip Lines can then be used to reverse the AreaDirection and convert the Area to a positive value For compound paths the AreaDirection property is always equal to Indeterminate even though compound paths can be flipped The MAPublisher MAP Tagger tool and Label Features have an option to enable Flip upside down labels to create text in a consistent orientation without requiring the use of the Flip Lines function see chapter 10 for more details Chapter 8 Line Functions 119 Flip
120. the position of the data on the page and rotation RESULTS Once the files have been selected and properly set up click OK to start the import process The data is imported as individual Adobe Illustrator layers with appropriate feature type matching the original source data type Layers are named based on the file name or on the layer name in the source file By default the appropriate feature type extension is appended e g name area and a layer name is already present in the document it appends a number e g name area 1 but this may be disabled in the MAPublisher Preferences Import MAP Data property sheet The layers are automatically placed as sub features of a MAP View existing or new that contains the geospatial scaling and positioning information 54 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Advanced Import MAP Views and Georeferencing The MAP Views panel is the hub from which many additional MAPublisher features may be accessed This panel organizes Adobe Illustrator layers into sub layers of distinct coordinate systems known as MAP Views Use this panel to specify coordinate systems for map layers transform coordinate systems edit scale and data placement merge layers and export to GIS formats When importing data an Adobe Illustrator layer is created for each feature type and is appended with a point line area or text suffix in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel Certain file types generate multiple layers suc
121. while clicking the start point again prevents the path from being closed and the measurement can continue Convert Measurement Line to Art When any of the above measurement methods are finished two options are available 1 Click anywhere on the artboard once to clear the measurement line and label 2 Hold the Shift key and click anywhere on the artboard once This converts the measurement line to an Adobe Illustrator art object adds it to the current layer and applies the current stroke settings A new click on the page starts a new measurement To exit the MAP Measurement Tool select another tool in the Adobe Illustrator Tools panel MAP Measurement Tool Preferences Access the MAP Measurement Tool Preferences by double clicking the MAP Measurement Tool button S on the Adobe Illustrator Tools panel or from the menu Edit MAPublisher Preferences MAP Measurement i Set the number of decimals for the measurement values enable display of azimuths and change the digitized path and new segment colours See chapter 1 for more information on MAPublisher Preferences 112 Chapter 7 Drawing Tools MAP Measurement Tool Line Functions The Adobe Illustrator environment offers lots of flexibility when working with vector art To add to its functionality MAPublisher introduces many line tools that are used for cartographic purposes Create a proximity around lines using the Buffer Art tool Change the direction of lines using the Fl
122. will open the Specify Source Coordinate System dialog box below Specify Source Coordinate System Datasource C Program Fies x86 Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Fieslgeodata xml mr Custom Data C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher Slcustomsystems xmi Folder Display Name Name Geodeti Search History fh NSIDC EASE Grid Global NSIDC EASE Grid Global Unspect Coordinate Systems Choose a 5 atia dh Robinson Robinson wases Save category appropriate to the puc a DN en omen data to be imported To view Asia Van der Grinten Van der Grinten WGS84 Europe f WGSB4 NSIDC EASE Grid Global WGS 84 NSIDC EASE Grid Global C all of the coordinate systems Example Systems NOT FOR USE WGS84 PDC Mercator WGS 84 PDC Mercator wesm AIp i North America f WGS Pseudo Mercator WGS 84 Pseudo Mercator WGS84 select AlI For a list of the Oceania amp WGS 84 World Equidistant Cylindrical WGS 84 World Equidistant Cylindrical WGS 84 last 10 coordinate systems Other E amp WGS84 World Mercator WGS 84 World Mercator wassa Outdated Deprecated B Winkel Winkel wesa used select Recent South America Q Wien Winkel wessa UTM Winkel Tripel Central Meridian Green Winkel Tripel Central Meridian Greenwich WGS84 World id World Equidistant Cylindrical Sphere World Equidistant Cylindrical Sphere Unspeci Search Specify a text string HE
123. will place the label in the center of the line and End will place the label at the end of the line The starting point of a line depends on the direction ofthe vertices r Line Rules Starting Point Start Em 7 End Placement Offset V Above has one word it will be placed on the suppression layer The Centerline option places labels directly on top ofthe line E Below 7 Vertical split Centerline Label joined feature Places one label on a line that is Label joined feature joined together Label each feature Label each feature Labels each and every line segment Divided highways Label multiple road segments with a common symbol such as a shield Lines must be within 0 25 inch and 7596 of the lines must be parallel to be considered a divided highway The divided highway symbol will be placed on the line with the longest geometry 7 Divided highways Repeat labels 00 Inches V Allow stacking V Allow labels to cross lines V Allow font reduction Steps 4 N Each step allows LabelPro to shrink the selected A font by 0 5 pt if necessary Allow use of leader lines E Allow overlapping labels C Spread words 1 00 Inches g Street Main St Spread words Multiple word labels placed a specified amount apart Repe
124. 000 Units Select the desired map units to be used in the selected scale bar pete mme eod Interval Options Interval Specify the length of ye Units Meter zm Y Je eee om each interval in the selected He Interval 600000 reda Labeled intervals Enter the map unit Maintain relative size Check this J option to convert the interval values when units are changed Apply local Use the locale format settings specified Maintain relative size C Apply locale formatting to numbers e g thousand separators Interval Options Number of labeled intervals Sinterval s Number of horizontal lines 5 interval s number of interval which will comprise each bar r Horizontal lines Select the desired number of horizontal lines to be included in the scale bar Used with certain scale bar styles only in the General section of Number of intervals to subdivide D interval s MAPublisher Preferences Number of sub intervals 2 sub interval s ub nterval L Sub intervals Select the number alae uy C of sub intervals for each Text Style Select the Adobe subdivided scale bar interval Illustrator Character Style to Labeling Options be applied to the text T Text style I Normal character Style zj Intervals to subdivide Enter the Display scale value Check this jj Display scale value Do not show z number of scale bar intervals to option to display the s
125. 081201 WY 4713611 801668 coordinates of the cursor in degrees based on Longitude 79 242434 Latitude 44 180616 the geodetic datum of the coordinate system Scale 1 Scale of the current layer Seale 1 18453568 00000 Angle 0 00000 amp Angle Angle of Rotation Map X 10817148 54308 PageX Opt p Ea 5 Page X Y Page Anchors Map X Y Map Anchors Map Y 2666214 06202 Page Y Opt Projection Robinson in METER e Coordinate System Coordinate system of the Units Units of the coordinate system Units Meter m layer if specified if specified Shift click to copy coordinates Copy Notification When the MAP Location tool is selected this description is enabled Shift click copies the current X and Y coordinates of the mouse cursor FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Location Tool panel displays the coordinates of the mouse cursor on the selected map layer in current Map Units and in Degrees Latitude and longitude values are in reference to the geodetic datum set in the coordinate system definition When no georeferencing is present on the selected layer the dialog box displays the coordinates in Page Units The panel also display the Map and Page Anchors the Scale Angle of rotation and the Coordinate System and Units of the MAP Layer The MAP Location Tool also enables the X and Y position of the cursor in the current map units WX and WY to be copied to the
126. 6 m Top Right Top Right Adjust X and Y values for Top Right the upper right of the grid extents I o 72169054 I 2987216 90543 m d Y 1900364 18631 m ve 1900364 18631 m Start alpha numeric index at Edit the first Labeling Options value used for cell labels Labeling Options Start alpha index at aA Do not use characters Enter alpha Start alpha index at A Start numeric index at 1 characters to omit from cell references d a i Start numeric index at 1 Do not use characters Reference Separator Enter one or more Do not use characters T Reference Separator 1 characters to separate the alpha and numeric indexes e g or for Reference Separator Reference label order EN 1A A 1 or A 1 r Reference label order AT 1A d Reference label order Choose to make Mobi pd E Center Labels alpha numeric or aes idi numeric alpha i Longitude Auto Detected Degrees Auto Detect Graticule Bounds Auto detect the B ximo Auto Detected Degrees maximum graticule extents from the MAP Graticule End Upper Right View s coordinate system definition B Longitude Auto Detected Degrees Graticule Start Graticule End Enter specific Latitude Auto Detected Degrees coordinates for the graticule limits Use only if the resulting graticule is truncated or wrapped 168 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes Grids and Graticules GENERATING AND EDITING THE GRID When all the opt
127. AP Stylesheets when the styling is finalized Point Data Regarding the editing of Point Data the MAP Stylesheets or the MAP Attributes panel may be used to change symbology As point data is linked dynamically to a symbol choosing Break Link to Symbol from the Symbols panel options will result in the loss of attributes for the point data However symbols may be edited manually in isolation mode double click on the symbols in the Symbols panel Expression Modes The Expression Mode determines which type of expression panel is used to edit a style rule s expression The expression mode will be remembered from the last session When the Expression Mode is set to Advanced the Advanced Expression panel appears irrespective of the expression being edited When the Expression Mode is set to Simple the Simple Expression panel appears unless the expression to be edited is not a simple expression A Simple Expression is one that is either empty or includes only one attribute and no more then two clauses using simple operators less than greater than AND For example Simple Expression AttributeA 1 Simple Expression AttributeB 5 AND AttributeB gt 1 Advanced Expression AttributeC gt 1 OR AttributeD gt 10 132 Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheet Editor Create MAP Stylesheet Legend MAP Stylesheets panel gt Create MAP Stylesheet Legend Area Line Stylesheets Legend
128. AP Layer i e not included in a MAP View in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel The unit of the document will be used in the measurements Note While the MAP Measurement Tool is enabled users can change the selected layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel If the new selected layer is contained in a different MAP View the distance values are updated accordingly on the screen automatically without having to start a new measurement e g if the MAP View scale is different the measurement will significantly change When Adobe Illustrator Smart Guides are enabled the MAP Measuring Tool can snap to existing anchor points When the mouse cursors is near enough a point Adobe Illustrator highlights it as shown in the image below 110 Chapter 7 Drawing Tools MAP Measurement Tool Measure Distance By default the MAP Measurement Tool measures distance between two points Click a starting point to begin measuring As the mouse moves on the artboard a distance label indicates the distance and azimuths if enabled in MAPublisher Preferences from the starting point to the current mouse position A second click digitizes the end point As soon as the second point is clicked the measurement is ended and the total distance is displayed gt q Total distance 1108 089350 ust A Measure Path Distance Click a starting point to begin measuring Before clicking a second time hold down the Shift key The cursor changes
129. Adv copy the attribute schema from the existing MAP Layer selected in the drop down list E Base attribute schema on P uscities point Apply to all Apply to all When multiple layers Chad dic odor ye fed are switched at once to a specified Plot Centroids Label Features MAP Tagger SES c3 m MAP View check this box to apply Tool and MAP LabelPro tools make use of this option see specific chapters the same feature type to all Missing Coordinate System Automatically opens when dragging a MAP Layer to an alternate MAP View and either the source or destination MAP View has an unspecified coordinate system Missing Coordinate System Select custom coordinate system Choose this option and then click the Select button to specify named MAP View via the Select Coordinate System dialog box Coordinate system The MAP View 1 MAP View does not contain any coordinate system information Please specify the coordinate system of this MAP View the coordinate system of the Specify coordinate system Select Same as Choose this option in order to assign a coordinate system to the named MAP View that matches that of an existing see Appendix 2 Once selected a Y r the coordinate system will be E mi e MAP View The coordinate displayed below it Coordinate system NAD83 UTM zone 10N system of the selected MAP View will be displayed below
130. Ctrl S Revert H2 Place Save for Microsoft Office Export Scripts gt Document Setup Alt Ctri P Document Color Mode gt File Info Alte Shift Ctrlel Pint Crisp Exit Ctri Q The MAPublisher Preferences can be found under the Edit menu File EE Object Type Select Effect View Window Help Undo Redo Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctri C Paste Ctrl V Paste in Front Ctrl F Paste in Back Ctrl B Clear Find and Replace Find Next Check Spelling Ctrl 1 Edit Custom Dictionary Define Pattern Edit Colors Edit Original Transparency Flattener Presets Tracing Presets Print Presets Adobe PDF Presets SWF Presets Color Settings Assign Profile Shift Ctrl Kk MAPublisher Preferences Keyboard Shortcuts Alt Shift Ctrl K Preferences The MAPublisher functions can be found under the Object gt MAPublisher menu The Edit MAP Object function can be found under the Object menu File Edit OBE Type Select Effect View Window Help Transform Arrange MAPublisher Group Ungroup Lock Unlock All Hide Show All Expand Expand Appearance Rasterize Create Gradient Mesh Create Object Mosaic Slice Path Blend Envelope Distort Live Paint Live Trace Text Wrap Clipping Mask Compound Path Convert to Artboards Graph Edit MAP Object Flatten Transparency Ctrl G Shift Ctrl G Alt Ctrl 2 Simplify Lines MAP
131. E labels y d labeling purposes T LAND labels m T MAP TrTLE v T PARK labels o T SCHOOL labels STREET lebet O Obstacle Check this option T SUPPRESSED labels should you want the IP Post Offices point contents of the layer to be P Public Schools point used as obstacles for label conflict resolution Soa g8 ADVANCED OPTIONS In the Advanced options dialog box set the Label Placement Area option to the extents based on the current artboard or the extents of labeled source layers To set Label Margins enable the option and enter the extents of the label container in increments of the current document units Data that is outside of the label margins is disregarded in the labeling process Extents of the current arthoard Advanced Default Label all designated data Label Placement Area that falls within the extents of the current artboard 9 Extents of the current artboard e Extents of labeled layers cancel Extents of labeled layers Label data J only to the extents of the selected MAP Layers Label Margins Enable the check box to add margins to the Bottom 0 00 in selected extents Obstacles Obstacles Enable the check box to a Paths without stroke are not considered specify that paths without stroke sea are not considered obstacles Note These settings are applied in conjunction to the settings from the Source Art section i
132. EQUISITES Prior to being able to use MAP GPS it is required to have a compatible GPS receiver Supported devices include any NMEA compliant device which has a serial COM port or Bluetooth connection option using a COM Port To use devices with USB connection the USB port must be converted to virtual serial COM port using software provided by the GPS vendor or a third party application Prior to interacting with the GPS device the proper COM port settings have to be specified in the Device Settings dialog box so that the GPS can communicate and interact with the MAP GPS function Either a new document or an existing document may be used to begin a GPS session If the appropriate type of layer is selected in the layers panel e g a point layer then points will be plotted on that layer If no layer or an improper layer for the type of plotting action is selected then a new layer will automatically be created of the proper type 202 Chapter 16 MAP GPS MAP GPS Panel USING THE MAP GPS PANEL Start Scanning This feature allows MAPublisher to interact with the specified GPS device When the Start Scanning button is clicked the settings specified in the Device Settings dialog box will be used to begin reading and interpreting the information the GPS is receiving This information is then used to display the GPS status in the GPS panel as well as to plot points and or lines Manual Plot This method plots a single point at the current posit
133. ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabase connection Select MAP Datasets The selection of MAP Datasets is done similarly as for ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases except that feature classes are not grouped into feature datasets Please refer to the previous section for more information Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases 245 Import from Basic ESRI ArcSDE server Appendices Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Graphic File Formats orc err recen e ERR he vx ea S EA e edis A1 1 MAPublisher Import Formats ssssssssssse m A1 2 MAPublisher Unicode Support sssssssssssses e A1 13 Technical Support Options FAQ cece eee cence eee eee eens A1 16 Memory Considerations csse A1 18 Online LINKS roer o ET A1 20 General Tips and Hints 0 cece cece eee eee ener nn A1 21 Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems OVENVIEW T A2 1 The Geodetic Datasource cece cece cece cee ee ence ene eee eneeens A2 3 Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users Legend Functionality in MAP Stylesheets ece cence eee eee A3 1 Grid and Scalebar Operations 0c cece eee een ence niesu niies A3 3 Copy and Paste incase sever cedaevesweeease qx RENE pai S patens A3 4 Legacy Text Conversion cc0cccsseneeecieeeas ire ee ce x pea e eee A3 4 Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files Appendices 247 Contents Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Graphic File Formats A
134. El Line labels are assigned angle of line at click point IA Area labels are placed horizontally Point labels are placed horizontally Note To create custom leader lines use a graphic style Create or load a graphic style and select it in the Graphic Styles panel while using the MAP Tagger Tool function MAP TAGGER TOOL RESULTS Labels are added for the object being clicked at the desired position see above Labels appear in the current default color font and font size as set by the selected character style If the destination text layer and source layer have the same attribute schema the attributes of the labeled features are copied as attributes to text features to apply MAP Stylesheets for example 142 Chapter 10 Labelling Functions MAP Tagger Tool Create Knockouts Object gt MAPublisher gt Create Knockouts or MAP Toolbar Create Knockouts Clear Click here to remove all knockouts from the selected Feature Layer Feature Layer Select the line 5 layer that will be masked with knockouts Feature layer IL MAJOR_STREET_line X Clear er Text Layer Select the layer Text layer l IT Street Labels X containing the base text for the knockouts Mask opacity 75 Mask Opacity Set the mask 4 Side butter opacity 100 creates Top buffer 1 00 transparent knockout Bottom buffer 0 50 Limit to cap height Check this F Limit to cap height option to limit the text box heig
135. Enter or edit the expression directly into the entry field or access Expression Builder see chapter 5 Method id s Expression Library see chapter 5 9 Split art that satisfies this expression 4 i Expression Validity Indicates if the expression Expression Co J a i is valid or invalid If invalid additional Empty expression In position 0 information is reported O Split art to new layer s by unique attribute value e Split art based on unique values Choose this 5 method to split the selected layer into multiple m Attribute Ii sd layers one per unique value of the selected Destination Enter the name of the new layer to attribute column in the Attribute drop down list be created Or enter a prefix when using split by 7 Destination attribute value New layer name Copy attribute schema Check this option to copy the attribute schema onto the new layer M Copy attribute schema FUNCTIONALITY Split Layer divides a MAP Layer into new MAP layers based on its objects attribute values The new layers can either contain a copy of the original objects or objects can be moved from the source layer The split can be done Based on an expression when an object s attribute values satisfy the specified expression it is added to a new layer Byunique attribute value objects that have a same attribute value are grouped into a new layer He
136. Exports It is not possible to export values in the ZText property column An alternative is to create a new string attribute column and assign it an expression of ZText See Edit Schema in chapter 5 on MAP Attributes Texts on a path are exported as point text with an angle main direction of the original path Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 71 Export Import MAP Objects MAP Views panel gt Import MAP Objects and MAP Toolbar 3 Import MAP Objects Check the MAP objects you wish to import Object Import Cancel Document Available open ea UnitedStates16 eme map document 4 Q MAP Views vi Lower48 V MAP Views List of available e MAP Viewl vi MAP Views to import Q World Je Import Toggle Check to alaska zi import the MAP Object Q hawaii vi 4 MAP Stylesheets A MAP Stylesheets List of available Mna Per State m MAP Stylesheets to import pig y P IP US Cities FI 4 Y MAP Selections T MAP Selections List of available e fo Interstate gl MAP Selections to import TAN E V Copy MAP layers belonging to imported MAP Views FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher Import MAP Objects copies MAP objects from one document to another including all MAP Views and the layers that are within them MAP Stylesheets and MAP Selections This can be a useful tool when merging parts of several documents into a single document For example it might be useful to import a commonly used
137. F8 compliant Unicode support for importing and exporting data is different so for each platform two tables have been created For each data format there are four areas where Unicode character encoding can be used 1 File Directory when Unicode encoding is used in the path to where the file is located 2 Filename when Unicode encoding is used in the filename 3 Attribute column name when Unicode encoding is used in a column name for attributes 4 Attribute value when an attribute value contains Unicode encoding Data Format Delimited Text CAD DWG CAD DXF ESRI ArcInfo Generate ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabase ESRI File Geodatabase ESRI Inter change File ESRI Personal Geodatabase ESRI Shapefile GML Simple Features MapInfo MIF MID MapInfo TAB MicroStation Design KML KMZ File Directory X X Windows Unicode Support mporting Attribute Attribute Column Value Name E FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES FORMAT USES SIMPLE ASCII TEXT FOR ATTRIBUTE NAMES AND MOST VALUES Data Format Delimited Text CAD DWG CAD DXF ESRI Inter changeFile ESRI ArcInfo Generate ESRI Shapefile GML Simple Features MapInfo MIF MID MapInfo TAB MicroStation Design KML Windows Unic
138. FUNCTIONALITY MAP GPS Autosave Settings provides the option to have a document automatically save each time a specified time interval has elapsed This feature provides a way to limit data loss in the instance that hardware or power problems occur while collecting data PREREQUISITES The current document must have already been saved at least once to a local location on the computer If the MAP GPS Autosave setting is enabled and the current document has not been saved yet a warning stating that this feature will not function until the document is saved and will offer the option to manually save the document at that time will appear upon closing the dialog box USING THE AUTOSAVE SETTINGS To enable MAP GPS Autosave settings check the Automatically Save Document every check box and specify the number of minutes between autosave instances Once this has been enabled and the current document has been saved automatic saves will occur each time the specified interval is reached Chapter 16 MAP GPS 207 MAP GPS Autosave Settings Edit User Attribute for Current Layer Accessed from the MAP GPS panel options menu Current Layer Displays the 4 Edit User Attribute for Current Layer currently selected layer in the Current Layer gps points ae Adobe Illustrator Layers panel User Attribute Settings cence Current Attribute Displays a list of Current Column z create Column Create New
139. For example for a line layer containing street data each line segment may be linked to a table with information relative to the street name and street category Using the MAP Attributes panel this information can be viewed queried edited or additional columns of data may be appended The MAP Stylesheets make use of the attribute data to apply Adobe Illustrator graphic styles symbols or character styles to map features depending on a given object s attribute value MAPublisher offers many functions and tools to manage GIS data from within Adobe Illustrator They are described in detail in this manual Import major GIS and CAD format MAPublisher Simple and Advanced Import Spatial Database Plot a symbol by typing in its world coordinates MAP Point Plotter Draw objects with geographic dimensions MAP Area Tools e Trim the geographic extents of the map MAP Vector Crop Join lines or points that share a same attribute value simplify lines create a buffer area around a line MAPublisher line functions Automatically label features based on attribute data MAP LabelPro Label Features and MAP Tagger Tool Select features based on attributes MAP Selections Import and export geographically referenced images Create grids and indexes Create scale bars and north arrows Export to Geospatial PDF Export a map to Flash with populated Web tags MAP Web Author Export layers to major GIS and CAD formats
140. Graphic Style to apply to the buffer Enable Add concentric rings and a specify interval distance between rings to create equally spaced rings around points 114 Chapter 8 Line Functions Buffer Art Current Layer Indicates the currently selected layer can Line Plotter Object gt MAPublisher gt Line Plotter or MAP Toolbar A Line Plotter Point By Point r Line Plotter e Current Layer IA STATES area be area or line layer and its coordinate system Input Coordinate system Specify Coordinate System United States Albers E the coordinate system in which the starting point coordinate is entered Use the current layer s Input Coordinate System Use Current Layer s coordinate system Use NAD27 Select coordinate system or specify a different one by default the geodetic system base of e Format Projected Units M the projection in latitude longitude format Click the Select button to open the Select Coordinate System dialog box and choose any coordinate system Format Select the input format for values in degrees when input coordinate system is geodetic Starting Point Enter the coordinates of the first point of the line Valid coordinates are marked with invalid ones with XX V Close path requires at least three points 1s Starting Point x 1899885 941 eo Y 222922292 106 e Options Additional Line Points P
141. IF CASE IS LEFT Il LENGTH Bl LIKE IS MID RJ NUMBER RI Pow S PROPER IRI RADIANS IB REGEX S RIGHT I ROUND IR ROUNDDOWN IR ROUNDUP lI SEARCH RI SIN ISI SPLIT IRI SORT BB STARTSWITH S SUBSTITUTE S SUBSTITUTE RX RI TAN S TRIM S UPPER Absolute value of a number Inverse of the cosine of an angle Arcsine of an angle Arctangent of an angle True if source string contains search string Cosine of an angle Converts values from radians to degrees Returns true the source string ends with the suffix string Numbers as string values Conditional statement Conditional statement based on multiple cases Extracts the first N characters of a string Returns the number of characters in a string Searches the source string using wildcards Extracts N characters of a string from a specified location String values as numbers Base to the power of an exponent Strings converted to capital case Converts values from degrees to radians Searches the source string using a regular expression Extracts the last N characters of a string Rounds to specified decimals of precision Rounds down to specified decimals of precision Rounds up to specified decimals of precision Returns the position of a character in a string The sine of an angle Splits a string and extracts the indexed part of i Square root of a value Returns true if the source string starts with the prefix string Replaces a set of characters by another
142. IS formats maintaining all georeferencing and attribute information The following export formats are supported CAD dxf dwg GML Simple Features 3 1 1 gml xsd Delimited Text Data csv tsv txt KML KMZ kml kmz ESRI Interchange File e00 MapInfo MIF MID mif mid ESRI Arcinfo Generate gen Mapinfo TAB tab ESRI Shapefile shp Microstation Design dgn Notes Exporting a MAP View to CAD or MicroStation format will assemble all hosted layers into a single file Exporting a MAP View to Flash map or Geospatial PDF is explained in chapter 15 and 17 respectively PREREQUISITES The Export function exports a single selected Adobe Illustrator layer contained in a MAP View or all layers contained in a selected MAP View Both imported and user created MAP Views that contain MAP Layers suitable for export to GIS formats USING MAP EXPORT Export a MAP View To export all the MAP layers within a single MAP View select the MAP View to be exported in the MAP Views panel then click the Export MAP View button eo Alternatively click Export IMAP View name in the panel options menu Export a MAP Layer To export a single layer select the MAP Layer to be exported in the MAP Views panel then click Export MAP Layer button as x Alternatively click Export IMAP View name in the panel options menu In the Export layer dialog box choose the required export Format Click the Settings button
143. Illustrator document Attribute values can subsequently be accessed and searched in Acrobat version 9 and 8 with limitations Geospatial PDF exported with MAPublisher can be used in Adobe Acrobat as follows Find and mark location coordinates Measure distance perimeter and area View coordinates in measurement units in various formats units e Copy location coordinates to clipboard e View attributes of map objects Reopen Geospatial PDF in Adobe Illustrator with MAPublisher capabilities maintained This section provides an overview of the exporting process of a MAP Geospatial PDF along with an outline of the tools used when viewing a geospatial PDF in Adobe Acrobat Topics covered in this section are MAP Geospatial PDF Export View MAP Geospatial PDF Chapter 17 Export Geospatial PDF 211 MAP Geospatial PDF Export File gt Export gt MAP Geospatial PDF or MAP Toolbar D r Geospatial PDF Settings Export Attributes Enable which Export Attributes for Layer layers will be exported with attributes Object Export Attributes 4 MAP Views v MAP View name click the check 4 Lower48 v box to enable disable the uscities point 7l attribute export of all layers in the selected MAP View ID US Highway ivi Layer name click the check box IL State Highway ri z to enable disable the attribute IL Interstate V p exp
144. Import ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases Format Select ESR ArcSDE Geodatabase lt Auto detect format gt cannot be used Connections List of connections already created within MAPublisher Recent saved MAP Datasets List of recently selected MAP datasets Create new Opens the Create new ArcSDE Geodatabase connection dialog box Connection Settings Specify the connection settings Connection Name Server Service and Database Name as specified in the database Connection Properties in ESRI ArcCatalog See next page for specific details for SQL Server Express connection Desktop and Workgroup Geodatabases Database Authentication Enter user name and password provided by the database administrator Operating System Authentication The server connection uses Windows authentication The user must be logged into Windows with a login name that is also valid on the database server Simple Import Advanced Import gt Add Encoding Unicode 8 bit UTF 8 Source Coordinate System No Coordinate System Specified T Same as f Simple Import e Format ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabase 7 settings x Cancel Dataset Browse Browse Opens the ArcSDE Geodatabase browser Browse ArcSDE Geodatabase Browse ArcSDE Geodatabase Select Connection or MAP Dataset 4 Connections Oracle_server SQL Express Connection ArcSDE 93 Connection Recent saved MAP Data
145. JOINING SDTS TABLES The following information should be used in conjunction with the MAPublisher Join a Table function When working with United States Geological Survey SDTS files it is necessary to join tables frequently in order to obtain the map attribute table you require to make the map you want This is due to the fact that SDTS data is constructed such that the primary vector data is held separately from the various attribute tables that one might want to use for a particular mapping purpose The attribute table that comes as part of the vector file usually contains a unique identifier RCID for each map element that is used to join it with the other data tables For example a particular vector file containing the geography of rivers would contain a data column called RCID Various data tables containing information such as vegetation fish counts or flow rates might be available each also with an RCID column The desired tables are then joined to the initial map attribute table by RCID value using the techniques described in the previous pages To find the SDTS tables to join with the vector map file look for the files which have names that start with the same character string as the name of the vector file MAPublisher imports SDTS files that have the characters CATD at the end of the file name A typical table to import and join with this file might be called HYO1CATD ddf Use the MAPublisher table importer with SDTS file type chosen
146. KML attributes are imported but are hidden in the MAP Attributes panel The KML attributes are Description and Address which are displayed in the MAP Attributes panel as kmlDescription object description and kmlAddress object address 48 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Simple Import MicroStation Design Settings Complex Chains Check the Drop box for each component of a Settings complex chain to be returned as its own feature Otherwise all elements of the complex Drop complex chains Group Elements chain will be merged into a single linear feature Group Elements Choose how to group the elements If D By level By geometry e Coordinate Units elements are grouped by level it may result in a large number of output files Coordinate Units Specifies how feature coordinates will be interpreted and converted Master UOR White Lines and Fills Import as is Change white lines and fills to black Create black background White Lines and Fills Set the option Import as is import the data true to the original colour settings contained in the file Change white lines and fills to black import black lines instead of the files native white lines Create black background incorporate a layer containing a black background to mimic the Microstation environment SIMPLE IMPORT FUNCTIONALITY The Simple Import functi
147. LATE You can create template files with legends to automate the production of a series of similar maps 1 The procedure when using MAP Stylesheets is as follows 2 Create a prototype map using the MAPublisher Stylesheet function to create the desired look 3 Make a copy of your prototype map file Delete all the layers from the file so that only the designated stylesheets exist 4 Save it to a new template file A1 25 5 Use this template file as a base for future maps as follows a Make a copy of the template file b Import all map layers into the template file and do any needed processing c Inthe MAP Stylesheets panel drag your MAP Layers into the desired MAP Stylesheets d Your new layers will be symbolized by the previously defined Stylesheet CREATING A MULTI CONDITIONAL IF EXPRESSION In Edit Expression it is possible to assign symbology to map objects by assigning an expression to the Style column In the following example this is achieved by creating a multi conditional IF statement In the following example a point layer represents cities Each point has the value Y N or C in the CAPITAL attribute column describing whether the city is a state capital Y is not a state capital N or is a country capital C There are three point symbols to assign to the type of point In this example the following expressions can be assigned to the Style column of the point layer both expressions have the sa
148. Lines Join Lines Object gt MAPublisher gt Join Lines or MAP Toolbar Ps Join Lines Join on Attribute Select the attribute column to base the join on All lines within the selected proximity e Join on attribute S ROUTE 1 Proximity Assign a proximity value with matching column values will re HRS to determine how close together in be joined Destination Layer roads line joined Cancel 1 map units the lines must be in order M Proximity 0 500000 Meter X to be joined Destination Layer Enter the name of i the output layer This new layer will _ Close Segment Gaps Proximity Units Select a map or page contain the newly joined lines 1 i unit to be used for proximity values Close Segment Gaps If two line segments are separated by a distance less than the Proximity selecting this option will create a line segment that connects the two lines otherwise a compound path is created FUNCTIONALITY Join Lines allows a group of linear features to be joined based on a common attribute For example it may be desirable to join all segments of a particular street by the common attribute of street name in order to create a single line element representing that street When Join Lines is completed a new map layer is created that contains the joined lines These lines contain an attribute column based on the column used to join them Join Lines can be very
149. MAP Web Author panel is used to create edit or modify these interactive objects Web tags can either be populated one object at a time or for a selection of objects To create or edit multiple Web tags select artwork and click the Edit button Using this method the same Web tag format is applied to all selected artwork Information can be entered manually or extracted from the MAP Attributes fields when available for the object layer At any time Web tags can be edited or modified by selecting them and clicking Edit Text and image formatting is created using simple HTML Hyper Text Markup Language The results can be checked in the Callout Preview window available in the Web Tag Dialog Additional settings such as customizing the navigation and callout bubbles are available during the export process 182 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author MAP Web Author Panel PREREQUISITES In order to use MAP Web Author first complete a map using MAPublisher and Adobe Illustrator tools The Adobe Illustrator artboard will determine the size of the Flash map It is recommended to set the document size before any work is started However the document size may be changed in the Adobe Illustrator Document Setup CS3 or Artboard Options CS4 CS5 dialog box at any time Using pixel units is the most practical to determine Flash map sizes in a Web browser To populate Web tags MAP layers must have relevant attributes populated in their MAP Attributes tables For
150. No Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No Spatial Index Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required N A Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute sdts type Line Yes Text No A1 11 USGS DIGITAL LINE GRAPH DLG OPT DLG is a fixed field record that may or may not have end of line markers The DLG file structure was designed to accommodate all categories of spatial data represented on a conventional line map DLG is a published ASCII format developed by the United States Geological Survey USGS Federal Agency and is intended to assist in data exchange with the National Digital Cartographic Data Base NDCDB The DLG reader supports all three distinct types of DLG data e Large scale DLG data 1 24 000 scale e Intermediate scale DLG 1 100 000 scale Small scale DLG data 1 2 000 000 scale The three scales of DLG data are physically formatted into files in one of these ways standard optional and graphics formats MAPublisher supports both the standard and the optional DLG distribution formats however the graphics format is not supported Most DLG data is distributed in the optional format The DLG file structure was designed to accommodate all categories of spatial data represented on a conventional line map Node line and area data types are present within the DLG format along with linkages and attribute codes Linkages are references to other feat
151. Object gt Edit Scale Bar menu item This will re open the Scale Bar dialog box and the current parameters of the bar are available for editing Note Manually editing the type position font colour etc is not possible on scale bars in their default grouped state However manual editing is still possible if the object is expanded first Object gt Expand Please note however that this will remove all opportunity to subsequently edit the art via the Scale Bar filter Please see Appendix A3 for more information on working with scale bars in MAPublisher 8 178 Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows Scale Bar Create North Arrow Object gt MAPublisher gt Create North Arrow or MAP Toolbar FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Create North Arrow function converts selected art into a North Arrow In this process the selected art is rotated toward true north at the art location This property is then maintained through subsequent move on the map reprojection or rotation The true north is the direction to the geographic North Pole this direction may vary on a map depending on the selected MAP View coordinate system To visualize this think of the lines of latitude in a graticule see chapter 13 these lines can be straight or curved Note True north usually differs from magnetic north the direction of the magnetic north pole which varies in time and space and grid north the direction northwards along the measured grid of a p
152. P Selection Copies the selected MAP Selection Edit My MAP Selection e Delete My MAP Selection Apply as New Selection Add to Current Selection Remove from Current Selection Get Subset of Current Selection L Edit MAP Selection Opens the Edit MAP Selection dialog box alaleuat B P r Import MAP Objects Opens the mport MAP Objects function see chapter 4 Import MAP Objects Preferences MAPublisher Preferences fe Expression Builder Jj General Import Map Data gt E MAP Attributes Q MAP LabelPro H MAP Location Q MAP Measurement 4 f MAP Selections Preferences Opens the MAPublisher Preferences on the MAP Selections property sheet MAP Selections Panel Preferences foo Toll TOLL RD Y Layer Using current layer 7 Texas State Selected Art fe My MAP Selection ADMN CLASS Interstate Layer usroads line Select roads within texas Based on MAP Selection Texas State Output layer usroads line MAP Selection Name Name given to the MAP Selection It can be changed in the Edit MAP Selection dialog box MAP Selection Parameters Summary of the selection parameters They can be changed in the Edit MAP Selection dialog box Delete MAP Selection Deletes the highlighted MAP Selection s Create New MAP Selection Opens the New MAP Selection dialog box below Get Subset of Current Selec
153. P Stylesheet Rules List of styling criteria in a hierarchical format MAP Stylesheet Editor MAP Stylesheets panel gt Edit i Edit Population Density Name Population Density Expression Click to edit the expression assigned to each style rule see below e Style Rules dee Move Up Down Adjust the mm T m order in which the rules J Name Sve Expression Scale will be applied 1 Low MAP Area18 DENSITY lt 10 100 e Scale Adjust size symbols Rule Name Edit name of the style rule Style List of established Graphic Styles for area and line stylesheets Character Styles text stylesheets or Symbols point stylesheets Add Remove Add a new style rule or delete the currently selected rule Column Lists the attribute column s of the associated MAP Layers DENSITY Range operator Click to activate the second row to enable the composition of 2 Medium MAP Area 17 DENSITY gt 10 AND DENSITY lt 20 100 3 High E i an 15 DENSITY gt 20 100 Add Remove Expression Mode 9 Simple 5 Advanced e _ _ Simple Expression To compose and edit expressions in Simple Mode Simple Expression Advanced Expression To compose and edit expressions in Advanced Mode Advanced Expression DENSITY 10 AND DENSITY 20 x
154. P Stylesheet Editor Expression Builder 5 Expression Builder Operator buttons Click to insert an ano oR l I E I I gt Y I 1 I amp operator into the expression at the current cursor position POPULATION AREA libary Access all expressions for the document including recently used attribute filters named expressions Save Save the current expression to a named expression Expression Validity Indicates if the expression is valid or invalid If invalid additional info is reported Expression Entry Area to compose expressions Advanced toggle Click to show or hide the Expression Components section f The expression is valid Cursor Position Position of the current text entry point Objects List of attribute and property eA Expression Components columns constants and functions M Description Displays information about use in the expression Double click itemnsto sas into expression oes _ Seeks the selected item in the Objects panel t gt Al Lower48 area STATE NAME E i e a description and example of the Layer attributes List of the attribute and ed Jj F 3 function or constant or information property columns B sfalse Lj Poss pd regarding the format of the MAP layer R i Default Value along with its attribute values Constants List of constants for use in the r A a io
155. P views in the document Note Due to Adobe Illustrator rasterization limitations thumbnails cannot be created for very large MAP Views To configure the previews click the Configure Previews button F To adjust the colour of the current MAP View preview click the colour chip and choose a colour in the colour picker dialog box Layer visibility can be individually toggled under the Visible column Use the Show All or Hide All buttons to toggle the visibility of the entire list To toggle only the layers of a particular MAP View right click the MAP View to access a context menu that has the options to Show All or Hide All Adjust thumbnail quality using the drop down list at the bottom of the dialog box Quality settings include Low Medium High and Very High m Configure Preview Current MAP View preview colour Click to change the colour H Current MAP View preview colour E Name Visible MAP View 4 B USA MAP View Legend Scale Bar IT State Names uscities point IL usroads line B US Image 4 BB World Capitals B World area Graticule B waterbackground 4 Q D hawaii B hawaii area copy IA hawaii area 4 Z Non MAP Layers Z Layer1 l MAP Layers i SI S S S S S Toggle Visibility layer s thumbnails GG GG Toggle Visibility MAP View s coloured box Thumbnail quality Note The Auto Scale function will apply to the exte
156. PUBLISHER DOCUMENT OPERATIONS Import MAP Objects Split Layer 5 wl Hy MAPUBLISHER PANELS MAP Attributes HA SyF ya MAP GPS Panel MAP Web Author MAP Stylesheets MAP Location Tool MAP Views MAP Selections MAP Point Plotter Chapter 1 Getting Started 27 MAPublisher Toolbar MAPublisher Preferences Edit gt MAPublisher Preferences Windows Illustrator gt MAPublisher Preferences Mac OS MAPublisher Preferences are options that allow users to customize MAPublisher panels and editors including those for layer ordering font for attribute data display and panel style Settings are available for the following categories Expression Builder MAP Selection Filters panel General MAP Stylesheets panel and editor Import Map Data e MAP Views panel and editor MAP Attributes panel Spatial Database Basic ESRI ArcSDE MAP LabelPro Server Editor ESRI Geodatabase Editor MAP Location panel and General Spatial Database Editor MAP Measurement Windows only MAPublisher Preferences fe Expression Builder Import Map Data Cancel 4 E MAP Attributes Panel RY MAP LabelPro 4 MAP Location Panel S MAP Measurement 4 F MAP Selections Property sheet with options specific to the 1s M Eck selected category on the list to the left E Editor T7 Panel 4 Q MAP Views E Editor TE Panel 4 j Spatial Database E Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Editor E ESRI Geodatabase Ed
157. PersonalGeodatabases Geodatabase Delaware mdb Browse J lt Auto detect format gt can only be eee ei arai used for Personal Geodatabases Encoding Unicode amp bit UTF 8 z Source Coordinate System NAD83 Pennsylvania South RUS El Same as San Francisco Downtown Y Select Feature Classes P Select Feature Classes Feature classes Click one or more e Select Feature Classes miam feature classes to import only classes x po yea 4 Geodetic canca sharing the same original coordinate i IP digital elevation model point system spatial reference can be lll control point imported together E obscured area ID breakline 4 Landform I county boundary I county tiles Al delivery boundary Specify Spatial Filter Click this button to open the Specify Spatial Filter dialog box Specify Spatial Fites SQL Query Click this option to open the e5 SQL Query Create SQL Select Query dialog box Spatial Filter m Specify Spatial Filter Point Coordinates Enter the four corners of the spatial filter boundaries eg x Y m Point i 2563530 000007 175619 994833 US Survey Foot eme Point g Point2 i i Point2 2563530000007 276720 000047 US Survey Foot I I Point 3 2685960 013305 276720 000047 US Survey Foot l Point4 2685960 013305 175619 994833 US Survey Foot Point4 Point3 Relationship
158. RI ArcSDE Geodatabase ESRI File Geodatabase and ESRI Personal Geodatabase r Settings Prepend feature dataset name to layer name _ Prepend feature dataset name to layer name n Select this option to prepend feature CE A dataset names to layer names canei y Use locale to decode e Unicode database Unless specific issues En importing converted geodatabases If no value is keep this option as default machine will Use locale to decode This option might be required if the geodatabase was created by converting a file in a format not supporting unicode e g ESRI shapefile and if it contains non ASCII characters urrent Locale Specify the locale name e g en US leave it as O to use the locale of the current machine Note These are advanced settings Contact Avenza Technical Support support avenza com for assistance KML KMZ Settings Settings Allow Random Colour Mode e V Allow random colour mode um Enable this option to V Expand network links generate random colour 7 Import KML properties as visible attributes om settings for the data Expand Network Links Enable this option to use of network linked KML files Import KML properties as visible attributes Enable this option to import KML specific attributes into the MAP Attributes panel as visible entities When this option is disabled these
159. The expression is valid 4 i in Point stylesheets or stroke in Area and Line stylesheets Expression Mode Select the style of the display for creating expressions see below Expression Enter expression here Click the 7 button to open Expression Builder Click the fj button to open the Expression Library see chapter 5 RM List of operators L Expression Validity Indicates if the expression is 4 valid or invalid If invalid additional information is reported Value List of values in the selected column range expressions t For Text stylesheets if the Style list does not contain a recently created character style simply return to the Character Style panel double click this style and click OK in the Character Style Options dialog box This forces Adobe Illustrator to re load the list of character styles FUNCTIONALITY The MAP Stylesheet Editor contains the rules applied to link certain attribute values with symbols or styles taken from the Adobe Illustrator panels Symbols Graphic Styles or Character Styles In this interface create or remove rules that are defined by Name name can be edited Style selection from the Adobe Illustrator panels e Expression conditions on the attribute values using Simple or Advanced methods Scale modify the scale of the selected symbol or the stroke of the selected graphic style Note A style symbol graphic or character can only be used once per
160. a line point or text which may have been appended to layer names Le Keep format extension V Export visible attributes only ere only Check this option to export only the attributes that are currently visible in the MAP Ca during import AutoCAD Settings Attributes panel GML Settings Include header F Keep format extensi r Add the column headers at the first line of the l Indude header exported text file layer or MAP View uses a double byte character set Delimited XY Text Data Settings V Export visible attributes only KML KMZ Settings Settings Settings E Keep format extension C E Keep format extension V Export visible attributes only e X Y Coordinate Ordering Reverse XY coords for geodetic coordinates default behaviour Reverse XY coordinates Do not reverse X coordinates Cm cu R12 R2000 R13 R2004 R14 9 R2007 Release Specify the AutoCAD version number to export to MIF MID Settings Settings E Keep format extension Ca L XY Coordinate Ordering Set the X Y coordinate ordering for GML files This may help in third party software MicroStation Settings Settings E Keep format extension _ V Export visible attributes only T Suppress Pen and Brush lines V Allow area fills Coordinate Units
161. a geographic interface language for the Geo Web It is currently in draft as an ISO standard ISO 19136 The goal of the format is to provide users with a set of abstract base objects that can be built into working real world dataset It uses as XML base to store geometry and feature information that can easily be transported across the Internet The GML Simple Feature Profile was created by the Open Geospatial Consortium OGC as a restricted but useful subset of the GML specification It provides a reduced geometry and metadata profile that can be shared across many GIS tasks This simple feature model can be used as a base to generate local application profiles for a specific work area Since the GML models base abstract classes these application profiles schemas are required for accessing and processing any GML datasets GML data has a gml extension and requires a attributes schema file xsd Some GML files may have their xsd file referenced to a URL path we recommend to copy the xsd files locally to avoid error messages upon import when no internet connection is available Users have two options to store their gml and xsd files they can be both located in a same directory or the xsd files can be kept in the MAPublisher GML Schema directory found here Windows XP Vista and 7 C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files GMLSchema Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In Data Source Files GMLSchema Th
162. able depending on the expected results If the Labels curve with lines of latitude option is selected MAPublisher creates a path that conforms to local lines of latitude and place the text along it If this option is not selected the labels are placed horizontally This option is enabled only for MAP Views set with a projected coordinate system Labels can be modified if they exceed the size of the area in the current default font size by selecting the Adjust label if larger than area option to activate the label rules Rules are executed by MAPublisher in a hierarchical order and can be reordered by clicking the rule and then the Up or Down button The Reduce font size option allows to reduce the size of the font to a specified minimum size in points Reduce horizontal scaling allows text to be scaled horizontally by the fraction specified The Wrap Labels that are longer than area option adds a carriage return at the nearest space in the text Note The Wrap Labels that are longer than area option is not available if the Labels curve with lines of latitude option is checked Label Features also provides an additional option which is not available with the MAP Tagger tool If any of the labels have been adjusted in size due to the deployment of an area adjustment rule all labels can be resized to the same size by checking the Set all labels to the same minimum font size option If no rules are enabled MAPublisher will not perform any label s
163. all reside in the same directory You must select the shp file for import Point multipoint polyline and polygon geometric data can be stored in shp files However a single shp file can contain only one type of geometry Each entity in a shp file has a corresponding entry in the shx index file and a corresponding row of attributes in the associated dbf file The order of the entries in each of these files is synchronized For example the 3rd geometric entity in the shp file is pointed to by the 3rd entry in the shx index file and has the attributes held in the 3rd row of the dbf A single Shapefile may also consist of a number of additional files with the following file name extensions sbn sbx Spatial index files for the geometric data These two files are only generating by an ESRI product however they are not required by MAPublisher for import and will they be generated when exporting data to the Shapefile format prj Spatial coordinate system information If a prj file exists in your Shapefile directory holding the coordinate system information of the Shapefile this will automatically be read by MAPublisher on import If your Shapefile folder does not contain a prj file you will be required to specify the coordinate system in order to fully utilize MAPublisher Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions shp shx dbf prj Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Yes Circles No User D
164. alog box allows users to select copy and edit coordinate systems and associated parameters from the MAPublisher coordinate systems Geodetic Data Source The MAPublisher Geodetic Datasource is explained in depth in Appendix A2 Coordinate systems are divided in two categories Geodetic and Projected For convenience they are sorted in sub folders by continent gt country gt sub division e g state or county The All category lists all systems with no sorting the Recent category lists the last 10 systems recently selected the Search category lists the result of a coordinate system search The MAPublisher coordinate systems may also contain custom systems New MAP Views After clicking the New MAP View button the MAP View Editor opens for users to set the name coordinate system and page scaling of the new MAP View After a new MAP View is created the Specify Anchors option from the MAP Views panel must be used to define the tie in point between Map Anchor and Page Anchor Map Anchor coordinates can be entered in any chosen coordinate system for example latitude and longitude in degree for projected map This functionality is explained in detail in Georeferencing an Adobe Illustrator file in appendix A1 General Tips Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 67 MAP View Editor Long Lat Order optional If Show Latitude Longitude ordering option is enabled in the MAPublisher Preferences for MAP Views gt Editor see chapter 1
165. alog box refers to the Destination MAP View settings The Add and Edit buttons open a dialog box similar to the Simple Import dialog box Please refer to the previous section for information on the Character Encoding Format Specific Settings and Delimited Text Data Settings Note The dialog box displays the file name or the full path of the selected files depending on the settings specified in the MAPublisher Preferences for Import MAP Data see chapter 1 Users can also choose to display the geographical extents of the file Adding Files Click the Add button to select one or more files that share the same format and coordinate system The Add dialog box is similar to the Simple Import dialog box please refer to previous section for more information Click OK to add the files to the Advanced Import list To import more files in a different format or coordinate system use the Add dialog box again as often as necessary Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 53 Advanced Import Advanced Import File List All selected datasets are listed in the Advanced Import dialog box The list contains two columns for each file the coordinate system and full access path are displayed Click on a row of the list to select a dataset Then click Remove to remove the dataset or click Edit to change the import parameters The Edit dialog box provides the same options as the Add dialog box users can modify the access path settings or source coordinate system
166. alue 2 3 Keep clicking the Add button until all the values or styles have been used Example 2 Rule 1 assigned first listed value and third style 1 Create the first Equal to rule using the first listed style and an expression based on the third listed value in a specified attribute column i e Style C assigned to Column X Value 1 2 Clickthe Add button The second rule will be automatically assigned the first unused style i e Style A assigned to Column X Value 2 3 Keep clicking the Add button Assignments will be incremental but will not include the third style again i e Style B assigned to Column X Value 3 Style D assigned to Column X Value 4 etc A3 1 CREATING STYLE RULES BASED ON MULTIBLE ATTRIBUTE COLUMNS Assign Legend Info previously provided options to assign legend criteria to legend elements based on values in multiple attribute columns This functionality can now be achieved using Advanced expressions in the MAP Stylesheet Editor Choose the Advanced option to compose advanced expressions The following are some examples of multi column expressions in a world countries stylesheet using a string type column named CONTINENT and an integer type column named POPULATION CONTINENT Africa AND POPULATION lt 1000000 Result only African countries with populations less than one million are assigned the selected style CONTINENT Africa OR POPULATIONK lt 1000000 Result all African count
167. ame will be displayed in the dialog box along with any string attribute column names associated with that layer To add attribute values to an existing attribute column select the desired column name from the Current Attribute combo box and enter the desired attribute value into the Current Value text field To create a new column select the Create New button and enter a column name into the open dialog box When a new attribute column is created its type will be automatically set to string When the dialog box closes and plotting begins the attribute value will be added to the layer each time a point is plotted Note If the Edit User Attribute for Current Layer dialog box is opened while plotting is in progress the plotting will be paused This allows the necessary changes to be made Upon closing the dialog box all the points which would have been plotted will be plotted and will reflect the changes just made 208 Chapter 16 MAP GPS Edit User Attribute for Current Layer Record Sentence Log Accessed from the MAP GPS panel options menu MAP GPS Log File Settings Log File Specify a location to LeLog File C Users Desktop MAP GPS Log txt save the log text file to 3 Append L Overwrite Will overwrite information in the specified file if it contains any Append Will add new information at the end of the file if it already contains log information FUNCTIONALITY The Record Sentence Log
168. an additional option Lat Lon Order becomes visible under the angle settings Lat Long Order Longitude latitude The latitude longitude order Longitude latitude or Latitude longitude applies to the following tools or panels MAP Location Tool MAP Point Plotter and Line Plotter IMPORTANT NOTES FOR ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR CS4 USERS Adobe Illustrator CS4 introduced the concept of multiple artboards up to 100 MAPublisher 8 takes this new feature into account in the MAP View Editor When a document contains multiple artboards the MAP View Editor dialog box has an additional drop down list to select the Active Artboard When this section of the dialog has focus the Preview Pane displays the number of each artboard The current active artboard is shown in white while the others are greyed out The Page Alignment and Scale calculations are based on the Active Artboard dimensions To move the data extent green box in the Preview Pane from one artboard to another change the Active Artboard number to the artboard where the data is to be moved then click the Auto Scale button or one of the Page Alignment grid positions Edit USA MAP View n if Artboards Preview of the artboards present on the canvas a T Q EJ E Active Artboard White background Other Artboards Greyed out Active Artboard Select the number of the artboard to be set as Active Show Anchors Active Artboard a
169. and Operations 151 MAP Selections EDIT A MAP SELECTION To edit an existing MAP Selection click the selection name in the MAP Selections panel and choose Edit MAP Selection in the panel options menu Alternatively double click the selection name The Edit MAP Selection dialog box allows to rename the MAP Selection and to edit the selection parameters The dialog box options depend on the MAP Selection type When editing an Attribute Filter the selection layer s and the expression may be edited as new When editing an Art Selection three options are offered Show Selection shows the stored Art Selection on the artboard Replace if art is selected replace the stored Art Selection with the current selection Add if art is selected add the current selection to the stored Art Selection When editing a Spatial Filter all the parameters may be changed If the Filter Using option is set to an Art Selection the same edit options as above are available Show Selection Replace and Add DELETE A MAP SELECTION Click one or more selection names in the MAP Selections panel then click the delete button J or choose Delete MAP Selection in the panel options menu Note Use caution when deleting some selections may be dependent on others MAKE SELECTIONS When a MAP Selection is first created the matching art is automatically selected Saved MAP Selections can be applied again at any time Note MAP Selections based on Attribut
170. aneously labeled assign a priority Style Create a new label style or choose from a Suppression Layer Repository for labels that could not be Source Displays MAP Views and its associated MAP Layers specified in P TG Sen Francisco Downtown Label Label di Street Label Style Street Label Rule Z Ignored Land Label Style Land label Rule 7 Ignored IT STREET labels IT PARK labels s for layers The destination level to each The same list of established dictate how labels placed based on the layer holds the labels priority can be set to label styles are placed rules set multiple layers r Save amp Label Save the M l current settings in the e Source Attribute Painin aj Binit Style Rules paumares Save amp tabel LabelPro configuration dialog box and perform the labeling operation based on these settings E Streets line STREETNAME Setup Layers A Parks ares S PARK NAME Obstacle Layers m Source Art Obstacle layers Displays MAP Views and its associated MAP Layers specified San Francisco Downtown T marme P Post Offices point P Public Schools point A Land area A Parks area Label all art on source layers Label only selected art on source layers m Options E 4 Save Save the current settings in the LabelPro configuration dialog box without perfor
171. ant GPS devices collect data points and then use the information to apply it to maps The data can be reprojected styled and scaled automatically when it is received The MAP GPS Panel is covered in this section Chapter 16 MAP GPS 201 MAP GPS Panel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP GPS Panel or MAP Toolbar 3 Start Stop Scanning Begins or ends scanning of the GPS device depending GPS Fix Displays the status of the GPS MAP GPS Panel x on the current state fix No Fix 2D or 3D will be displayed l T Start Scanning E _ Manual Plot Plots a single point at the Satellites In Use Displays the number GPS Fac No fix Dilution of Precision current location read from the GPS and of satellites which are currently being LE ae PDOP n a applies the manual plot settings from the tracked by the GPS device 3 Point Plot Settings dialog box HDOP n a Alttude n a s VDOP n a Altitude Displays the current altitude Postion n a Plot by Time Plots points at a specified in metres above mean sea level jio eter ag time interval which are reflected in the Point Plot Settings dialog box Position Displays the current position IO Map Units Meter of the GPS device in either Lat T Plot by Distance Plots points at a specified Long or UTM coordinate systems distance interval which are reflected in depending on the option selected Lat Long or Map Units Meter Dilution of Preci
172. apids cia retain both geographic and attribute information This makes 3 SRE 3 R 3 it very easy to produce high quality maps ESSA we Attribute information can be used in many powerful MAPublisher functions such as MAPublisher labelling engines MAP Stylesheets MAP Selections and MAP Web Author This section explains the principles of attribute information and how they are manipulated within MAPublisher Topics covered in this section are Attributes Foreword MAP Attributes Panel Edit Schema Expression Builder Find amp Replace Attributes Apply Expression Join Table Export Attributes 6740 x gno N M Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 75 Attributes Foreword ATTRIBUTE INFORMATION The attribute table that forms part of a GIS map file is one of the most important parts of the data set It is in the attribute table that we find important information such as street names for lines zoning or zip code numbers for areas and elevations for points to go along with our line area or point vector data Along with line area and point vector data imported as explained in the previous sections MAPublisher also imports the attribute data table associated with any vector map file that it supports MAP LAYERS Throughout this guide an Adobe Illustrator layer containing georeferencing and or attribute information will be referred to as a MAP Layer Each MAP Layer is symbolized in MAPublisher panels and dialog boxes with an ic
173. as been created along paths Drag this text to the new Adobe Illustrator layer Select Type Create Outlines The text will be converted to vector objects In the MAP Views panel drag this layer back into your MAP View specifying Area as the feature type You can now export your Text as Area objects Since the text is no longer text you can no longer modify the fonts We recommend that you make a copy of the original text objects before you do this process These hints on how to transfer Adobe Illustrator files are necessary because the graphics environment handles text and curves differently and they need some modification in order for the GIS software to represent these accurately WR Wr DOUGLAS PEUCKER LINE SIMPLIFICATION The Douglas Peucker algorithm was primarily designed to reduce the number of points required to represent a vector line A common problem in digital cartography and geographic information systems can occur when lines are generated automatically from a mathematical function which records points at a fixed interval regardless if they are all lying along a straight line A reduction of the number of points makes for a cleaner and more readable cartographic line As well in cartographic work within Adobe Illustrator the removal of points along a path can significantly improve the speed of file redraws and reduce the overall file size The Douglas Peucker Algorithm was created in Fortran 66 by David H Douglas and Thomas K Peuc
174. ase to the Windows font folder found from Control Panel gt Fonts Notably Myriad font is such a PostScript Type 1 font that is not installed on the Windows font folder by default Attributes consisting of Unicode characters must be labeled with a Unicode font that contains the appropriate characters For example attempting to label Japanese characters with an Arial font will result in an error or incorrect results 224 Chapter 18 MAP LabelPro MAPublisher LabelPro Styles LABEL LINE DATA WITH SYMBOLS MAPublisher LabelPro has the ability to place labels inside symbols A typical application of this would be numbered highway route shields To label lines with symbols check the Label with symbol check box to enable the symbol options Choose an appropriate symbol set from the Symbol File drop down list and select a symbol from the Symbol drop down list Use the Height option to change the size of the symbol in the Adobe Illustrator document unit e g inches or millimeters i Style Family Tr Arial z d z Size 15 00 pt tele Opacity Q 100 2 Label with symbol Enable this 7 Label with symbol check box to activate the symbology options Jj Symbol File generic shields lsf Symbol United Symbol file Choose a symbol file 1 Blue Interstate Shield or allow the symbol to be scaled sf that contains the desired Cirde automatically to fit the label s text set of symbols Empty High
175. ased on e Attribute Filters selections based on attributes and properties of MAP Layers Art Selections saved selections done with the MAP Selections filters or with the Adobe Illustrator selection functions e Spatial Selections selections based on a feature s position relative to another e g select points contained in a given area MAP Selections are saved in the Adobe Illustrator document The Import MAP Objects function see chapter 4 provides a method to exchange MAP Selections between documents opened in Adobe Illustrator Expressions created for Attribute Filter MAP Selections can be saved in the Expression Library to be re used in MAP Attributes and MAP Stylesheets expression builders see chapter 5 PREREQUISITES To save or use a MAP Selection at least one piece of art must be selected on the artboard before creating a new selection This selection does not have to be on a MAP layer although it must be visible and unlocked CREATE A MAP SELECTION To open the MAP Selections panel choose Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Selections or click the MAPublisher toolbar button P To create a new MAP Selection click the Create New MAP Selection button or the panel options menu to open the New MAP Selection dialog box Enter a meaningful Name for the new MAP Selection to facilitate its use For example a MAP Selection could be named Cities or Countries with 80 or higher literacy or US Highways Choose the desired MAP S
176. at all times When Layer list Check boxes toggle V Maier city names NS zoomed into the main map it shows layer visibility Only layers V Major cities Enc the zoom extent The zoom extent is checked under User Toggle are V Provinces interactive and can be used to pan shown in the layers list around the map PREREQUISITE Web tags must be first created using the Web Tag Dialog USING WEB EXPORT DIALOG In the MAP Web Author panel click the Export to Web button JA to access the Web Export Dialog The Web Export Dialog contains two tabs The Export Settings tab controls the export location layer options visibility toggability etc and the Flash map settings The Viewer Settings tab control the appearance and disposition of the Flash widgets WEB EXPORT DIALOG EXPORT SETTINGS In the Export Location box specify the directory that will store the HTML index file by default index html and Flash export files Click the Export button to complete the Web export Layer Controls To insert a layer list in the Flash map at least one layer check box under the User Toggle column must be checked Export Settings tab and the Show Layer List option must be enabled Viewer Settings tab Layers that are checked are included in the Flash map layer list and can be toggled on or off The layers that are unchecked are exported but can not be toggled on or off Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 191 Web Export Dialog Layer Export Opt
177. at labels Repeat labels along aline at specified amounts Allow overlapping labels Check this option to allow line labels to overlap with other labels in the same labeling session Allow overhang Labels are allowed to overhang the line up to a set percentage The percentage of overhang is relative to the start of the label and the end of the line Allow stacking Labels are allowed to stack to a maximum of two lines Allow Labels to Cross Lines Labels are allowed to cross line features and area boundaries Allow font reduction Automatically reduces the label size incrementally when necessary Each step shrinks the selected font by 0 5 pt Allow use of leader lines Incorporate the use of leader lines Allowed Line Crosses permits the number of lines the leader line will be allowed to cross Leader Width and Arrow Style adjusts the thickness and style of the leader line respectively Notes Text as obstacles will not work unless the Allow labels to cross lines option is disabled This is because text obstacles are treated as areas and not text Also text will only be avoided being placed where it intersects the outline of the shape and not within it Using the Placement option Vertical Split may require additional line smoothing straightening or simplifying 228 Chapter 18 MAP LabelPro MAPublisher LabelPro Rules POINT RULES The Point Rules dialog box contains the label configuration options for
178. ata once scanning and plotting is restarted If it is desired that a complete session log be created and saved which is not overwritten each time plotting is stopped and restarted use the Append option Chapter 16 MAP GPS 209 Record Sentence Log Playback Sentence Log Accessed from the MAP GPS menu Build Route A route will be created from the information in the log file using the selected Graphic style in the Adobe Illustrator panel n Playback GPS Sentence Log Log File Allows the user to specify the location where LogFile id Browse Coax the log file is located oe Build Route Auto Plot by Time Settings from the Point Plot settings panel will be used to interpret the log file and plot points at specified times Auto Plot by Time Auto Plot by Distance Auto Plot by Distance Settings from the Point Plot settings panel will be used to interpret the log file and plot points at specified distances FUNCTIONALITY The Playback Sentence Log feature allows for information contained in a log file to be re imported into an Adobe Illustrator document It is used in conjunction with the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel to create a series of points or a route in the document based upon data previously collected using MAP GPS Depending on the applied settings GPS sessions which have been previously recorded can be recreated in a new or existing document This feature may also b
179. atabases Single User Personal Geodatabases extension mdb and File Geodatabases extension gdb Multi User server based geodatabases also known as ArcSDE Geodatabases Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions mdb personal gdb file Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support No Ellipses Yes 3D Support Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support Yes Point Yes Enhanced Geometry Yes Line Yes Geometry Type Attribute geodb type Text Yes Encoding Support Yes Raster No Solid No Surface No Z value Yes A1 4 ESRI SHAPEFILE SHP The ESRI Shapefile is a geospatial vector data format for geographic information systems software It is developed and regulated by ESRI as a mostly open specification for data interoperability among ESRI and other software products A Shapefile is a digital vector storage format for storing geometric location and associated attribute information This format lacks the capacity to store topological information A single logical Shapefile consists of three physical files each with one of the following file name extensions shp Geometric data shx Index to the geometric data dbf Attributes for the geometric data These extensions are added to the base name of the Shapefile creating separate physical files that must
180. atabases Import ESRI Personal and File Geodatabases Create SQL Select Query Create SQL Select Query Operators Click an operator button to sect mon wee m E eJ ls Bj Ea including spaces to the query SQL Query Editor Type in an SELECT spot_elevation_point SHAPE FROM spot_elevation_point WHERE cance SQL query The SQL syntax ee ECE A Recent Opens the list of recent SQL must be compliant with statements see also MAPublisher the DBMS server in use Preferences on Spatial Database General One and one only Shape Spatial Database Editor chapter 1 field must be specified in TES lick e the SELECT clause Validate Click to verify the query syntax Select Feature Class or Attribute name Selection Select a feature Geodetic class name or attribute 4 Landform E and double click or click 4 E spot elevation point Add to Query to add it wa SHAPE EPIS Add to Query Add to Query Select a feature class name to the SQL Query Editor IE OBJECTID Object identifier or attribute and click this button to add above Attribute alias IE SUBTYPEID SubType identifier the item the SQL statement spt_ele_id names are indicated in t B sees Poy SOL parenthesis When creating a query it is necessary to specify a single SHAPE field in the select SUSU quer lause To specify multiple SQL queries separate them using a semicolon SELECT
181. ated rsf reference file When the newly created Illustrator file is opened with MAPublisher the reference file can be used to create a MAP View using this tool Note This feature is not compatible with CS3 Remove MAPublisher Information At the end of a project cycle it may be useful to permanently remove all georeferencing and attribute information in the current document This can be accomplished by switching all MAP Layer s to the Non MAP layers category in the MAP Views panel via drag and drop or clicking the Switch Map View button 8 and the Remove GIS data option Note This function should only be used as required and as a final step Be sure to save a copy of the document before performing this operation as this will erase all attribute data Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 63 MAP Views Panel Preview Pane Displays the data MAP View Editor MAP Views panel gt Edit MAP View New MAP View Advanced Import gt Create New gt Editor r Edit USA MAP View extents of the MAP View White rectangle Artboard extents Colour rectangle Data extents of the current MAP View Show Anchors Display or hide the Map and Page Anchors Crosshair Location of the current Map and Page Anchors Name Name of the MAP View Scale Edit the MAP View scale relative to the page Click Auto Scale to fit the data extents to the page extents Angle Editable rotat
182. ation t ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases are not supported on Mac OS due to limitations of the related ESRI libraries 42 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats Import and Export Supported Data Formats ESRI File Geodatabase gdb Import only A File Geodatabase is a native ESRI single user spatial database It is a collection of various types of GIS datasets held in a file system folder This is the recommended native data format for ArcGIS see chapter 19 relative to spatial databases for more information This function requires ArcGIS software and a valid license t ESRI File Geodatabases are not supported on Mac OS due to limitations of the related ESRI libraries ESRI Personal Geodatabase mdb Import only A Personal Geodatabase is a native ESRI single user spatial database This is the original data format for ArcGIS geodatabases stored and managed in Microsoft Access data files see chapter 19 relative to spatial databases for more information This function requires ArcGIS software and a valid license t ESRI Personal Geodatabases are not supported on Mac OS due to limitations of the related ESRI libraries DATA CONSIDERATIONS When obtaining GIS data for use with MAPublisher whether from an online source commercial vendor government office or from an internal source within your organization there are a number of important considerations to keep in mind First and foremost you should always endeavour to obtain data in on
183. ave a basic understanding of HTML syntax to use this feature MAPublisher 8 introduces the MAP Web Author tool that exports Adobe Illustrator documents with GIS attribute data to interactive Flash maps complete with callout bubbles rollovers layer control pan and zoom controls Like other MAPublisher functions MAP Web Author is completely built in to Adobe Illustrator Interactive Flash maps can be exported without any additional coding or software requirements Therefore users are not required to have Adobe Flash installed to benefit from this tool Flash map export offers controls for the layers visibility Additionally map features point line and area can be identified from the attribute information when users type a keyword in a search box Users with a good understanding of HTML CSS and Javascript will be able to customize maps to embed into any web page using the MAP Web Author API and CSS tools Topics covered in this section MAP Web Author Panel Web Tag Dialog Web Export Dialog MAP Web Author Workflow Advanced Features Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 181 MAP Web Author Panel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Web Author or MAP Toolbar TA MAP Web Author Panel Edit Opens the Web Tag Dialog Create or modify Web tags Specify Source Media Folder Specify Source Media Folder Specify the directory path to the media files Remove Delete Web tags of any selected objects Export Export
184. ave been set and the Label Settings have been specified click OK to label the selected features Labels applied using Label Features appear in the current default color font and font size as set by the selected character style If the destination text layer and source layer have the same attribute schema the attributes of the labeled features are copied as attributes to text features to apply MAP Stylesheets for example 140 Chapter 10 Labelling Functions Label Features MAP Tagger Tool Tools gt MAP Tagger Tool FUNCTIONALITY The MAP Tagger Tool allows labels to be added to your map based on the attribute data of the selected features for Line Point or Area MAP Layers This tool functions similarly to the Label Features function however labels are created interactively by clicking the features The MAP Tagger Tool provides greater control over the initial placement of the label The label is placed at the position of the mouse click and allows the creation of leader lines for labeling congested areas of the map PREREQUISITES Labels will be added to a 1 Text layer created using the MAP Views panel To create a new text layer use the Add MAP Layer function in the MAP View panel see chapter 4 Set the feature type to Text Toenable the copy the attributes from the source MAP layer to the label destination layer check the option Base attribute schema on and select the appropriate layer to copy its attribute schema
185. avigation buttons zoom slider search bar and callout bubbles Each control can be styled and positioned by adjusting basic property values Users can export with the default values without further adjustment If any control properties are changed from the default values a custom CSS file is exported to the export data folder Note The controls in the Viewer Style list contain only basic properties for more advanced designs an external CSS file should be used see below Map viewer controls and properties in the Viewer Styles list are as follows all positions are relative to the top left corner of the Flash map Pan Up Button Top Left Position of the pan up button Pan Down Button Top Left Position of the pan down button Pan Left Button Top Left Position of the pan left button Pan Right Button Top Left Position of the pan right button Pan Home Button Top Left Position of the pan home button Zoom In Button Top Left Position of the zoom in button Zoom Out Button Top Left Position of the zoom out button Zoom Slider Top Left Position of the zoom slider widget Click Callout Bubble Corner Radius Show Arrow Drop Shadow Fill Colors Start Fill Colors End style of a callout bubble when it is clicked Hover Callout Bubble Corner Radius Show Arrow Drop Shadow Fill Colors Start Fill Colors End style of a callout bubble when it is hovered over DropShadowAngle here 45
186. bels are allowed to be V Allow stacking G maximum of two three placed horizontally inside e V Allow horizontal inside Ciy Pak Alignment Li or four lines Choose the polygon Alignment option Feature F Allow dominant Left Center or Right Allow dominant angle Labels As She are allowed to be placed e F Allow extending beyond New City Pack fifi ice Ee to creas lora parallel to the dominant boundary Allow labels to cross lines angle of the polygon Labels are allowed to cross j oid ol ca dica line features and area boundaries Allow extending beyond boundary Ali ide along Labels are allowed to exceed boundary the boundaries of the V Allow font reduction polygon being labeled 4 pA Steps E Allow use of leader lines Each step allows LabelPro to shrink the A Allow outside Labels are Allowed Line Crosses 3 selected font by 0 5 pt if necessary allowed to be placed outside the polygon being labeled Allow font reduction Automatically reduces the label size incrementally when necessary Each step shrinks the selected font by 0 5 pt Leader Width E Allow overlapping labels Arrow Style S Allow inside along boundary Faas i Labels are allowed to be be placed inside the polygon following the polygon boundary Allow overlapping labels Area Labels are allowed to overlap other labels in the same labeling se
187. bsequently resized using the bounding box of the grid and can be edited by clicking the Adobe Illustrator menu Object gt Edit Grid Edit Graticules PREREQUISITES Grids and Graticules are added on Ol Legend layers If no legend layer is present in the document a new legend layer will be created automatically To manually create a new Legend layer use the Add MAP Layer button on the MAP View panel and specify the feature type as Legend see chapter 4 for more details Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 165 Grids and Graticules By default MAPublisher uses the Normal Character Style when generating grid labels If custom character styles are to be used for the labels they should be created beforehand Window gt Type gt Character Styles A default grid line style will also be used To use an alternate style for the grid lines create or add the desired style to the Adobe Illustrator Graphic Styles panel prior to accessing the Grids and Graticules function The MAP View must have a coordinate system assigned in order to plot a grid Graticules and Index Grids can be generated for any coordinate system Measured Grids cannot be generated for geodetic coordinate systems To access the function select the legend layer and navigate to Object gt MAPublisher gt Grids and Graticules or MAPublisher toolbar button HB J INDEX GRIDS The Index Grid option divides the grid extents based on a specified number of cells or by entering a cell size
188. bute e00 type Donut Polygon Yes Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes There are essentially four types of geometry defined in E00 files which will be reproduced as layers during import Arcs lines Points Polygons and Text Prior to the import process an additional Setting can be made Tic points layer This option enables you to include an additional layer which will hold the registration points for the imported data The default is to set to Yes A1 3 ESRI ARCINFO GENERATE GEN ESRI simple ASCII storage and interchange format There are three different types of gen files each with of its own syntax one for points one for lines and one for text geometries This is the format exported by ArcInfo generate command The gen files are use by ArcInfo to transfer coverages to other mapping systems Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions gen Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes No Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support No Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon No Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon No Geometry Type Attribute arcgen geometry Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes ESRI GEODATABASES A Geodatabase is a native ESRI ArcGIS data format for storing geographic data It is a collection of geographic datasets of various types used in ArcGIS and managed in either a file folder or a relational database There are two main types of geod
189. butes panel For example if the attribute is named MALE POP enter MALE_POP key2 Legend for the second value You can enter a text of your choice in between sign For example Female Population attrib2 Attribute that contains the second numerical value for the graph as found in the MAP Attributes panel For example if the attribute is named FEMALE POP enter FEMALE_POP colors enter a list of colors for the chart first color second color etc The color values must be entered in hexadecimal values For example use the Adobe Illustrator Color Picker and select color the hex value below the B of RGB However Illustrator writes the color as BC1E1E but in MAP Web Author the sign by Ox zero x replaces the so OxBC1E1E must be entered width and height Size of the graph in pixels Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Web Tag Dialog Advanced HTML tag combinations can be used to create more effects For more information and a complete list of HTML tags supported by Adobe Flash click the link on the Web Tag dialog box or go to http livedocs adobe com flash 9 0 main wwhelp wwhimpl common html wwhelp htm context LiveDocs_Parts amp file 00000922 html Auto Size Option When this option is used the callout bubble automatically resizes to fit its contents Trigger External URL The Trigger External URL options allow an advanced Web designer to load a specified HTML document designated by its URL address into a targe
190. button and your search results will be populated Matching MAP View Automatically opens if there is already a coordinate system in your document which matches the incoming data P Matching MAP View Found Add to Add the incoming data file to a 4 matching MAP View Fitto page based on new MAP View Create a new MAP View for the imported data Existing data and incoming data will be treated separately in terms of page scaling and position Addto worldeast Destination MAP View Your data matches one or more MAP Views found in the document Please select a destination MAP View 7 Resize MAP View to fit Fit to page based on new MAP View Ca r MAP View list Select the matching coordinate system that you wish to align the incoming data to Resize MAP View to fit Check this box to rescale the matching data so that both the selected layer and the incoming data fit inside the page extents IMPORT SETTINGS AutoCA r Hatches Check this box to read the hatch pattern on import D DXF DWG Settings Settings te V Read hatches Group Entities By Group entities by layer name or geometry White Lines and Fills Set the option Import as is import the data true to the original colour settings contained in the file Change white lines and fills to black Delimited Text Data Settings Coordinate Format
191. by unique attribute value method is selected choose an attribute name from the Attribute drop down list Each new layer created will contain only art that share the same attribute value By default the name of these layers correspond to each single attribute value In the Destination frame users can enter a prefix to be prepended to every layer name For both methods the Copy attribute schema option controls if attributes are copied from the source layer to the destination layer s or not RESULTS When Split Layer is run a message is displayed that indicates the number of layers that will be created Click No to cancel the split layer function or Yes to continue This will create 3 layer s Are you sure you want to continue asi Depending on the method chosen one or more new layer s are created according to the splitting criteria The new layers are placed on the top of the layers hierarchy in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel The new layers have the same feature type as the source MAP layer and are included in the same MAP View If the Copy attribute schema was enabled the new layers contain the same attributes as the source layer 154 Chapter 11 MAP Selections and Operations Split Layer Working With Images MAPublisher contains tools for working with georeferenced raster images such as aerial photography and satellite imagery The Register Image filter accurately registers raster images with georeferencing
192. cale 7 Display units to right of last interval label be subdivided value above or below the bar Z Display page to map units ratio Add interval left of zero Display units Check this option to Page units for c Check this box to have an interval display the interval unit placed on the scale bar to the left of the zero mark Display page to map units ratio Check this option to show the scale as page unit to map unit ratio selectable from cm mm or inch Specify the Precision and Placement t if the Text style list does not contain a recently created character style simply return to the Character Style panel double click this style and click OK in the Character Style Options dialog box This forces Adobe Illustrator to re load the list of character styles FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher contains ten different scale bar designs that may be incorporated into a map After creation MAPublisher scale bars can be subsequently resized via a bounding box for example to add or remove component intervals Scale bars can also be edited by selecting the Object Edit Scale Bar menu item PREREQUISITES To accurately create a scale bar a MAP View must contain accurate georeferencing information and the coordinate system must be projected i e not in degrees Scale bars are added on IO Legend layers If no legend layer is present in the document a new legend layer will be created au
193. caling If none of the rules specified in the panel can be satisfied MAPublisher will default to placing the label centered over the area In situations with compound areas MAPublisher labels the largest area in the compound Point Labels Click the Point Labels button to assign MAPublisher Point Label Settings If the Labels curve with lines of latitude option is selected MAPublisher creates a path that conforms to local lines of latitude and places the text along it If this option is not selected the labels are placed horizontally This option is enabled only for MAP Views set with a projected coordinate system Adjust the Label Position by specifying relative position of the labels to the point Nine options for the text anchor placement are listed Chapter 10 Labelling Functions 139 Label Features Special Point Labels Sounding Style Labels The Use sounding style labels option is specific for users wishing to label point symbols marking measured water depth positions These types of labels are officially known as Charted Soundings and its representation on official navigational charts are ruled by international standards The aspect of the soundings is always according to the following rule Numerals representing the decimetre part of a sounding should be visibly smaller than those representing whole metres and positioned slightly lower than the latter subscript Zero decimetre values must not be shown For example 12 9 N
194. can be quickly added by dragging artwork from the artboard and dropping it into the panel A great source of styles come from custom symbol libraries As an example choose Window gt Graphic Style Libraries gt Other Library navigate to the Helpful Styles amp Symbols Files folder see Appendix 4 on the MAPublisher DVD and load either MAP_AreaStyles ai or MAP_LineStyles ai Select several styles and drag them into the Graphic Styles panel They will be available for use in Area and Line Stylesheets Another option is to navigate to Window gt Symbol Libraries gt Other Library and load MAP_PointSymbols ai Select several styles and drag them into the Symbols panel for use in Point Stylesheets Note An Adobe Illustrator file saves all the symbols graphic styles and character styles created Create a master file with often used symbols graphic styles and character styles for easy reference when adding these elements for MAP Stylesheet creation Create New Stylesheets To create a new MAP Stylesheet click the New MAP Stylesheet button at the base of the panel Alternatively choose New MAP Stylesheet from the panel options menu This opens the New Stylesheet dialog box where the name and feature type for a new MAP Stylesheet is specified A new MAP Stylesheet appears in the list of stylesheets It is now possible to drag single or multiple MAP Layers with a matching feature type into the stylesheet Note Layers do not need to contain t
195. case sensitive Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 187 Web Tag Dialog Tag button Tag Function HTML tag example Result 5 Bold lt b gt bold text lt b gt bold text Italic lt i gt italic text lt i gt italic text Hyperlink lt a href http ww avenza com gt Avenza Page lt a gt Avenza Page a Line Break line lt br gt break break line lt ul gt list 1 f lt li gt list 1 lt li gt 3 Unordered List Bis list 2e list 2 ul Insert Image img src ImageFile Canada png 9 g g png keyi 88 88 chart type pie showLegend true amp values key1 attrib1 key2 Pie chart attrib2 colors Oxff0000 Ox00ff00 width 180 height 180 gt B keys key2 chart type horizontalbar showLegend true eyz H showAxisValues true values keyl1 Horizontal bar chart attrib1 key2 attrib2 key1 E colors 0xff0000 OxOOffOO width 180 m height 180 gt 0 30 60 a chart type verticalbar showLegend true B verts showAxisValues true values keyl Vertical bar chart Yattrib1 key2 attrib2 p colors 0xff0000 OxOOff00 width 180 height 180 gt keys Additional information for pie and bar charts 188 key1 Legend for the first value Enter a text in between single quotes For example Table Title attrib1 Attribute that contains the first numerical value for the graph as found in the MAP Attri
196. ce data MAP Layers that have layer notes attached to them are indicated with the icon MAP Layers with no layer notes are marked with Layer notes can be automatically added when the layers are created through MAPublisher functions e g MAP Data Import Plot Centroids etc To do so enable the MAPublisher General Preferences option Add notes for layers created by MAPublisher operations see chapter 1 for details The automatic notes show the function and parameters used to create it For example a note of a layer created by import indicates the path of the source data format date etc To add or edit a layer note choose the MAP Views panel options menu Edit Layer Note In the Add Edit Layer Note dialog box type new text or edit the existing information Click the Clear button to clear the layer s note Edit Layer Note Created by Import Dataset C Users Public Documents Avenza MAPublisher 8 Quick Start Guide amp Data Quick Start Data Vector Files Projected Data Roads tab Format MapInfo TAB Encoding UTF 8 Coordinate system NAD83 UTM zone 10N Feature count 194 Created on 20 04 2010 9 22 11 AM ik Last updated on 20 04 2010 9 22 11 AM 62 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP Views Panel Export MAP Views and MAP Layers The MAP Views panel offers the option to export a single MAP View eo or a single MAP Layer age X to a multitude of GIS formats This functio
197. cece eee eee eee Record Sentence Log cece eee c cece eee c teen eee Playback Sentence LOg ce cece cence eee cnet e eee Export Geospatial PDF MAP Geospatial PDF Export cece cece eee e ene eeeeeeee View MAP Geospatial PDF 0 cece cece e cence eee e eee MAPublisher LabelPro MAP LabelPtO 4 5552 een EE CU EUER dengue RI Rd ge MAPublisher LabelPro Settings ssselesee esee MAPublisher LabelPro Styles ceeeeee cence eee eeeees MAPublisher LabelPro Rules ece cee ee cece eee eeeeee Label VerifiCatiOns non aiewsdeyedsaemectsaussseaeanabevane ees MAPublisher Spatial Database OVerVieW bc oy RESORT RN EUEPC EV SERES EI DIR PER Import ESRI Personal and File Geodatabases Le Import ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases isses eee e ences Import from Basic ESRI ArcSDE server slsssss esses Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files Contents vii Introduction MAPublisher 8 is the newest version of a powerful suite of plug ins for Adobe Illustrator C 3 CS4 CS5 that bridges the gap between geographic information systems GIS and high end graphic design software in order to facilitate the map creation process MAPublisher 8 offers additional panels functions tools and filters to the powerful Adobe Illustrator
198. ces MAPUBLISHER PREFERENCES SETTINGS Clicking one of the MAPublisher category or sub categories on the left hand list displays the corresponding property sheet displayed on the right Expression Builder Preferences The Expression Builder property sheet shows the settings relative to the Expression Builder dialog box used with the MAP Attributes MAP Stylesheets and MAP Selection Filters panels see chapter 5 for more information MAPublisher Preferences foo Expression Builder I General Import Map Data 4 E MAP Attributes E Panel QY MAP LabelPro a MAP Location T Panel MAP Measurement General Preferences Expression Builder Maximum unique values 1000 l Cis Maximum unique values Set the maximum number of unique values visible in the Expression Builder Expression Components gt Description The default value is 1000 users with high performance computers can increase this number The General property sheet is used to change the layer ordering rule for all MAPublisher panels By default layers are sorted alphabetically only The other option is to first group layers by data type first Legend Text Point Line and Area and subsequently in alphabetical order for each group MAPublisher Preferences fe Expression Builder 2 General Import Map Data MAP Attributes f MAP LabelPro l MAP Location MAP Measurement Locale Use system locale Englis
199. cified for the coordinate system click the Specify button to specify it In the Specify Source Coordinate System dialog box coordinate systems are separated into categories geodetic or projected to ease the process of choosing a coordinate system under the Coordinate System category All will list all the coordinate systems in the database For an overview of Geodetic and Projected systems and Datums see appendix A2 To view the parameters of a certain coordinate system click the Info button Character Encoding Extended and international character sets are supported as attributes on import To assign a character codec suitable for your selected dataset choose the appropriate value from the list box Format Specific Settings Certain file formats offer additional configuration parameters which can be accessed by clicking the Settings button These file formats are ESRI Interchange File ESRI Geodatabases ArcSDE File and Personal CAD DWG DXF MicroStation DGN MapInfo MIF MID MapInfo TAB KML KMZ Delimited Text Data and GML After selecting a file if the format accepts additional settings the Settings button will be enabled See the import settings at the beginning of this chapter for an overview of the meanings of these options Additional Settings are mandatory only for importing Delimited Text Data Delimited Text Data Settings MAPublisher also allows for the import of delimited text files as point data provided they contain coo
200. ck Atlas XYZ Digital Map Co Ltd Glasgow and Edinburgh Scotland Riga Address Atlas Jana Seta Map Publishers Ltd Riga Latvia e Southeast Zeeland Bike Map ANWB The Netherlands Chugach State Park Imus Geographics Eugene OR USA Greater Philadelphia Regional Bicycle Map Steve Spindler Cartography Jenkintown PA USA Tasman Map Tasmanian Government Dept Primary Industries Water and Environment Hobart Tasmania Australia Recreation and Historical Sites on Public Lands of Arizona Arizona Office of Tourism Phoenix AZ USA A Mosaic of Space Time and Order The Portland Oregon Super Region Metro Regional Services Portland OR USA Griffith Park Brochure Cartifact Los Angeles CA USA Road Map Hapax Aosta Italy Mornington Peninsula Info Map Meridian Maps South Caulfield Victoria Australia MAPublisher 8 User Guide for Adobe Illustrator v8 3 May 2010 Printed in Canada 2010 Avenza Systems Inc MaRviisher 8 for Adobe Illustrator When Map Quality Matters User Guide Avenza SYSTEMS ING Welcome Avenza welcomes you to map making in the 21st century Combined with Adobe Illustrator MAPublisher has revolutionized the art of map making by allowing spatial data files to be used to create maps inside a vector graphics program MAPublisher allows all cartographic tasks to be performed where they should be done in a powerful graphics environment This manual assumes that the
201. cromedia com support documentation en flashplayer help settings_manager04 html arama ere 1 Click Edit Locations reperiri a 2 Click Add Location Some websites may access information from other sites using an older system of security This is usually harmless but t is possible that some Stes could obtain unauthorized information using the older system Whena website attempts to use the older system to access information Click Browse For Folder or copy the full path as written in the Web Export Log dialog box and click Confirm Always ask Always allow O Q Always deny eS tn unn NUN EM The folder is added to the list of trusted locations Locations Add location can be modified or deleted at a later time Delete all locations Trust this location Export Flash Browse for fies Browse for fower Confirm Cancel Note You must be connected to the Internet in order to set these permissions View Flash Map To view the exported Flash map browse to the Flash export folder as specified in the Web Export Dialog and open the file index html or name specified in Export Location in a Web browser Check that the Web browser has the latest version of Flash Player installed http www adobe com products flashplayer An outdated version may cause the Flash map to display incorrectly Note Depending on the security settings of the Web browser used some wa
202. ction is available as an optional add on to MAPublisher 8 1 and higher Export to Geospatial PDF Export map data to a geospatially enabled PDF In this process all objects and associated MAP Attributes information when available are ported to PDF while also maintaining the map coordinate system When a geospatial PDF is opened with Adobe Acrobat Reader 9 one can find locations measure distances add location markers as well as copy coordinates to the clipboard Additionally objects can be selected and queried and their MAP Attributes can be viewed in the Adobe Acrobat Model Tree MAPublisher Panels MAPublisher panels seamlessly integrate into the user interface and can be resized moved and docked just like native Adobe Illustrator panels MAPublisher Toolbar The MAPublisher Toolbar allows you to easily launch all the main MAPublisher tools with a single click MAP Vector Crop Tool Crop map documents only to the area of interest by drawing a box around an area of inteterest Easily remove unwanted data while preserving attributes and styles Perfect for creating inset maps MAPublisher Preferences The new MAPublisher Preferences allow users to fully customize their MAPublisher experience Control everything from the way layers are sorted to the font used to display attribute data or style of the MAP Selection Filters panel This includes several previously hidden options that used to be the domain of advanced users MAPublisher
203. d Horizontal Datums amp Gon Gon 1 1111111111111 9106 only parameters default P Linear Units amp Grad Grad 1 1111111111111 grads 9105 Geodetic Objects See list amp Prime Meridians f Microradian Microradian 17453 292519943 9109 ones above 4 Mi 6400 Mil 6400 17 777777777778 9114 amp Minute Minute 3437 7467707849 minute die nedan Radian Warning Icon Indicates Add Remove Add and s m incomplete parameters ps m a remove folders and Ta eem e Edits Add remove edit categories E cc d information or copy Search objects Search Search parameters Folder Angular Units Each category can be Find in Name DIA searched by it s unique parameters e g Name EPSG Code Search Folder Projected Lind in Name Horizontal Datum Point Style Units Projection Type Projection Name Envelope EPSG Code All At the top of the Edit Custom Coordinate Systems dialog box two paths are be listed the path to the main Geodetic Datasource file which is protected from user modification and the Custom parameter file where all of the user defined definitions are stored On the left hand side of the dialog box objects are organized into object type categories with sub folders organized in a tree To explore the sub folders of a category click the plus sign Windows or arrow Mac OS to the left to see categories listed underneath Click a sub folder name to list the conta
204. d GeoTIFF image is to open it in a spatial imaging software application such as Avenza Geographic Imager Unlike the other geographically referenced image formats discussed in this section GeoTIFFs do not require a separate reference file When registering a GeoTIFF image in MAPublisher the same file name must be selected in the Load File dialog box the required georeference information is contained in the file header Supported projections when saving the coordinate system are listed below Albers Equal Area Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area Polar Stereographic Cassini Soldner Cassini Lambert Conic Conformal 1SP Polyconic Cylindrical Equal Area Lambert Conic Conformal 2SP Robinson Equidistant Conic Lambert Cylindrical Equal Area Sinusoidal Equidistant Cylindrical Mercator Stereographic Equirectangular Miller Cylindrical Transverse Mercator Gnomonic New Zealand Map Grid Transverse Mercator South Oriented Hotine Oblique Mercator Oblique Mercator VanDerGrinten Laborde Oblique Mercator Oblique Stereographic Orthographic 160 Chapter 12 Working With Images Register Image Export Image Object gt MAPublisher gt Export Image or MAP Toolbar E S Export Image Georeference Type World file TFW X Georeference Type Select the output format for the georeferencing information for the selected image Save As Choose a destination name and directory for the exported image Note The exported file
205. d in a directory chosen by the user These files can then be exchanged between computers Custom xml and xvw files are loaded into MAPublisher through the MAP Views panel options menu Load Custom Coordinate Systems Note Please ensure that where the custom xml is saved there is a copy of the geocalc xsd in the same folder as this will be needed to load the file geocalc xsd is located in the Data Source Files folder A2 6 WORKING WITH GEODETIC DATASOURCE OBJECTS Creating or editing objects will prompt the object s editor dialog box each editor contains two tabs dentification and Definition tabs The Identification tab of the editor is used to name the object and associate identifying codes with it if applicable The Name text box contains the definition name to be used to select the object in the main list The Remarks text box is used to add notes and is optional In the dentifiers list identifying codes may be added for the object e g reference to other databases The GC code is a unique identifier assigned by MAPublisher and must not be altered To enter additional codes use the spaces below This tab is identical for all object types Projected Coordinate System Viewer Identification Definition D e EDSO France EuroLambert Code EDSO EuroLambert EPSG 2192 GC 2192 9 Geodetic Datasource object Identification tab The Definition tab is used to def
206. d to select a MAP Layer type of Area Line or Point so that the image can be moved and scale with the MAP View transforming an image is not supported on any layer type When creating a new MAP View the MAP View s anchor point and scale are derived from the registration information placement and image size In the case of GeoTIFF images the MAP View s coordinate system is automatically read from the image header for other image formats the coordinate system has to be specified manually in the MAP View Editor after the registration process see chapter 4 for more information on Specify coordinate system Chapter 12 Working With Images 157 Register Image Registration using Reference File To register an image using a reference file click the Load File button and navigate to the folder containing the file The reference file may have the same name as the image but may have a different extension rp tfw tab rsf ers or Igo In the case of the GeoTIFF format the image file itself contains both the image and reference data and the needs to be chosen to retrieve the georeferencing information The values contained in this reference file are automatically entered into the image parameters If the file is in GeoTIFF format the image coordinate system is read and displayed under Reference File Coordinate System for other file formats the coordinate system is left as unknown Manual Registration To manually enter image paramet
207. de Columns Show All o Zoom e pan us Show Hide Columns gt Show All Except Properties ee occ oom SEVE VENEN enabied Hide All Edit Schema locks the zoom level Resize column to fit content TES Resizes only the selected M os hehe Add Calculated Data Add or edit columns IS Name Join Table an attribute column s with ian M AreaDirection Add Calculated Data calculated data Resize all to fit content TD VertexCount ibutes e Resize the width of all columns 5 sstye Sasin kter edi all P to fit the longest value JE sStrokeWeight Preferences se ected attri ute information to a delimited text file IR Perimeter B PathClosed Preferences Opens the MAP Attributes panel preferences FUNCTIONALITY Gee chapter The MAP Attributes panel displays the map attribute and property attribute records for a map layer which are linked to the graphic elements of the map and makes them available for editing This panel is also the hub from which you can edit column schemas toggle visibility add or delete columns join tables find and replace attributes and apply expressions to selected art Only the visible attributes of selected map features will be displayed in the dialog box USING THE MAP ATTRIBUTES PANEL Viewing Attributes Selected features are sorted by layer The Layer drop down list shows all the layers that currently have features selected as well as th
208. degrees Provided you have a fully specified MAP View and know the coordinates coordinate system and unit can be specified for the locations you wish to plot you can use the MAPublisher Point Plotter to have your points automatically added at their correct locations Topics covered in this section MAP Point Plotter Plot Centroids Chapter 6 Plotting Points 99 MAP Point Plotter Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Point Plotter and MAPublisher Toolbar J Current Layer Displays the selected layer name and coordinate system Input Coordinate System Specify the Plot Centroids reference coordinate system in which the point coordinates are entered Scale Change the size of the chosen symbol if required The arrow keys will increase or decrease the scale value by Use the current layer s coordinate system or specify a different one by default WGS84 lat long format 1096 increments Click the Select button to open the Input Coordinate System Select Coordinate System dialog box and Symbol Style Choose a symbol to use choose any coordinate system _ Use Current Layer s coordinate system Click the symbol name to open the list of symbols to choose from Use WGS 84 Select Coordinates Enter point coordinates in Select a symbol MAP units or in a different choice of Coordinates coordinate system MAP Symbol 15 2 mr x r MAP bol 16 oma e
209. dex is created for every grid cell in which the labeled feature can be found Make index based on feature position and attribute value An index location is added for each feature found on the selected label Feature layer The index label will be the value of the selected Attribute for each feature Sort index by Choose to sort the entries in the index file by either Feature label or Grid cell address Specify Index Separator Select a delimiter to separate the different elements of the index file label attribute grid column grid row continuous spanning discreet spanning and next in the list Choices are reflected in Sample Indexes Treat grouped text as single entry Select this option to create a single index for grouped text Output Format Single line condensed Creates one index 1 entry for each unique label The index is compressed in the format A1 3 B2 4 Single line expanded Creates one index entry for each unique label The index is in the format A1 A2 A3 B2 B3 Multiline Creates one index per label recurrence 170 Make Index Make Index Object gt MAPublisher gt Make Index or MAP Toolbar A 1 Make Index um Make index based on label position Save As N ee Label layer IT States Names E Cancel Semena Make index based on label and matching feature position Advanced Advanced Click this button to open OM Label layer lll States Nam
210. dexed and or the Feature layer must be located in the same MAP View as the grid USING MAKE INDEX To access the Make Index tool click the menu Object gt MAPublisher gt Make Index or MAPublisher Toolbar button A I e Ifa grid is selected when Make Index is accessed this grid will be used as the index reference fno grid is selected Make Index will detect the grid in the document If more than one grid is found a Select Index Grid dialog opens Click the Previous Grid or Next Grid buttons to browse through the document s grids the current grid is highlighted on the artboard Click OK to finalize the selection Select Index Grid More than one grid was detected please select the grid Ccok you wish to use for this Index Cancel MAP View Lower 48 emmixxzicmue Layer grid lt lt Previous Grid Next Grid gt gt Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 171 Make Index Index Based on Label Position This method creates an index by assigning one index location for each label found on the selected text layer For example if the label High Street is only found in grid cell A4 the only entry for High Street in the index file would be as follows High Street A4 Select the Make index based on label position button to generate an index using this method Then choose the layer containing the text to be indexed from the Label layer drop down list Index Based on Label and Matching Feature Position This meth
211. dified through the Adobe Illustrator menu File gt Document Setup prior to Web export Note Changing the document size after artwork is created may result in the adjustment of MAP View Scale symbol and text sizes as well as stroke widths d Use attribute table information for callouts To use attribute information for Web tags it must be organized using the MAPublisher MAP Attributes panel This may require creating new attribute columns for elements such as Website links or graphic file paths e Data preparation Run the crop tool simplify lines and remove unneeded attributes 3 USING MAP WEB AUTHOR a Setup the Source Media Folder Users have a choice between entering an absolute or relative path for the Source Media Folder Example Absolute path C Work Flash_Project lmages Relative path Images Note Ifan image is placed under C Work Flash_Project lmages Mylmage Mylmage1 jpg and the Source Media Folder is C Work Flash_Project lmages then the path Mylmage Mylmage1 jpg must be typed in the Web Tag Dialog or in the MAP Attributes panel when using attributes Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 197 MAP Web Author Workflow b Create callout bubbles Using the Web Tag Dialog insert content such as a title images and text into the callout bubbles Use the Callout Preview to see an example of how the callout bubble will look prior to the export process 4 EXPORT FLASH DOCUMENTS The settings entered in the Web Export Dialo
212. dinates are entered as eastings and northings the coordinate type will be EN and units will be meters or occasionally feet If you are using latitude and longitude the projection is Geodetic coordinate type will be LL and the X and Y dimensions for the cell size will be in decimal degrees ER Mapper files support storing a limited number of pre defined coordinate systems Check the coordinate system details to ensure the ER Mapper identifier exists as the issuer for the coordinate system to be saved The file will still be exported however the coordinate system will not be saved with the reference file Note ER Mapper reference files do not support rotated images When attempting to export a reference file with a rotated image ER Mapper will not be listed ListGeo file lgo A ListGeo files are text files containing the GeoTIFF metadata information or tags which can then be read and may also be used as input to other programs GeoTIFF File tif tiff Tagged Image File Format TIFF or TIF is a common raster graphic file format and one of the most common geospatial image formats you are likely to come across Many raster geographic images from GIS systems are stored in this format A GeoTIFF is a TIFF file with embedded geographic information such as position and scale in world coordinates coordinate system or an explicit list of ground control points Note The only way to differentiate a regular TIFF image from a reference
213. document is closed They correspond to expressions recently typed in the Expression Builder from the MAP Attributes panel or MAP Stylesheets panel but were not saved as a Named Expression To delete a recent expression select it in the Expression Library dialog box and click the Delete button Note In the MAP Attributes panel expressions are saved in the recent list only when the Edit Schema dialog box is closed Named Expressions Expressions entered in the Expression Builder can be saved as a Named Expression by clicking the Save button Unlike the Recent expressions named expressions are saved within the Adobe Illustrator document They are listed in the Named Expressions tab of the Expression Library To delete a named expression select it in the Expression Library dialog box and click the Delete button Attribute Filter Expressions The Attribute Filter tab of the library lists the expressions in use in the MAP Selections of type Attribute Filter See details on the MAP Selections panel in chapter 11 Attribute Filter expressions cannot be deleted from the Expression Library Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 89 Expression Builder Find amp Replace Attributes MAP Attributes panel gt Find amp Replace Find and Replace Find Replace Choose to Find variables or to Find p and Replace variables simultaneously i Re Find Next Move to the next value matching the Find what Enter a variab
214. does can be reduced since they ALL reside in memory Use polylined or pre joined linear feature data sets where available In your GIS application strip out the attributes you won t be using for queries or labelling before importing the data into Adobe Illustrator You can set a primary and secondary scratch disk under the Adobe Illustrator preferences option in order to draw additional storage from a partitioned or multi drive environment Turn off the layer preview icon that appears to the left of each layer name in the Adobe Illustrator layers panel This can be done by clicking the options menu in the layers panel and then selecting small panel rows in the panel option dialog box A1 19 Online Links For Geographic Information System GIS users the appeal of graphics is strong and the increasing ability to discover and share GIS across the Internet is fascinating The Internet offers a large number of free access GIS related web sites from which you can access map and information data sets For the general public there s general information about countries states and places simple maps of areas e 9 GIF PS format lists and maps of Internet resources in an area For cartographers and geography researchers there are cartographic GIS base map files e g USGS Demos DLGs TIGER thematic data of a geographic nature e g census data and complete GIS data sets e g ESRI Interchange Files To find some information on the
215. e Opens the Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server browser Edit If a connection is selected opens the Edit Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server connection dialog box If a MAP Dataset is selected opens the Edit Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server MAP Dataset dialog box Copy Copies the selected connection Delete Deletes the selected connection or MAP Dataset Version Enter the transaction version information provided by the database administrator Unlike ArcSDE Geodatabases the ArcSDE server interface does not list the versions existing in the database If ArcReader is not installed in the default installation directory it may be necessary to edit the binary location in the MAPublisher Preferences gt Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Editor see chapter 1 244 Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases Import from Basic ESRI ArcSDE server FUNCTIONALITY Users who do not have an ArcGIS license can install the free ESRI desktop application called ArcReader see ESRI Website for information www esri com File and Personal Geodatabases cannot be read and the access to files with Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server connections is limited compared to the ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabase connections A Aliases sub types and attribute domains are not supported only true names and actual values codes are imported A Feature datasets are not recognized Feature classes are all listed on the same level they are not grouped by feature dataset Operating System Aut
216. e Filters that are set to use current layer may become invalid when a different layer is selected because its attribute schema may not match the expression There are four methods for applying a MAP Selection available as buttons and menu items Applyas New Selection Clears the current selection and selects any art on the current layer that meets the criteria of the chosen selection filter s AddtoCurrent Selection Adds any art on the current layer that satisfies the chosen selection filter s to the current selection Remove from Current Selection Deselects any art on the current layer that is selected and satisfies the chosen selection filter s GetSubset of Current Selection Deselects any art on the current layer that is selected and does not satisfy the chosen selection filter s Note These selection combinations can themselves be saved as an Art Selection 152 Chapter 11 MAP Selections and Operations MAP Selections Split Layer Object gt MAPublisher gt Split Layer or MAP Toolbar age Split Layer Source Layer Indicates the currently selected layer e Source Layer I usroads line OK coma Split art by expression Choose this method to p create a new layer from objects that satisfy the Action Select the option to copy or move objects Action f specified expression from the source layer to the destination layer 9 Copy art to destination layer E TEE Ib Expression
217. e Size 1260 by 907 pixels 1Pixel X 3 7032022167 m i C Y 3 7032022167 m 7 Constrain Proportions Effective Map Size e X 4666 034793042 m Y 3358 8044105469 m Reference File Coordinate System NAD83 UTM zone 10N Undefined Layer This dialog box appears if the image to register is not placed on a MAP Layer Undefined Layer Image Please specify the destination MAPView for the image layer 9 Create new MAP View MAP View for the image or choose an existing MAP View cnet _ Add to enising MP View O Asia cones Feature type Choose an Area Line or Point feature type However the feature type is indifferent if the layer contains only the image FUNCTIONALITY e Feature type I Area z Advanced e schema on Placement X Y Specify the coordinates in map units of the selected corner of the raster image Load File Choose a file containing the georeference information for the selected raster image The information from the file will be inserted into the appropriate fields Coordinate System Indicates the coordinate system of the loaded file for GeoTIFF images Set to unknown by default Units Select a unit to use for the specification of georeferencing information The default selection is the current map unit Base Attribute Schema Check this option to copy the attribut
218. e application interface Example The Abbreviation for metres is m A2 10 Linear Unit Editor E3 Identification Definition Abbreviation brealey Units Per Meter 0 0026666666666667 Linear Unit Editor Prime Meridians For Prime Meridians you must enter the longitude value of the Prime Meridian and the angular unit that value is in amp Prime Meridian Editor x Identification Definition Longitude Value 4 367975 deg Units Degree BT Prime Meridian Editor WORKING WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS A coordinate system within MAPublisher defines a mathematical model of the conversion between a specific location on the Earth and a set of coordinates This model is specified by the coordinate system parameters including the Earth model ellipsoid or datum the units used to measure the coordinates the projection type and any parameters specific to the projection type Geodetic coordinate systems use Latitude and Longitude to define the position on the Earth and incorporate angular units of measurement such as degrees Projected coordinate systems consist of a two or three dimensional system in which each point on the plane is defined by an x y coordinate and having an origin where the axes intersect Projected coordinate systems incorporate linear units of measurement for the measurement of area distance and direction Within MAPublisher coordinate systems a
219. e format Label A1 3 B2 4 F H9 gt Adash indicates a range A1 3 means the label is found in cells A1 A2 and A3 F H9 means the label is found in cells F9 G9 and H9 The ranges by number are grouped first and then the ranges by letter Acomma indicates a list B2 4 means the label is found in cells B2 and B4 but not B3 gt A semicolon separates each entry Single line expanded One index for each unique label is created All grid cell references as listed in the format Label Al A2 A3 B2 B4 F9 G9 H9 e Multiline One index for each cell reference is created in the format Label Al Label A2 Label A3 Users can add more attributes to the index file by selecting one or more attributes from the Select addition attributes drop down list Additional attributes are inserted in the file in columns between the label and the grid locations separated by the chosen ndex Separators For example Label Attribute Attribute 2 A1 3 B2 4 F H9 Note Duplicated labels that have different selected attribute values will have a separate entry in the index file single line options Duplicated labels that share the same attribute values will have a single index entry but each location will be reflected in the cell references Finally the Apply locale formatting to numbers option applies number formatting according to the locale settings in the MAPublisher General Preferences e g 10000 may be written 10 000 or 10 000 or 10 000 Savin
220. e number of selected map objects for each layer also reported at the base of the panel The attribute values displayed in columns in the MAP Attributes panel can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking the column header The widths of the columns may be changed by clicking the column separator and manually dragging it to resize as desired Use the recordset navigation controls to scroll through table entries Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 79 MAP Attributes Panel The type of attribute is indicated by an icon preceding the column name Bi Boolean columns contain True or False values Ti Integer columns contain only whole numbers limited to 10 digits IR Real columns contain numbers carrying decimal values S String columns can contain attributes that are both alpha and numeric Edit Attributes MAPublisher MAP Attributes panel is a fully editable spreadsheet environment All attribute values may be edited except for certain MAPublisher Property attributes see earlier in this chapter To change the value of a cell double click it and enter the new value Keep in mind that entered values must correspond with the column type i e only enter numbers into a column of type Real or Integer The edits will be immediately reflected in the map documents database records Existing attribute records may also be edited or modified by performing a find and replace operation on them Column Visibility Click the Show Hide Columns button
221. e of the formats supported by the MAPublisher Importers see above In cases where the file format native to a particular mapping application is not supported by MAPublisher you can often request the data provider to export a file in one of the supported formats When obtaining data you should acquire as much metadata about the files as possible MAPublisher deals with data in the following manner Unprojected data will be imported by MAPublisher with latitude and longitude map anchors which will therefore range from x 180 to 180 y 90 to 90 If you receive projected data you should be aware of the following MAPublisher will import projected data with a true scale and appropriate map anchors Unlike unprojected data these map anchors will not be in lat long but rather in a coordinate system appropriate for the particular projection For most file formats the name of the projection datum and units will be recognized by MAPublisher However if the program cannot find this information in the data and you wish to subsequently reproject your data you will be required to specify the coordinate system Additionally please be aware that MAPublisher is a 2D mapping program Therefore if you attempt to import 3D data with MAPublisher it will be converted to two dimensional artwork by the importers Note Data provided in a generic latitude and longitude unprojected coordinate system will usually be recognized as a WGS 84 World Geodetic System
222. e schema from an existing MAP Layer Register Image applies geospatial properties to images imported to the document using the Adobe Illustrator Place command i e image placement and pixel or image size entered manually or loaded from a reference file If an image s coordinate system matches one of existing vector data the image can be scaled and rotated to fit the vector data If no matching vector data is found in the document a new MAP view can be created to store the cartographic information of the image to allow for data digitization with accurate positioning Register Image does not have the capability to transform images from one coordinate system to another 156 Chapter 12 Working With Images Register Image PREREQUISITES For Register Image to be functional the geospatial properties of the raster image must be known Some raster image formats store the relationship between source image coordinates pixel location and real world reference coordinates in an associated reference file but do not save the coordinate system information e g world file tfw The commonly used GeoTIFF format is embedded with geographic information such as position and coordinate system Depending on the image format check the position and coordinate system of imagery with the data provider before attempting to use this tool To import a raster image into a document select a layer MAP Layer or not and choose the Adobe Illustrator Place command Fi
223. e second option is the most practical if all the GML files are using a same schema only one instance of the xsd file needs to be saved Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 39 Import and Export Supported Data Formats Installed with MAPublisher are three default xsd files xml xsd generic GML attribute schema nen3610 xsd and top10nl xsd models standardized in the Netherlands maintained by the Dutch topographic office Kadaster GML files with a missing xsd file or with an invalid attribute schema will cause a GML validation error upon import see chapter 3 Users have the option to either find the appropriate xsd file and copy it to the GML Schema directory or to the GML file directory or to disable the GML validation This option will assign a type string to all attributes See chapter 3 Importing Map Data for more details on these settings MAPublisher supports the import of simple features points lines polygons donuts and aggregates in GML 2 0 and later versions MAPublisher supports export to GML 3 1 1 KML KMZ kml kmz Import and Export Keyhole Markup Language KML is an XML based language for managing the display of three dimensional geospatial data in the programs Google Earth Google Maps Google Mobile and WorldWind The KML file specifies a set of features for display Each feature always has a longitude and a latitude and can have other data such as tilt heading and altitude KML shares some of the same struc
224. e structure in ASCII format map the file that stores the feature geometry id the file that stores the index of the feature geometry dat the dBASE file that stores the attribute information of features ind table field indexes if necessary 40 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats Import and Export Supported Data Formats The geometry of each feature is stored as a shape that comprises a set of vector coordinates The attributes for each feature are stored as a record in a dBASE table dat associated with the Shapefile map There is one record in the dBASE table for each feature in the map file Raster TAB files cannot be imported in MAPublisher To ensure successful import select the tab component in the MAPublisher importers MicroStation Design dgn Not supported by Mac PowerPC Rosetta Import and Export MicroStation Design files dgn are the native files created by Bentley Systems Inc and formerly Intergraph MicroStation product Design Files consist of a header followed by a series of elements The header contains global information including the transformation equation from design units to user coordinates as well as the dimension of the elements in the file Each element contains standard display information such as its colour level class and style as well as a number of attributes specific to its element type During the import process MAPublisher will reproduce dgn levels as distinct Adobe Illustrator lay
225. e used to import raw NMEA files collected from other devices USING THE PLAYBACK SENTENCE LOG DIALOG BOX The Playback Sentence Log feature is used by selecting a previously recorded log file and then selecting one of the plot options Build Route Auto Plot by Time or Auto Plot by Distance Build Route A route will be created from the information in the log file using the selected Graphic style in the Adobe Illustrator panel Auto Plot by Time Settings from the Point Plot settings panel will be used to interpret the log file and plot points at specified times Auto Plot by Distance Settings from the Point Plot settings panel will be used to interpret the log file and plot points at specified distances 210 Chapter 16 MAP GPS Playback Sentence Log Lac L man Evian tes Bs Meilene zGingolph Thollon Bernex iz sAr Mont Blanc Les Contamin s M 4810 D de Bellecombe Noland Aig des Gladers lt 3816 Pr St D ral Hauteloce Beaufort E Saas Loncebraniette age Export Geospatial PDF Adobe Illustrator documents with GIS data can be exported to geospatially enabled PDF files thanks to the MAPublisher function Export Geospatial PDF A Geospatial PDF is an Adobe Acrobat file that retains geospatial coordinates With the coordinates users can view and interact with the PDF to find and mark location data MAPublisher exports all the MAP Attributes data in an Adobe
226. eader Column 3 Header etc Column 1 Value 1 Column 2 Value 1 7 Column 3 Value 1 etc Column 1 Value 2 Column 2 Value 2 Column 3 Value 2 etc Note that negative values for the X and Y coordinates denote west longitudes and south latitudes respectively Also make sure to enter a carriage return using the enter key on your keyboard after the last line of data otherwise the last line may be ignored by the MAPublisher Point Importer If you are using a spreadsheet application you can enter your point information as a table and save the file in a text format preferably csv or txt choosing either comma or tab delimiting The spreadsheet application will format the text automatically The screenshot below illustrates an example of such a table in Microsoft Excel prior to exporting as a csv or txt for import into Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher Microsoft Excel Book1 of x File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help FRIES Aria 0 BzuE amp E SHSs 5 A Al X Coords E iOS EESTI X Coords Y Coords Name Population 495 43 5 Toronto 3 000 000 74 40 75 New York 10 000 000 73 5 45 5 Montreal 1 500 000 80 245Miami 3 000 000 az I4 4 X iNSheet1 Sheet X Shes 7 ial i mi Ready inf e INUM pesi teal 7 The MAP Location Tool can be used to generate the X and Y coordinate values suitable for building ASCII Point Files See chapter 4 for more information A1 21
227. ecify which columns contain the x and y coordinates for the point data to be read in Coordinate Format Choose the formatting type of the data you wish to import e g Decimal Degrees Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds Packed DMS formats are described in chapter 6 Use first line as header Allows the user to enable the first line of the text file to be used as column headings ESRI INTERCHANGE FILE E00 An archive of files that describes a complete ArcInfo coverage This is either ASCII or compressed into a binary and is used to transfer files between different versions of Arclnfo It is a commonly found format for freely distributed data such as that found at the GIS Data Depot http Avww geocomm com A single E00 file describes a complete ArcInfo coverage The file itself is actually an archive of several smaller files referred to as subfiles Some of these subfiles have fixed names which do not vary from coverage to coverage and follow a predefined data format The remainder of the subfiles contained within an E00 are the info files These files may contain user defined attributes and have names which vary from coverage to coverage Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions e00 Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc Yes Spatial Index Never Ellipses No Schema Required Yes Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attri
228. ected immediately in the graphical properties and on screen display of the data to which they are linked Expressions can be generated and applied to data based on the values found in an existing attribute column providing a one step process to transform a vast number of different objects in a single operation Note Unlike the Derive Value From Expression option in Edit Schema values computed through Apply Expression are not tied to the original attributes constructing the expression and can be edited later on Only currently selected artwork is affected by the changes APPLY EXPRESSIONS Ensure the data required for the application of the expression is selected and appears in the MAP Attributes panel Click the Apply Expression button or choose it from the panel options menu First specify a column from the Apply to list to specify which attribute column the expression will be applied to The columns listed here are representative of the attribute structure unique to the data layer currently displayed in the attribute table as well as the standard MAPublisher property attributes To assign an expression to a column enter a valid expression in the Expression text box Alternatively click the Expression Builder button to open the Expression Builder dialog box To access other expressions saved in the map document click the Expression Library button to open the Expression Library dialog box The Expression Validity icon will report if the e
229. ed Geometry Typical File Extensions gml xml xsd Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Varies Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No 3D Support Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes xsd Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute xml type Line Yes Text No KEYHOLE MARKUP LANGUAGE KML KMZ KML is an XML based language for managing the display of three dimensional geospatial data in the programs Google Earth Google Maps Google Mobile and WorldWind The KML file specifies a set of features for display Each feature always has a longitude and a latitude and can have other data such as tilt heading and altitude KML shares some of the same structural grammar as GML KML files are very often distributed as KMZ files which are zipped KML files with a kmz extension MAPublisher uses KML version 2 2 specifications for import and export Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions kml kmz Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required No Donut Polygon Yes 3D Support Yes Point Yes Line Yes Text No Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected KML file
230. ed colour or grayscale GIFs JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG or JPG is a compression technique for raster file formats The Digital Orthophoto Quadrangle geographic images from the USGS are stored in this format which can be imported by Adobe Illustrator and registered by the MAPublisher Register Image filter DOQ are usually very large files 30 40 MB or more and will require extremely large amounts of RAM PDF GEOSPATIAL PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a standardized format developed by Adobe for use across Macintosh Windows DOS and UNIX platforms Based on the PostScript Level 2 language PDF supports both raster and vector graphics A Geospatial PDF is an Adobe Acrobat file that retains geospatial coordinates TIF TIFF GEOTIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF or TIF is a common raster graphic file format that can be imported by Adobe Illustrator Many raster geographic images from GIS systems are stored in this format which can be imported by Adobe Illustrator and registered by the MAPublisher Register Image filter A GeoTIFF is a TIFF file with embedded geographic information identifying its position and scale in world coordinates OTHERS Please refer to the Adobe Illustrator User Guide for other graphics file formats supported by Adobe Illustrator A1 1 MAPublisher Import Formats This section contains descriptions of the GIS formats supported for import by MAPublisher Here you will find an overview of the s
231. ed to check the positions see chapter 4 Notes Raster images cannot be transformed into another coordinate system If the vector data is transformed through the MAP View Editor Perform Coordinate System Transformation function after the image has been register the image will have to be transformed externally with Avenza Geographic Imager for example and registered again in MAPublisher Registered images can be re scaled and rotated together with the vector data but not automatically After the vector data has been re scaled or rotated using the MAP View Editor Register Image must be used to re apply the image referencing information In the case of a manual registration it is recommended to use the Export Image function before applying the changes to the vector data see next paragraph This way registering the image again is only a matter of loading a reference file 158 Chapter 12 Working With Images Register Image SUPPORTED GEOREFERENCED IMAGE REFERENCE FORMATS World File tfw tifw wld eww jgw jpw pgw sdw eww blw dmw World files contain the affine relationship between source image coordinates pixel locations and real world reference coordinates lat long or other real world coordinate units World files simply contain a computed relationship between source image coordinates and reference coordinates and not the complete reference point information World files do not support storing coordinate
232. efined Attributes Yes Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes if have prj Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No 3D Support Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute SHAPE GEOMETRY Line Yes Text No A1 5 GEOGRAPHIC MARKUP LANGUAGE SIMPLE FEATURES GML GML was designed as a geographic interface language for the Geo Web It is currently in draft as an ISO standard ISO 19136 The goal of the format is to provide users with a set of abstract base objects that can be built into working real world datasets It uses as XML base to store geometry and feature information that can easily be transported across the Internet The GML simple feature profile was created by the Open Geospatial Consortium as a restricted subset of the GML specification It provides a reduced geometry and metadata profile that can be shared across many GIS tasks This simple feature model can be used as a base to generate local application profiles for a specific work area Since the GML models base abstract classes these application profiles schemas are required for accessing and processing any GML datasets Generally GML data has a GML extension and requires any application specific schema files xsd For more information on GML and the GML simple features profile please visit the Open Geospatial Consortium web site www opengeospatial com Supported Elements Support
233. el Choose a Symbol and Scale After entering coordinate values select an appropriate symbol to use by clicking the symbol name link Again the symbols displayed are the symbols that currently exist in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel To scale the symbol used edit the Scale entry field Clicking the Up and Down arrows will increase or decrease the value by 1096 Note When a MAP Stylesheet is assigned to a Point layer it may override the map symbol chosen in the MAP Point Plotter panel Plot Points Click Plot to plot the point in the designated MAP layer To plot subsequent points edit the coordinates and also choose different symbols if required and click Plot again 102 Chapter 6 Plotting Points MAP Point Plotter Plot Centroids MAP Point Plotter panel gt Plot Centroids r Plot Centroids MAP View Select the MAP View e Map View 9 wora L ze containing the layers of interest Source Layer and Destination Layer aen l Bine ocn M Source Layer Select the Area or Line 2 MAP Layer containing the paths on Olea which the centroids will be calculated Existing layer P Capitals New layer centroid P Options Destination Layer Select either an This layer will inherit the source layer s attribute schema d existing Mu MAP n EM r Style Select the symbol to use The list new onewhere centror m Sinn Options correspond to the
234. electing map data MAP Selections panel gt New Edit MAP Selection gt Browse MAP Stylesheet Editor chapter 9 To create or edit an expression for use in styling map data MAP Stylesheets panel gt Edit MAP Stylesheet gt Advanced Expression gt Browse Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 83 Expression Builder ENTER EXPRESSIONS Expressions can be built by typing or by clicking the operator buttons and items in the Objects list attribute name and values constants and functions These items are colour coded for easy identification attribute names in purple string values in orange operators and numerical values in grey constants in green and functions in black Click any of the operator buttons or double click an item from the Objects list to insert it into the expression It is recommended to use the interface rather than the keyboard to build expressions to guarantee functions are formatted correctly e g with brackets and for attribute values of type strings quotations marks are added automatically Note that expressions are case sensitive For string comparison all strings values can be converted to a same case using the appropriate function LOWER string or UPPER string Validity The validity of the expression will be displayed below the Expression Entry text area and will be updated as the expression is built The Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report and incl
235. election Type Attribute Filter Art Selection or Spatial Filter Attribute Filter Attribute Filters select objects on one or more MAP Layers based on the features attributes values or properties The selection criteria is an expression created from attributes names values and or preset functions By default the selection is done on the currently selected layer Users may choose a different layer or more layers by clicking the button to open the Select Layers dialog box Check any layers that may need to be included In the Expression field enter a valid expression Optionally click the amp button to open the Expression Builder dialog box or click the J button to select an expression from the Expression Library see chapter 5 for more details The Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Y or invalid and will include additional warning notes Note The expression validity depends on the layer s selection since it is based on some attribute column names 150 Chapter 11 MAP Selections and Operations MAP Selections The following are some examples of basic expressions which can be entered for use as selection filters Expression Result NAME Ontario All items with the value Ontario in the NAME column are selected Result Items with the value Ontario OR Alberta in the NAME column NAME Ontario OR NAME Alberta are selected All item
236. en the Compress Map Data File option is not checked MAPublisherViewer local swf and MAPublisherViewer swf map viewer implementation files map_L swf where is the layer number one file per layer when option to toggle is checked View the README txt file inside the export data folder for more information about each file The Web Export Log displays several export file size statistics the total SWF file size and the metdata file size These file sizes are meant to warn the users when files get very large Large files should be avoided as they may be very slow to open on a Website Web Export Log Export Folder Link to the export e Port Log Right cli i C sers mlaw Documents Flash Canada i folder pod click to ai Be Je Export Folder w Documen n T Export Again Return to the Web location to clipboard o Set Folder Permissions I Export Dialog Set Folder Permissions Set folder T File 2 of Vertices Size permissions Read more Major city names map LL swf 0 18 KB about Flash Security and Major cities map L2 swf 0 1KB permissions Provinces map_L3 swf 6833 158 KB background map_L4 swf 0 6KB I _ F Layer List List of the exported layers including file name number of vertices and file size Total SWF File Size Total file size e Total SWF File Size 183 KB of the created SWF files Riss epee lau Less than 600 KB is ideal A E a PIE ALA To reduce exported file sizes en
237. ents My Computer My Network Places OF eE O agoregate E Arcview Import tests Swedish_characters San Diego map data 36005 Shape polyined Simcoe Simplify Tests I Bad Bart ICQ CANADA Cyprus CQESRI Data CQ World Pacific Centered C3worldmif zenon O FederalElection Geomedia Qoridtests Hiway holes Giimport table GaMany Attributes Emerton shp Cars Data nutz PROJECTED Ca Richmond Hit Fie name 4 C Importing an Additional Datasource Notes The Custom Coordinate Systems must be saved Save or Save As button after the import in order to be able to reuse it New coordinate systems may also be added to the Custom Coordinate Systems during the map data import process when the file coordinate system is not found in the existing lists of coordinate systems it is automatically created with the proper required parameters A2 15 Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users Legend Functionality in MAP Stylesheets A number of functions have been redesigned in MAPublisher 8 Users of MAPublisher 6 or earlier should consult the following pages for information on how to perform common legacy MAPublisher tasks in MAPublisher 8 BUILDING COLOUR RAMPS TO CREATE STYLES You can enhance the look of your maps by using colour ramps rather than random colours for your area and line styles A possible use for this would be in the creation of relief maps Deter
238. equired When you are importing a large number of files into Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher you ll notice that the amount of available memory will decrease rapidly and your computer loses speed This is due to the memory management MAPublisher reserves a fairly large amount of memory for each import action which is not properly returned when the import is done or even when it is cancelled The solution is simple save your file close it and open it again It s not even necessary to close Adobe Illustrator itself By closing the file the reserved memory is properly returned RAM SAVING TIPS Since a percentage of the memory is taken for attribute storage drop any redundant or otherwise unnecessary attribute fields from the map attributes table Many sources of street data include paths vectors that are segmented based on street addressing information You can use the MAPublisher Join Lines filter to join these into single linear features based on a selected attribute field Reducing the number of objects and data records in the map file will free up memory Many GIS data files are large and when a series of such files is imported you may find that the import filter starts to run more slowly This is because scratch and memory allocations are being used up The best solution is to periodically save your work quit out of Adobe Illustrator and then restart This will free up the available scratch memory A1 18 The minimum number of un
239. er connection selected in the drop down list Sort attributes alphabetically when selecting for import Check this option to sort attributes alphabetically in the import dialog boxes L Sort feature classes alphabetically when selecting for import Enable this option to sort feature classes alphabetically in the import dialog boxes ArcGIS Bin Directory Specify the location where the ArcGIS Bin directory is installed Click the Browse button to open a folder browser and change the path Automatically connect to Check this option to automatically connect to a specific server connection selected in the drop down list Use alias as layer name Enable this option to use feature classe s alias name rather than its true name Use abbreviated table name for layer name ArcSDE geodatabases tables are identified as databaseName userName tableName The abbreviated version uses only the table name as layer name If this option is used in combination with the use alias option the alias is applied first Display coded domain subtype description Option to import attributes with coded values from subtypes and attribute domains as follow Instead replace the codes by their description text Never import actual values codes In Addition create two attribute columns one with coded values and one with descriptions Spatial Database gt General Spatial Database Editor Preferences
240. eration drop down list Deviation and Distribution calculate a value specific to each row Mean Standard Deviation and Sum create a single value for all rows In the Source drop down list select the source column from within all numerical attributes of the current layer Users have the option to add calculated data to all art on a layer or only to the selected art however statistical calculations are based on the entire dataset of the source column Note To obtain a distribution in percents first use Add Calculated Data with the Distribution operation then use the Apply Expression function to multiply the column values by 100 e g COLUMN COLUMN 100 Calculate North Angle To calculate north angles of points on a Point layer set the Calculation drop down list to North Angle RESULTS The attribute columns are updated or created according to the specified settings Note that these new values are not updated automatically when the source column changes Add Calculated Data must be run again for updates to be applied 96 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Add Calculated Data Export Attributes MAP Attributes panel options gt Export Attributes r Export Attributes File name Click the Browse button to select the directory and type the file name where to save the exported attributes Scope Choose to export all the attributes 4 or only the visible attributes eFlename Documents canada_data txt a Cancel Note
241. ered between double quotes Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets 131 MAP Stylesheet Editor IMPORTANT NOTES Dynamic Style Linkage Once a MAP Stylesheet has been assigned with styles and symbols those styles and symbols are dynamically linked to the attribute values When an attribute value is changed the style symbol is updated accordingly in the Adobe Illustrator document Additionally if a MAP Stylesheet uses a simple equality expression on a non read only or property attribute manually applying a style symbol to an object of a layer contained in that MAP Stylesheet will assign the corresponding attribute value to that object Note that this only works if no rule already applies to that object A simple equality expression uses only one attribute and only one equality operator For example AttributeA 1 is a simple equality expression while AttributeA 15 is not For example if a MAP Stylesheet has a rule like the one below and contains a layer named point of interest Name Style Expression Restaurant I restaurant CATEGORY restaurant Adding the restaurant symbol f on the same point of interest layer will automatically assign the value restaurant to the CATEGORY attribute of the newly created art Caution should be used with manually editing the styles of artwork after MAP Stylesheets have been applied if any style rules have simple equalities For this reason it is generally recommended to remove layers from M
242. ers Therefore a typical single import will produce one layer for each Level that exists in the MicroStation Design File MAPublisher supports the import of MicroStation J version 7 and V8 files however attached raster file will not be imported they are ignored Prior to import set the colour mode of the Adobe Illustrator document to the same scheme used in the colour table of the original file i e RGB or CMYK to ensure that the colours are interpreted correctly upon import The hierarchy of layers in multi feature imports is by feature type in the following order text layers then point layers then line layers then area layers Raster files attached to DGN files are ignored during the import process Files are exported to DGN from MAPublisher as MicroStation J files Upon export users may select a dgn seed file All information in the seed file gets carried over to the output file such as level layer definitions units colors line styles definitions etc If an exported layer name matches a level name in the seed file the data of that layer is appended to the existing level if not a new level is created S 57 000 Import only S 57 is referring to the IHO International Hydrographic Office Special Publication number 57 related to the IHO transfer standard for Digital Hydrographic Data Maintained by the IHO S 57 format is intended for the exchange of digital hydrographic data between national hydrographic offices and for it
243. ers one of the following combinations must be available in page units or map units The X and Y coordinates of one corner of the image and the X and Y Pixel Size The X and Y coordinates of one corner of the image and the X and Y size of the image First choose the units to use for entering parameters by making a selection from the Units drop down list Then click the appropriate corner of the graphic to indicate the image placement point and enter the X and Y coordinates for this location in the adjacent fields Next set either the Pixel Size or Effective Map Size The Pixel Size is the value of a single pixel in the units set The Effective Map Size is the X and Y size of the whole image in the units set Setting either option will update the other accordingly Note MAPublisher Register Image supports the registration of images having non square pixels RESULTS When registering GeoTIFF images a warning message will be displayed if the coordinate system of the image does not match the selected MAP View s coordinate system When registering images not in GeoTIFF format while creating a new MAP View the coordinate system of the MAP View has to be specified in the MAP View Editor to finalize the georeferencing Provided that the coordinate system placement and size of the raster image are correct the image will be scaled and registered When matching vector data is available the image will fit to the artwork The MAP Location Tool can be us
244. es T the Advanced dialog box below to specify additional options for Feature layer B States area t the index format Label text matches attribute S STATE NAME Make index based on feature position and attribute value P uscities point Si CITY NAME Feature layer Attribute MAPublisher will determine what features to index by matching label text on the indicated layer to the indicated attribute An index will be created for every grid cell in which the feature can be found Advanced Options sony Gow panies pes tor paci mde Cts O Click a button to open the Edit Separator Label tab Attribute tab A lt gt 2 aio B 7 B2 dialog box There choose between Tab x None or a Custom separator Sample Indexes Edit Attribute Separator Toronto Ontario A5 7 B3 ocj Tab Edmonton A2 B3 None Cancel Vancouver A C2 L2 3 Gaee p A2 Hospital Zoo n Main St A2 Treat grouped text as a single entry Output Format Single line condensed O Single line expanded Multiline Select Additional Attributes e Select additional attributes Select one IR Pagex or more attributes to be added to IK PageY 0 the index file The selected attributes IE sid appear in separated columns delimited IS Name by the chosen Index Separator v IRI _ HorizontalScale _ Apply locale formatting to numbers e g thousand separators e
245. es directly within the context of the MAP Attributes panel Pin Attributes Click the Pin button to keep selected attributes active even after the artwork is unselected This may be helpful during attribute editing when accidentally unselecting artwork may occur To unpin attributes click the Pin button again When attributes are pinned attribute values can be manually edited but the functions at the bottom of the panel are disabled except for Zoom to Feature Show Hide columns Edit Schema Find and Replace Apply Expression Join Table and Add Calculated The Export Attributes function is also disabled 80 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes MAP Attributes Panel Edit Schema MAP Attributes panel gt Edit Schema Edit Column New Column Edit Scher oo Name Edit the name of the a m sia Name STATE NAME selected column Up Down Click to move the v s sawed Display Name STATE NAME ae Display Name Edit the column selected column up or down E ttveeDnestion display name the column list Affects order Bi Faia Ies Sswm gt in the attribute table Si sstyle size 25 xj Type Choose column type B ssuokeWeioht Integer Real String or Boolean Col list Attrib d 4 IR Perimeter d olumn list Attribute an IB PathClosed Default Value E Omm property columns on the ue Decimals Adjust the leng current layer are listed here it V Visible of String type or amount of Selec
246. es to determine each group of points Sort Order Contains a hierarchical list of the columns specified to sort by To remove a column from the Sort Order click the Remove button Move Up Move Down You can move columns up and down the Sort Order hierarchy by clicking the appropriate button Add Remove buttons Click to add or remove attributes from the lists Join Points allows a group of point symbols to be joined to form a line based upon attribute values used as sorting criteria For example it is common to form a line based on points collected by a GPS device When Join Points is completed a new map layer is created that contains the line art The generated line layer contains the same common attribute column that was used to group the points together PREREQUISITES Join Points can only function on Point layers and can be used on both currently selected point symbols or all the point symbols on a specified layer There must be at least two attribute columns on the specified point layer in order to use Join Points To open the dialog box choose Object MAPublisher Join Points or click the Join Points button mi on the MAPublisher toolbar Chapter 8 Line Functions 121 Join Points USING JOIN POINTS From the Source Layer drop down list select the Point layer containing the points to be joined Then choose a join that is based on either All
247. example to insert links to graphics images and Flash animations the MAP layer must have a dedicated attribute field containing a path e g images picture1 jpg The Source Media Folder containing the graphics must be organized properly The supported image formats are jpeg png and gif and supported Flash animation format is swf Notes Not just any map can be made into a Flash map A print ready map does not necessarily mean that it is a Flash ready map Unneeded art and attributes should be removed lines should be simplified Layers that do not require tagging will still be exported Only the active artboard will be exported to Flash Adobe Illustrator CS4 CS5 only MAPublisher Flash export requires the Firefox version of the Flash Player to be installed Full support for Internet Explorer Flash plug in is partially complete at the time of printing Also the user is no longer warned if the Flash plug in is not installed detected prior to loading the Flash map instead a link is provided when an attempt to load the file is made To ensure compatibility download and install the latest Flash Player at http get adobe com flashplayer otherversions USING MAP WEB AUTHOR Specify the Source Media Folder The Source Media Folder is the directory containing graphics that might be displayed in the Web tags callout bubbles The path to this directory is chosen through Specify Source Media Folder in the MAP Web Author panel options menu Eit
248. export from MAPublisher some field names may get truncated to comply to the chosen external file format For example ESRI shapefiles are limited to 10 characters confirmed up to ArcGIS 9 3 ESRI Interchange File e00 to 16 characters and MapInfo to 30 characters Once the name is set specify a data type by making the appropriate selection in the Type list To modify the amount of characters or decimals enter a value into the Size Decimal text box the maximum string size is 28000 A Default Value can be assigned for all new objects placed on the selected layer by entering text accordingly Check or uncheck the Visible option to edit a column s visibility Check or uncheck the Read only option to edit a column s read write status Check the Derive value from expression option to assign an expression to the selected column Enter a valid expression in the Expression field or click the Browse button to enter and edit expressions via the Expression Builder dialog box The Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report and include additional warning notes This function is useful for example to populate the column values based on the contents of other columns and or mathematical formulas Note Values derived from expression are dynamically linked to the attributes used in the expression Therefore they are read only Use the Apply Expression function to generate values that can be modified
249. f the callout bubble Choose By Attribute and type Cout mag lcg ELS P the attribute name containin Enter attribute tag here Height 160px the path to the fedis Heme Path No inage spedicd PAGE Callout Size Set the size width kaet imge Mandy Width Height j and height in pixels of the me llout bubbl Image Width and Height Specify I SE CHRIS the image width and height in r m 1 n i Auto Size Check this option to i i Bj Z e z El d sinse anres pixel oruse default size il JI i l J es 5 C JOH l eel automatically size the callout HTML Tags and Graphic Tools Paper Hm CR bubble around its contents Use these tools to edit the text From left to right Bold Italic Link Line Break Unordered i Callout Editor Edit the callout List and Image Chart options contents Supported HTML tags include Bar Chart and Pie Chart may be used to format the text The insert attribute drop down and images in the contents list contains attributes I Cikk hare to sue which HTML tags are supported in Flach contained in the layer Trigger External URL Advanced e Trigger External URL Advanced HTML Supported Tags Open Hover URL Target Control how URLs are opened Adobe Flash documentation to Click URL Targetti when either clicking or hovering view more information about The specified URL s will be loaded when the user hovers or cicks on this art Use the target tag to load the URL in a specific ht
250. feature type text layers then point then line then area layers ESRI Shapefile shp Import and Export Shapefiles are most commonly created by ESRI ArcGIS or ArcView Shapefiles store both geometry and attributes for features and a single shapefile will consist of at least three physical files The shp portion contains the geometric data the dbf contains attributes for the geometric data and the shx contains the index information All three files are required in order to successfully import a shapefile to Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher There is also usually a prj file which holds the coordinate system information of the shapefile and will automatically be read by MAPublisher on import If your shapefile folder does not contain a prj file you will be required to specify the coordinate system in order to fully utilize MAPublisher The important things to remember when importing Shapefiles are that the shp file must be the one that is selected through the MAPublisher import filter and that all its component files must be in the same folder You may also find that your Shapefile directory comes with two extra files a sbn and a sbx which hold the spatial index for the geometric data These two files will not exist unless the Shapefile was created with an ESRI product and are not necessary for successful import with MAPublisher GML Simple Features 2 0 Import and Export The Geographic Markup Language GML was designed as
251. ffith Observatory BD MAPublisher LabelPro MAPublisher LabelPro is a comprehensive collision free labeling solution integrated into MAPublisher Using rules and styles for text placement it extracts label information from map layer attributes and performs fast intelligent cartographic text placement Placement rules can be saved to a file and imported into other labeling work sessions Topics covered in this section MAP LabelPro MAP LabelPro Settings MAP LabelPro Styles MAP LabelPro Rules Label Verification MAP LabelPro is available as an optional add on to MAPublisher For more information on how to obtain a MAP LabelPro license please contact sales avenza com or visit www avenza com For information on how to activate a purchased or evaluation license please refer to chapter 1 of this guide Note The evaluation version of MAPublisher LabelPro scrambles the text of placed labels but preserves the case spacing and punctuation so that the results give a sense of how actual labels would be placed based on the rule settings Chapter 18 MAP LabelPro 219 Attribute Select the attribute column containing the data to be used as label selected features MAP LabelPro Object MAPublisher MAP LabelPro or MAP Toolbar d Destination Specify a destination from a list of available text Rules Select a default set of rules or create custom rules that Priority For multiple layers being simult
252. fied in the MAP Attributes panel Prior to exporting users can delete or hide display relevant attributes in the MAP Attributes panel through the Edit Schema dialog box or using the Show Hide button The Edit Schema dialog box is also used to change the attribute display name see chapter 5 for details Edit Schema a m sia Name STATE NAME a gt S Name Display Name Attribute name iv A Display Name STATE NAME d II AreaDirection Cawd displayed in the Object Data pane of IE VertexCount Type Sion z the Model Tree IS Style R Po Pee IR sPerimeter IB PathClosed m r F Visible e Visible Set the visibility status of the rea 25 x Default Value AREA E Read only selected attribute column Column Select the column to edit Derive value from expression S STATE_FIPS E i S SUB REGION i S STATE ABBR m mma USING EXPORT GEOSPATIAL PDF To export to Geospatial PDF choose File Export and select MAP Geospatial PDF in the Save as type Windows or Format Mac drop down list or click the Export MAP Geospatial PDF button TO on the MAPublisher Toolbar After selecting an export directory and file name the Geospatial PDF Settings dialog box opens to offer the export options described hereafter Export Attributes For Layer The Export Attributes For Layer tree lists all the MAP Layers that can be exported with attributes
253. for additional options Note Only a single MAP View or a single layer can be exported at one time Keep Format Extension The name of the MAP Layer or MAP View selected for export is the default name of the exported file However the feature type text i e area line point or text appended to Adobe Illustrator layers by MAPublisher in the Import process are removed during the export process unless the Keep format extension option is checked Export Visible Attributes Enable this option to export only the attributes that are currently visible in the MAP Attributes panel If this option is not checked all attribute columns including MAPublisher Property attributes are exported 70 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing Export Format Specific Settings Depending on the selected export format additional specific settings may be available This is the case for the following formats AutoCAD Delimited XY Text Data MicroStation MID MIF E00 and KML KMZ See the Export Settings above When exporting to KML KMZ specify the format extension kml or kmz in the Select Export File dialog box Save As Type drop down list Note KML KMZ format only supports WGS84 geodetic coordinate system Export to KML KMZ will automatically transform the vector data from the MAP View s coordinate system to this system as part of the export process Choosing a Destination Folder Most of the export formats require the selection of a destinati
254. from server Checkin Dean LI i Retire a Floating Feature Version Type Status Serial Number V Checkout floating licenses automatically tm 4 MAPublisher 83 Floating Licensed from server Floating 7 Don t show again MaAPublisher LabelPro 1 0 Floating Unlicensed MAPublisher Welcome Screen Machine ID 00222221131 V Automatically checkout license Use roaming license 1 day s MAPublisher License Management 20 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher License Management ACTIVATE AN EVALUATION VERSION OF MAPUBLISHER 1 After installation of MAPublisher 8 click the Evaluate button of the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or MAPublisher License Management dialog box Complete the form and click Evaluate 2 When you are ready to purchase the software you can open the MAPublisher License Management dialog box from Adobe Illustrator Help menu at MAPublisher Licensing License Management click Register button and follow the instructions in the next paragraph Note AMAPublisher evaluation is fully functional There are no limitations except that an evaluation license is only valid for 14 days from the day of activation REGISTER A PURCHASED COPY OF MAPUBLISHER 1 Toregister a purchased copy of MAPublisher click the Register button in either the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or MAPublisher License Management dialog box Enter the license key serial number that was provided whe
255. g are determined by the desired aspect of the Web map It is recommended that users try different configurations Here are some basic examples ne Canada I v AN s S Canada li 1l Major city names V Major cities 7 Canada province such Canada i Simple MAP No layer control no navigation Basic Settings No Search box Advanced Settings Default Style Map Built in layer control and navigation button added through the Basic Settings only No Advanced Settings required Customized Style Map External layer control and navigation button added through the Basic Settings Removed zoom buttons and changed callout bubble style through Advanced Settings 5 VIEWING FLASH MAPS WITH A WEB BROWSER Download the latest Flash Player version http get adobe com flashplayer and install it Open the Flash map in a Web browser to view it i e select the exported html file and open it locally Note If the Flash Player Security Sandbox is set to Network during the export the folder permissions must be set in the Adobe Flash Player Settings Manager as explained earlier in this chapter If the option Auto or Local has been chosen during the export the map can be opened while offline with no further settings 198 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author MAP Web Author Workflow Advanced Features Additional to the common MAP Web Author functions users with good knowledge of HTML and Javascript can
256. g the Index File When all indexed options have been set click the Save As button Then specify a name for the text file and the location where it will be saved The index file can be opened in a text editor or placed back into the document using the Adobe Illustrator Place function Using Adobe Illustrator CS4 on Mac OS X it is recommended to copy the index contents into a text box instead of using the Place function Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 173 Make Index TREDYFFRIN EAST VU owe gn AND n WHITEL ist DFORD hg Scale Bars and North Arrows MAPublisher contains tools for plotting accurate scale bars and north arrows onto your map The Scale Bar filter offers a number of different designs that you can choose from including double bar designs for the placement of scale bars in multiple units North Arrows are created from selected artwork on the page using the Create North Arrow filter and will be immediately aligned to true north Topics covered in this section Scale Bar Create North Arrow Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows 175 Scale Bar Object gt MAPublisher gt Scale Bar or MAP Toolbar Hii Object gt Edit Scale Bar Scale Bar Select Style Click the up or down button to browse through the g mcum scale bar styles vj Cancel Preview Panel Displays a preview 4 lthegeneisted scale bar e SS DE o 600000 1200000 1800000 2400000 3000
257. g the selected layer is projected The Unit drop down list shows a selection of linear or angular units if the coordinate type is set to projected or geodetic respectively Finally set the option to calculate the centroid or position to the selected art only or to all art on the current layer Calculate Statistics To calculate statistics based on a source attribute column set the Calculation drop down list to Statistics The following statistical operations are available Deviation for each row difference between the current value and the mean Distribution for each row current value divided by the sum Mean sum of all the row values divided by the number of rows in the source column same for all rows Standard Deviation measure of the variability or dispersion of the row values in the source column A low standard deviation indicates that row values are very close to the mean whereas high standard deviation indicates that row values are spread out Calculated as the square root of the sum of all deviations squared divided by the number of rows in the source column same for all rows Sum addition of all the row values in the source column same for all rows In the Target drop down list users have the options to keep the default new column name new stat col type a name of their choice or select an existing column Only existing columns of data type Real are listed Then select the required function in the Op
258. geometry can be of Point Line or Area geometry while object descriptions are categorized in object classes organized in specific attributes schemas For a full format description please visit http www iho shom fr PUBLICATIONS IHO Download htm S 57 Appendix A in particular An online object catalog is also available on www s 57 com An S57 base file has the extension 000 while the update files have extensions like 001 002 and so on It can also be accompanied by other files 000 main file 001 update file 1 002 update file 2 00n update file n files TXT and filesJPG ancillary text and picture files indicated in attribute definition Update files contains only the changed new deleted modified objects and are only used as a complement of a 000 file Only the 000 file is required for the import into MAPublisher The update files will be applied at conversion when present However text and image files linked to attributes will be ignored Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions 000 001 002 Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes No Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No 3D Support Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required N A Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute s57 type Line Yes Text No Note Most ENC producers private and public publish their 000 files
259. gt L lt Path gt L lt Path gt O lt Path gt L1 Path L lt Path gt Oo o ojo o o p o 2 Layers 4a al S This masking does not affects the line paths attributes or properties Edit Knockout Masks Opacity The opacity of all the knockouts within a line layer can only be edited at once using the Adobe Illustrator Transparency panel The steps to follow are 1 Inthe Adobe Illustrator Layers panel click the target button next to the master layer name 2 Choose Window gt Transparency to open the Transparency panel 3 Inthe Transparency panel click the right side preview to start editing opacity mask TRANSPARENCY Normal Opacity 75 p e Opatity Edit the opacity C Clip l C Invert Mask Exit Edit Opacity Mask Click to stop Edit Opacity Mask Click to edit editing opacity mask opacity mask C Isolate Blending 7 Knockout Group C Opacity amp Mask Define Knockout Shape 4 To exit the opacity mask editing mode click the left side preview in the Transparency panel Note If for some reason the knockouts are not selected when you exit the opacity mask editing mode the next time you return to this mode they will not be selected by default you ll have to re select the knockouts from within the opacity mask editing mode click on the object or use the Layers panel target button CLEAR KNOCKOUT MASKS Start Create Knockouts and
260. h Canada lish Country Canada V Format numbers for labeling operations and display purposes based on locale e t Locale This option affects how MAPublisher formats numbers e g use comma or point as a decimal separator Use the operating system local settings or specify a different language and country Format numbers for labeling operations and SP MAP Selections Baring stiles pum a display purposes based on locale MAP Stylesheets a A E Rx E ee Enable to format how number labels MAP Views US are displayed based on country e g Spatial Database ieee eae IN 1 10 Foot 400 00 in USA compared to 400 00 1 10 US Survey Foot 3 i E ArcMinute in Norway M Arcsecond Sorting Style Set to Name then type E Benoit s Chain fi Iphabeticalsorting Set t IF Benoit s Link or an alphabetical sorting Set to F Bin width 12 5 Meter Type then name to first sort the layers Bin width 165 US Survey Foot e ez per data type Legend Text Point 7 Bin width 25 Meter Line or Area E Bin width 3 125 Meter 1 Dis sidet ANE Comoe Cont m Pinned map units The selected map Max recent map units 5 units are listed first in the unit drop down lists of MAPublisher e g in Scale Bar or Buffer Lines dialog Max recent map units Maximum number of boxes map units memorized by MAPublisher Add notes for layers created by MAPublisher operations Enable to have layer notes created
261. h as DGN or DXF but are similarly split up by feature type A single import of such files produces a single MAP View as an import can only take place into a single coordinate system Custom MAP Views may be created in order to georeference existing Adobe Illustrator artwork The following pages deal with the creation and management of MAP Views specifying and reprojecting a coordinate system editing scale and data placement on the page merging Adobe Illustrator layers and exporting to GIS formats Topics covered in this section Georeferencing MAP Views Panel MAP View Editor Export Import MAP Objects MAP Location Tool Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 55 Georeferencing The workflow for georeferencing a non georeferenced Adobe Illustrator file in MAPublisher can be separated into three steps 1 A Source Coordinate System must be specified The coordinate system gives a method to represent geographic points in relation to a world origin these are also called map geographic real world or spatial coordinates 2 A Scale is necessary to translate measurements on the ground to measurements on the artboard 3 MAPublisher bases its georeferencing on a tie point within an Adobe Illustrator document artboard The relationship between Page Anchor and Map Anchor is defined below The Source Coordinate System and Scale have to be manually set One should not estimate this information it is usually provided as metadata by
262. hapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher Preferences Ensure imported layer names are unique By default MAPublisher appends a number 1 2 etc to an imported layer name if the layer name already exists Clear this check box to prevent this behaviour Replicate attribute data to compound path sub components Enable this option before editing the attribute schema so that the attributes do not get broken when releasing a compound path see chapter 5 Default string size Specify the default string size applied when creating a new attribute of type S String Default decimal count Specify the default number of decimals applied when creating a new attribute of type R Real MAP Attributes gt Panel Preferences MAPublisher Preferences fe Expression Builder amp General Import Map Data 4 E MAP Attributes 77 Panel Q MAP LabelPro MAP Location Q MAP Measurement f MAP Selections S MAP Stylesheets MAP Views Spatial Database MAP Attributes Panel Table font Table font size V Show icons in column headers V Show display names in column headers e 7 Show recordset navigation Q9 Use default font MS Si Default e ii MAP LabelPro Preferences The MAP LabelPro preference category contains general settings to save the path access to saved rules styles and symbol folders see chapter 18 for more information on MAP
263. he left of the page e a href http webSite gt Avenza web lt a gt gt Avenza Web opens the Website indicated in the attribute WebSite on click 186 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Web Tag Dialog USING THE WEB TAG DIALOG Callout Setup and Preview The Preview button opens or closes the preview of the callout As text and graphics are inserted the preview gets updated to show the aspect of the callout bubble prior to export Set the Height and Width of the callout bubble in pixel units or use the Auto Size option This option sets the size of the bubble automatically based on the contents of the callout Note Flash is used to generate a callout preview of exactly what you will see in a web tag However due to some known Flash Player HTML rendering limitations some callouts may not appear in a Web browser exactly as shown in the MAP Web Author preview For example ordered and unordered lists lt ol gt and lt ul gt tags are not recognized by Flash Player so they do not modify how the list is rendered and all list items will be shown using bullets Insert a Title Callout bubbles can be given a title The title can be typed in as text but it can also be formatted using HTML tags and MAP Attribute values The attribute field name must be entered between percent signs e g TITLE Insert an Image or Flash Animation Images and Flash animations SWF can be inserted into callout bubbles To insert graphics manually c
264. he Option key Mac to draw from the centre and or the Shift key to constrain the proportions When you release the mouse button the area will be created Enter Specific Dimensions To draw shapes at specified sizes single click at a point in your Map document at the location from which you wish to plot the shape The MAPublisher Add Area dialog box will appear into which you can enter specific dimensions for the area to be drawn If you wish to have the area centered over the click point simply check the Center area on dick box If you do not check this box an area will be drawn from its upper left corner Click OK to plot the shape RESULTS Plotting a shape using either of these methods will initially select the features that fall inside the area in whole or part Therefore these tools can be also useful for selecting features that are within designated distances away from a central location 106 Chapter 7 Drawing Tools MAP Area Tools MAP Vector Crop Tool Tools gt MAP Vector Crop FUNCTIONALITY Use the MAP Vector Crop Tool to trim a map vector data only to a certain area of interest Typically the tool is meant to crop imported vector data that might be covering a larger area than the intended map extents Used ona copy of the full original MAP View MAP Vector Crop can also be utilized to create map insets smaller maps centered on specific areas see example below PREREQUISITES Before using the MAP Vector Crop Tool e
265. he same attribute structures to be under a same MAP Stylesheet as long as they are all of a matching feature type Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets 127 MAP Stylesheets Panel Export Stylesheets To export MAP Stylesheets choose Export MAP Stylesheets from the panel options menu In the Export MAP Stylesheets dialog box click a checkbox beside each stylesheet to select it for export After confirming which stylesheets are to be exported a Save dialog box will prompt for a file name Stylesheets are exported to an Adobe Illustrator document m Export MAP Stylesheets Select MAP Stylesheets to export m Em Cancel z Unitecstatest eS MAP Stylesheets Check to select for export MAP Stylesheets Labels IA Lower States A Other States Roads US Cities SIS SII Import MAP Objects Stylesheets To import MAP Stylesheets open both the source the one holding the stylesheets and destination the one where the stylesheets will go Adobe Illustrator documents In the destination document choose Import MAP Stylesheets from the panel options menu In the Import MAP Objects dialog box click a checkbox beside each stylesheet to select it for import After import the stylesheets appear in the MAP Stylesheet panel See chapter 4 for more information about Import MAP Objects Note If multiple documents open multiple MAP Stylesheet headings may be available Choose appropriately Delete and Duplicate Stylesheet
266. he top left corner of the rulers where the vertical and horizontal rulers intersect For more information and details regarding these operations please refer to your Adobe Illustrator User Guide n step 2 the default page size of 8 5 x 11 is for North American versions of Adobe Illustrator Other language versions of Adobe Illustrator may have different default page sizes Consult your Adobe Illustrator User Guide for more information Note When using Adobe Illustrator CS3 the document size should not exceed a limit of 200 inches by 200 inches 200 equals 5080 mm 508 cm 14400 points 1200 picas 14400 pixels Passed this limit some MAPublisher tools may not operate properly shift in positioning due to some issue with this version of Adobe Illustrator Note that the maximum length and width dimension for an Adobe Illustrator document is 227 5416 inches Note Adobe Illustrator CS5 introduces a new function to Duplicate Artboard This new function should be used with caution because it also duplicates art and moves it on the page but the duplicated art reference is the same geographic frame as the original art they are contained in the same layer Therefore the geographic position of the duplicated art will not be correct 36 Chapter 1 Getting Started Preparing the Workspace Map Data File Formats MAPublisher 8 imports and exports most of the GIS industry leading vector file formats Import Formats CAD dxf dwg
267. he working Adobe Illustrator file USING THE MAP STYLESHEETS PANEL To open the MAP Stylesheets panel choose Window MAPublisher Panels MAP Stylesheets or click the MAP Stylesheets button on the MAPublisher toolbar lt gt The MAP Stylesheets panel contains a list of all MAP Layers Similar to MAP Views the icons used for these layers are A Area Layer P Point Layer E Line Layer T Text Layer By default all MAP Layers are listed under No MAP Stylesheet This means that a layer does not belong to any MAP stylesheet When a new MAP Stylesheet is created assign a layer to it by using the Switch MAP Stylesheet button or by using the drag and drop method This loads the attributes for creating legend rules or expressions 126 MAP Stylesheets Panel Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets Load Symbols and Styles The symbology used by MAP Stylesheets is directly related to the symbols and styles which exist in native Adobe Illustrator panels In order to correctly function the MAP Stylesheet requires that symbology or style appropriate to the feature type is established in the following Adobe Illustrator panels Area Stylesheets Graphic Styles panel Window gt Graphic Styles Line Stylesheets Graphic Styles panel Window gt Graphic Styles P Point Stylesheets Symbols panel Window gt Symbols Text Stylesheets Character Styles panel Window gt Type gt Character Styles Custom and pre made symbology
268. heck this option to display the data extents lower left and upper right Corners coordinates MAP Attributes Preferences The MAP Attributes preference category does not contain general settings but has a sub category for the MAP Attributes panel see chapter 5 for a full description of the MAP Attributes panel MAP Attributes Preferences Attribute sort on import Set to Do not Sort to maintain the attributes order of the source GIS file Set to Order attributes alphabetically to apply this new ordering Property disposition on import Set to Move properties to start or Move properties to end Append feature type as suffix on imported layer names By default the feature type is appended to the layer name e g area or point Clear this check box to prevent this behaviour Show full file name in Advanced Import table The Advanced Import table shows the list of selected files for import By default only the file name is displayed Check this option to display the full path MAPublisher Preferences fe Expression Builder I General Import Map Data 4 E MAP Attributes 77 Panel Y MAP LabelPro MAP Location S MAP Measurement F MAP Selections S MAP Stylesheets Q MAP Views Spatial Database MAP Attributes 7 Replicate attribute data to compound path sub components Default string size ase Default decimal count 6 30 C
269. hentication is not possible USING IMPORT BASIC ESRI ARCSDE SERVER In the Simple Import or the Advanced Import gt Add dialog box set the Format drop down list to Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server The format has to be set because the item Auto detect format will not work for Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Click the Browse button to open the Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server browser The Browse Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server dialog box allows to create edit and delete connection parameters to ArcSDE servers and also to load previously selected MAP datasets Most functions are very similar to ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases below are some notes on particularities of the ArcSDE server access Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Connection In MAPublisher users apply the same connection parameters as they do in the ESRI application interface such as ArcCatalog with an exception for SQL Server Express connections Connection name recognizable name in the list of connection Server server name provided by the database administrator Service service name provided by the database administrator e Database name provided by the database administrator User name and password provided by the database administrator Version provided by the database administrator no list of the existing settings on the database are provided Important Note For SQL Server Express Users Some specific settings are required for SQL Server Express connections See section on
270. hentication must be set because it is the authentication of SQL Server Express databases For example the name of the database server with SQL Server Express is MyServer the connections parameters are as follow 242 ArcCatalog gt Database Servers gt Add Database Server Database Server MyServer sqlexpress MAPublisher gt Import ArcSDE Geodatabase gt Server Connection Connection name as desired Server MyServer_SQLEXPRESS gt Service sde sqlserver MyServer sqlexpress Databasename as required Operating System Authentication Version as required Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases Import ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases Select MAP Datasets To make a new selection of feature classes from a ArcSDE Geodatabase click a connection name on the Connections tree of the Browse ArcSDE Geodatabase dialog box and click OK This opens the Select Feature Classes dialog box The Select Feature Classes dialog box for ArcSDE Geodatabases is very similar to the Select Feature Classes dialog box of Personal and File Geodatabases described in the previous section users can directly select one or more feature classes provided that they share the same spatial reference or users can build an SOL query to select a subset of some feature classes and apply spatial filters The particularity of the ArcSDE Geodatabases is that the feature classes selection is saved as a MAP Dataset When making a new selection users can type in a s
271. her an Absolute Path or a Relative Path may be entered An absolute path refers to the full folder directory path e g C folder1 folder2 A relative path refers to the folder path from the current location of the Adobe Illustrator document In the example below the relative path starts from MAPWebAuthor Tutorial Absolute Path example S gt vios Relative Path example C MAPwebAuthor_ Tutorial LJ MAPWebAuthor Tutorial Ha Flash_Canada ai a Flash Canada ai ImageFiles AB png H 8BCpng J WmageFiles AB png Canada png BC png Sines Canada png png MB png NB png NBpng NFpng NFpng NS png NS png NV png Npng i NWT png NWT png ONpn ON png n PEl png H PEl png H QCpng H QCpng SK png SK png YK png s YK png If the Adobe Illustrator file is to be exchanged between computers it is good practice to use a Relative Path to avoid having to reset the link to Source Media Folder when the files are moved Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 183 MAP Web Author Panel Add Edit and Remove Web Tags To add or edit a Web tag select a piece of artwork and click the Edit button in the MAP Web Author panel This opens the Web Tag Dialog where the Web tag settings can be defined When multiple artwork is selected any settings made in the Multiple Web Tag Dialog are applied for all of the selected artwork They may be individually modified by scrolling through the Web tags or at a later time by
272. hich the rules will be implemented in the labeling process Point Labels one label has been reduced in font size due to the implementation of rules then ALL text items will be reduced to that font size in Label Features only Placement Accuracy To quickly generate labels choose Low To force labels within the boundaries of area of complex shape choose High Set all labels to same minimum size If at least one label has been reduced in font size due to the implementation of rules then ALL text items will be reduced to that font 9 Labels curve with lines of latitude Adjust label if larger than area R to a minimum of 5 pt Reduce horizontal scaling to a minimum of 50 Wrap labels that are longer than area Set all labels to the same minimur Point Label Settings Label Position e Label Label Position Choose the position of the label relative to the point symbol Labels curve with lines of latitude Labels curve with lines of latitude For projected layers choose this option to generate curved text on latitude lines 136 Labeling Tools E Use sounding style labels e size Label Features only Use sounding style labels Specific options Centre on Chapter 10 Labelling Functions to label symbols marking a water depth position according to hydrographic conventions See details in this chapter Label Fea
273. hoose the Manually option and browse to the graphic file To use an attribute value containing the path to the graphic file choose the By Attribute option and type the attribute field name into the box The attribute field name must be entered between percent 96 signs e g lmage_File By default the original graphic size is used To change the graphic size enter a new Width and Height into the boxes the width height ratio is maintained The Callout Preview shows the size of the graphic The By Attribute option is not available for Multiple tagging Note The maximum size for a callout is 800 pixels by 800 pixels When this limit is reached graphics are automatically scaled to fit aspect ratio is maintained Add and Edit Contents The Web Tag Dialog provides a series of tools to create HTML tags more quickly The Table title next page shows the tag buttons and functions that are available To insert a tag into the callout editor box click a tag button Then type callout text in between the opening and closing tags Alternatively highlight text with the cursor and click a tag button to wrap tags around it Use the Callout Preview to see how the text links or charts are displayed Aside from the HTML tags the Web Tag Dialog provides a drop down list to pick MAP Attributes visible attributes only Choose an attribute from the drop down list and it will be entered into the callout editor box Note MAP Attributes column names are
274. hould be labeled Options are None Latitude Longitude Latitude amp Longitude i Place labels off line by Select a distance off the grid to place the If the Center Axes and X or Axis style lists do not contain a recently created character style simply return to the Character Style panel double click this style and click OK in the Character Style Options dialog box This forces Adobe Illustrator to re load the list of character styles Number of Columns and Rows Select _ 9 By Number of Columns Rows this option to create a grid with the specified number of rows and columns Line Style Select a graphic style 5 for the grid axis Draw Border Check this option tO M Draw Border f draw the grid border frame and select a graphic style for it 164 Grids and Graticules Index Grid Settings Grid Dimensions Columns 10 iB Width 72 0000 pt Rows 10 Height 72 0000 pt V Partial cells get labeled e Minimum size of cells 10 Grid Style Options L e Line Style MAP Grid Style MAP Grid Style E Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes By Cell Size in Page Units e labels i Number of decimals Specify the number of decimals i Labels values Select the type i of labels to display distances i measured from the lower left
275. how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import Group Entities Group entities by Layer Name or Geometry Hatches Check this box if you want MAPublisher to read your hatch patterns upon import White Lines and Fills Enabling the Import as is option will instruct MAPublisher to import the data true to the original colour settings contained in the file Check the Change white lines and fills to black box to import black lines instead of the files native white lines Check the Create black background option to incorporate a layer containing a black background to mimic the AutoCAD environment A1 2 DELIMITED ASCII TEXT CSV TSV TXT An ASCII file containing a tabular data where delimiters separate the columns and rows Common delimiters are commas spaces or tabs Microsoft Excel and many other spreadsheet programs will export data in these formats Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions csv tsv txt Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support No Elliptical Arc o Generic Colour Support No Ellipses o Spatial Index Never Polygon No Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon No Point Yes Line o Text o Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import Axis Column Sp
276. ht i Regine cutn nodas to the size of capital letters F pixels pixels pixels Buffer Settings Set a buffer size around the text box 11 lt gt 4 Replace existing knockouts Choose this option to clear the existing knockouts in the Feature Layer before adding new ones Do not choose this option to append new knockouts to the existing ones FUNCTIONALITY The Create Knockouts function masks parts of line features that are covered by text The knockouts can be created on L Line layers only All lines in the selected feature layer are affected by the function A knockout is created for all text present in the selected T Text layer K ing Street _ Line Feature Line feature being masked Text Feature Text base for the knockout mask Knockout Knockout extents The opacity of the knockout masks can be set and later modified through the Adobe Illustrator Transparency panel By default the size of the knockouts correspond to the Adobe Illustrator text bounding box that includes ascenders and descenders e g bottom of letter g This size can be increased by adding a buffer in pixels side top and bottom or limited to the height of capital letters The function can either append new knockouts to the selected feature layer or replace the exiting ones Create Knockouts is also used to clear knockouts that were previously created with the function Note Any tex
277. ial Filter The current selection is stored as part of the Spatial Filter for later use fey Attribute Filter the delimiting features are selected based on new attribute filter parameters see Attribute Filter MAP Selection Once the delimiting features are specified additional Options can be set By default all objects contained within the delimiting features will be selected regardless on which layer they belong to The Select From Layer s option can be applied to limit which layers will be included in the final selection To do so click the button to open the Select Layers dialog box Note that MAP Layers and Non MAP Layers are available for selection The Spatial Relationship drop down list offers two options for the selection method e Intersect and contain objects that intersect or are contained within the delimiting features will be selected Fully contained only objects that fully contained within the delimiting features will be selected The option Do not select art on the same layer as the Filter Using art is meant to avoid art that is on the same layer as a delimiting feature from being selected based on that feature For example if the Spatial Relationship is set to Intersect and contain all areas that share a boundary with an area that is a delimiting feature will be selected With this option areas that are on the same layer as the delimiting feature will be excluded from the selection Chapter 11 MAP Selections
278. ibute structure If not disabled a GML validation error You may select this option if the file fails validabon however the attributes wil be read as strings X Y Coordinate Ordering Reverse X Y coords for geodetic coordinates default behaviour Reverse X Y coordinates will be displayed during the import of these files as seen on the right XY Coordinate Ordering Change the order of X and Y coordinates This may help when an external program exports X Y coordinates in reverse Do not reverse XY coordinates Hint Copy your frequently used XSD files to GMLSchema folder in MAPubisher installabon to avoid having to keep them with your GML files MAPublisher A required file could not be found Referenced XML schema file nhn_01AA001_1_0 xsd cannot be found either in the schema repository or its referenced location Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Simple Import 47 ESRI Interchange File Settings Settings Ignore TIC Layer Enable to Le E Ignore TIC layer suppress creating of tic point layer Disable to create a layer holding the registration control points MapInfo TAB and MIF MID Settings Settings Pen and Brush Patterns Enable this box to view the pen and brush pattern 7 Import pens and brush patterns as visible attributes manm values in the imported attribute table Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server ES
279. ic information describing map objects ind An index to a MapInfo tabular DAT file These extensions are added to the base name of the TAB file creating separate physical files that must all reside in the same directory You must select the tab file for import Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions tab dat id map ind Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses Yes Spatial Index Always Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute mapinfo type Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import Import as Visible Attributes Enable this option to view the pen and brush pattern values in the imported attribute table The MAPublisher TAB importer supports the storage of point line polyline arc ellipse rectangle reunded rectangle region polygon and text geometric data in tab files Each geometric entity present in a tab file has display properties such as pen and brush width pattern and colour Supported TAB properties match those described for MID MIF files on the previous page Raster TAB files cannot be imported in MAPublisher A1 8 MICROSTATION DESIGN DGN DGN a
280. ick one or more Select Feature Classes Select Feature Classes MAP Dataset New_Dataset feature classes to import only classes sharing the same original coordinate system spatial reference can be imported together Specify Spatial Filter Click this button to open the Specify Spatial Filter dialog box see Import Personal and File Geodatabases section 9 Select Feature Classes Il SGID93 BIOSCIENCE SWReGAPLandCover IA SGID93 ENERGY EnergyCorridorAreas IL SGID93 ENERGY EnergyCorridorCenterline IA SGID93 ENERGY GeothermalLeases Utah IP SGID93 ENERGY PermittedUraniumMines IP SGID93 ENERGY UraniumMills ll SGID93 ENERGY UraniumDistricts UGS IA SGID93 ENERGY UraniumAreaBoundaries IP SGID93 ENERGY PowerPlants CO2 IL SGID93 ENERGY OilGasPipelines UGS IP SGID93 ENERGY CoalMines UGS IA SGID93 UTILITIES PowerLines 5MileBuffer L INI SGIDO3 LITIL ITIES Powerl ines 10MileRuffer 171 Specify Spatial Filter SQL Query Click this option to open the Create SQL Select Query dialog box see Import Personal and File Geodatabases section MAP Dataset Edit the name of the s5 SQL Query Edit ArcSDE Geodatabase MAP Dataset Edit ArcSDE Geodatabase MAP Dataset MAP Dataset The new name will be displayed in the Recent Saved MAP Dataset list of the Browse ArcSDE Geodatabase dialog box Connection Set the name of the connection to
281. id files gsb that are missing These files cannot be distributed by Avenza due to copyright or government regulations and have be acquired separately To find the required file refer to the value column in the Definition tab of the Datum Shift Viewer For example the file nb7783v2 gsb from the datum shift NAD83 CSRS 1 Canada New Brunswick is provided by Natural Resources Canada can provide the grid NTv2 http www geod nrcan gc ca tools outils ntv2_e php Like other databases the columns are re sizable and when column headings are clicked will sort information alphabetically numerically When using the Save button changes are saved in the custom parameter file and when no custom file has previously been loaded to customsystems xml located in the following directory Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista 7 C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In Data Source Files And the default xvw file folder structure is saved as customview xvw located in the following directory Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista 7 C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In The Save As button saves a copy of all the systems default and custom This creates xml and xvw files as well as a copy of geocalc xsd save
282. iew as the Input Point layer which has been joined 122 Chapter 8 Line Functions Join Points Simplify Lines Object gt MAPublisher gt Simplify Lines or MAP Toolbar Simplify Lines Proximity Set the simplification eProximity 0 050000 Kiometer 7 x OK tolerance type or use arrows based on specified units ee cancel Original 13113 Units Select page units or map Vertex Count Shows the original units angular or linear unit list number of vertices of the Simplified 11634 88 depending if the map coordinate selected lines Click the Preview system is projected or geodetic i used for the proximity tolerance button to display the number of MES Se A vertices after simplification E amine apa betwemn see UM FUNCTIONALITY Simplify Lines allows for the simplification or generalization of vector line and area data It uses the popular Douglas Peucker algorithm for removing nodes and vertices during simplification For more information about this algorithm see Appendix A1 Simplify Lines is used to reduce the number of points required to represent a vector encoded line where the lines are approximated by a stream of X Y coordinates The function can be used on L Line or Al Area layers and removes nodes based upon a proximity value in either Page Units or Map Units The list of Map Units depends on the MAP View coordinate system e g angular units page units degree
283. import process users can enter four coordinate points in any coordinates system unit to limit the geographic area for the data being imported see next section SQL Queries During the import process users can use SQL queries on feature classes and tables to limit the objects and attributes to be imported Multiple feature classes can be imported using multiple SQL statements as long as all classes share the same source coordinate system SQL queries can also be used to import a feature class and the attribute information from a related non spatial table To apply SQL queries on multiple feature classes with different source coordinate systems use the Advanced Import and add the feature classes in several Add sessions see chapter 3 for more information on the Advanced Import MAPublisher uses the ESRI libraries to run the SQL queries Please refer to the ESRI documentation for more information on the supported SQL expressions and syntax they can change depending on the Geodatabase and database server type Non Spatial Relationships MAPublisher supports non spatial relationships between feature classes and tables during the import process using SQL queries Here are some examples Query Result Import and inner join a feature class to a related table only SELECT FROM Feature_Class Table WHERE FeatureClass ld Table d i MA A features with entries in the related table are imported SELECT FROM Feature_Class Table WHERE
284. imported if enabled in Import MAP Data MApublisher Preferences Extents Displays the lower left LL and upper right UR coordinates XY of the dataset extents i Add Allows the selection of files for import by opening the Advanced Import Data 1 Source function see below i Remove Removes selected 1 files from the list present in the File List and New Based On or Use Existing is selected check this box to ensure the imported artwork fits inside the page extents Create new Allows users to import all ofthe files in a new coordinate system Click the Editor button to open the MAP View Editor see chapter 4 RELATED TOOLS Advanced Import Data Source Accessed via the Add or Edit button in Advanced Import Details Displays details of currently selected file Coordinate System Unit Page Anchors Scale Map Anchors and Rotation r Format Select the data type Add you wish to import This drop down list shows all MAPublisher supported data Format ESRI Shapefile shp y Settings types Dataset Tutorial Guide amp Data Tutorial Data southchinasea shp Browse eme Cx Edit Allows editing of the selected file by re opening the Simple Import Data i Source function see below Settings Opens Settings dialog box for file formats that requires the input of extra parameters such as
285. in document units The grid dimension can be either calculated from the specified number of columns and rows or by Cell Size in Page Units Finally graphic styles for the grid lines and border and character styles for labels may be specified Note The page units are specified in the Adobe Illustrator document setup main menu File gt Document Setup The Cell Size in Page Units option may result in partial cells being created By default the labeling of these partial cells is enabled in order to include them in the indexing process uncheck the Partial cells get labeled check box to disable this option The Minimum size of cells drop down list is used to set the minimum size of the partial cells to be labeled cells that are smaller than this minimum will not get labeled and will not be used as a base for indexes GRATICULES The Graticules option permits grid lines to be placed at specific intervals of latitude and longitude in degrees Specify the interval for lines of latitude and longitude and as required a latitude and longitude value to pass through Use the vertices slider to increase or decrease the number of vertices used in the graticules if required use a higher number if the graticules are highly curved due to the current projection To control which axis are to be labeled set the following features Don t label allows not labeling a specific column or row first or last row or column If line does not hit bounds
286. in encrypted formats Only non encrypted files can be imported in MAPublisher from NOAA or USACE for example A1 10 TIGER LINE RT1 BW1 Topologically Integrated Geographic Encoding and Referencing TIGER TIGER is the United States Census Bureau format for its digital database of geographic features TIGER includes both land attributes such as roads buildings rivers and lakes as well as areas such as counties ZIP codes census tracts and census blocks Some of the geographic areas represented in TIGER are political areas including counties congressional districts school districts and ZIP codes Others are statistical areas including Metropolitan Statistical Areas MSA census tracts census block groups and census block The database contains information about these features such as their location in latitude and longitude the name the type of feature address ranges for most streets the geographic relationship to other features and other related information More information on the TIGER Line file format and data product can be found on the U S Census web page at http www census gov geo www tiger This web site contains a detailed description of the current TIGER Line format with an explanation of field meaning for each feature type A detailed description of the TIGER Line 1998 format with an explanation of field meaning for each feature type is available at http www census gov geo www tiger tiger98 pdf Supported
287. in most cartographic projects Even though the current list of systems is comprehensive there may be instances where the end users may wish to add a brand new coordinate system to meet their particular needs or perhaps to duplicate and modify an existing definition to change the units for example A complementary Avenza Projections Guide is installed with MAPublisher It describes all the projections and datum shifts methods supported by MAPublisher to assist users in the process of creating or editing a coordinate system The default parameters installed with MAPublisher are stored within read only XML database files referred to as the Geodetic Datasource files named geodata xml and avenza xsp The base datasource files shipped with MAPublisher are installed in the Data Source Files folder at the following location Windows XP C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files Windows Vista 7 C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In Data Source Files Custom definitions and parameters are saved or loaded from separate XML files that must always accompanied with a file named geocalc xsd when not present this file can be copied from the Data Source Files folder The custom and read only entries are organized into categories and sub folders users may create new folders move entries or create short cuts That folder structure is saved in a view file xvw
288. in the NAME column AND values less than one million in the POPULATION column are selected MAP STYLESHEET Expression NAME Ontario Result All items with the value Ontario in the NAME column are assigned the selected style POPULATION lt 1000000 All items with values less than one million in the POPULATION column are assigned the selected style NAME Ontario OR NAME Alberta NAME Ontario AND POPULATION lt 1000000 All items with the value Ontario OR Alberta in the NAME column are assigned the selected style Only items containing the value Ontario in the NAME column AND values less than one million in the POPULATION column are assigned the selected style 86 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Expression Builder EDIT SCHEMA Expression Result LOWER NAME applied to column name All items in column name are assigned the value of the column NAME in lower case e g ontario for Ontario PROPER name applied to column Proper name All items in Proper name are assigned the value of the column name in proper case or capital case e g Ontario for ontario TRIM JOINING COLUMN All items are trimmed with all spaces except single ones between words e g Route 66 becomes Route 66 This is particularly useful prior to using the Join Table function because extra spaces at the beginning end or in between w
289. inates Line vertices Enter here the point coordinates of each line vertex Method Choose the distance i method 1 Cartesian distance in the i map projection Geodesic shortest distance i along the Earth s curvature Rhumb Line distance along the Earth curvature at constant heading North Type In the Cartesian i method choose one of the north options which headings are measured from 1 Grid North north along the map projection straight up on the map True North actual north direction as given by a north arrow Unit Select the linear unit for distances i Direction Choose Clockwise or Counter clockwise for the direction of the heading value 115 Line Plotter FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Line Plotter creates a new path to a L Line or A il Area layer Enter line vertices using two options e Point by Point enter a starting point and consecutive point coordinates Course amp Distance enter a starting point and a series of headings angles and real world distances Each consecutive vertex is defined at an angle and distance from the previous point Additional options are available for angle and distance definitions see hereafter The created path is made of straight segments connecting the points True North PREREQUISITES A L Line or A Area layer must be selected before starting this function As required fir
290. ine each consecutive line vertex by its heading azimuth or angle relative to the north direction and real world distance from the previous point The Method drop down list offers three options to define the real world distances e artesian Distances in the map projection They represent the distances as measured on the map and multiplied by the scale This option is only available if the layer s coordinate system is projected Geodesic Shortest distances along the Earth s curvature Geodesic distances are also known as Great Circle distances and are typically used for navigational purpose maps They represent the actual covered distance while walking or in a moving vehicle RhumbLine Distance along the Earth curvature at constant heading They are typically used for navigational purpose maps to represent routes of constant direction Note Once the next vertex position is calculated on the map the path segment is the straight connection between the points The paths are not drawn curved to follow geodesic or rhumb lines Chapter 8 Line Functions 117 Line Plotter The North Type drop down list contains two options to define the north direction when the method is set to Cartesian e Grid North Refers to the northward direction of the map projection grid lines Grid North is constant throughout the map e True North Refers to the actual direction to the geographic North Pole The True North direction can vary depending on a point pos
291. ine the object s parameters Parameters are specific to each object type Specific definition tabs per object are described here after Angular Units For angular units the new unit must be defined as a division of the scientific standard Degrees The abbreviation is used to identify the unit within the application interface Example The abbreviation for Degrees is deg Angular Unit Editor Identification Definition Abbreviation ArcMinute Units Per Degree 60 ok JL oes Angular Units Editor Definition A2 7 Coordinate Points For Coordinate Points you must specify the coordinate point dimensions in either 2D or 3D For Geodetic and Projected Coordinate Points the Longitude and Latitude style of units must be entered for all 2D Dimensional Points The Longitude Latitude and Ellipsoid Height style of units must be entered for 3D Dimensional Points Geodetic Point Style Editor tg amp Projected Point Style Editor t3 Identification Definition Identification Definition Dimensions Dimensions 2D Os On Q3 Longitude East Label Geodetic longitude Label Easting Units Degree BE Units Meter E BE Latitude North Label Geodetic latitude Label Northing Units Degree BT Units Meter Ja Height Label Height Units Meter BE Le Le Geodetic Point Style Editor Projected Point Style Ed
292. ined objects on the pane to the right New folders or sub folder can be created by clicking the New Folder button The default name is New Folder right click and click Rename to type in another name Only empty user defined folders can be deleted using the Delete Folder button amp Recently used objects are listed under the Recent sub folder of each object category To clear this list right click on the Recent folder name and choose Clear Recent Object History The Search Results sub folder contains the recent search results To run a query use the Search frame enter a text string and specify a category specific parameter to search from e g Name EPSG Code in the n drop down list To find the containing sub folder of an object found by a search query right click the object and click the menu Open Containing Folder To clear this list right click on the Search Result folder name and choose Clear Search History A2 5 The right hand pane lists the objects contained in the sub folder selected in the Folder list on the left For all objects users can copy query or use drag and drop to move or create a short cut Only custom objects written in blue can be edited or deleted default objects installed with MAPublisher in black and indicated with a lock icon are read only Incomplete objects are indicated in red with an exclamation mark warning icon Particularly some of the default datum shifts are pointing to external gr
293. information to vector map data The Export Image filter exports raster images with various georeferenced formats Georeferencing information for raster images are usually stored in a separate text file where the image and its associated reference file have the same file name but a different file extension The reference file formats that can be read by Register Image or written to by Export Image are World tfw Image Report irp MapInfo TAB tab Blue Marble Reference rsf ER Mapper ERS ers ListGeo 1go GeoTIFF tif contains both the image and reference data Topics covered in this section Register Image Export Image Chapter 12 Working With Images 155 Tie Points Change the tie point of the image by clicking another corner of the graphic Image Size Specify the size of each pixel in the selected map unit updates the Effective Map Size Register Image supports non square pixels Constrain Proportions Check this option to keep the pixel proportions Effective Map Size X Y Specify the X and Y size of the image in map units updates the Pixel Size Editing these options is not required when using the Load File function Create new MAP View Create a new Register Image Object MAPublisher Register Image or MAP Toolbar EA Register Image i Register Image Upper Left Placement X 488415 857391819 m Pr Y 5460814 46391849 m Imag
294. ing configuration the access to files with Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server connections is limited compared to the ESR ArcSDE Geodatabase connections as explained later in this chapter Note If ArcReader is not installed on the default installation directory it might be necessary to edit the binary location in the MAPublisher Preferences Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Editor see chapter 1 MAPublisher supports all ArcSDE server connections and SQL queries supported by ESRI on the user s system Note MAPublisher supports 9 2 and higher Geodatabases However there are some limitations to the direct connections from 9 2 clients to the ArcSDE 9 3 Geodatabases Please refer to ESRI documentation on software requirements service pack etc and limitations SUPPORTED FEATURES Data Types The following is a list of supported and unsupported Geodatabase geometry types for import in MAPublisher Supported Point Polyline Polygon Circular Arc Elliptical Arc Bezier Curve Annotations Upon import MAPublisher will convert the arc to a line wherein a series of vertices will maintain the geometry e Unsupported Raster Grids MultiPatch Dimensions Note To import a geometry type that requires the use of a Representation in ArcGIS such as Bezier curves the Behavior when Representation Geometry is Edited must be set to Change the geometry of the supporting feature option specified when creating a new Representat
295. ing exchange format files which are large and ASCII representations of the binary DWG drawing files Logically both files are identical and therefore MAPublisher treats both file types in the same manner AutoCAD files consist of drawing settings and configurations as well as a series of entities or graphic elements organized into layers MAPublisher provides broad support for many AutoCAD entity types and options Prior to import set the colour mode of the Adobe Illustrator document to the same scheme used in the colour table of the CAD file i e RGB or CMYK to ensure colours are imported correctly Note the hierarchy of layers in multi feature imports is by feature type text layers then point then line then area layers Digital Line Graph dlg opt Import only The USGS United States Geological Survey DLG file structure is designed to accommodate categories of spatial data represented on a conventional line map Node point line and area data types are accepted The attribute coding scheme is designed to accommodate basic cartographic data categories such as hypsography hydrography or political and cultural features as well as additional thematic data categories Delimited Text Data txt csv tsv Import and Export MAPublisher also supports the import of Delimited Text Data held in a variety of tabular file formats as long as the data contains coordinate values File types supported are Text txt Tab
296. ining how successful the labeling operation was based on the number of labels written to Destination and Suppression layers It may help indicate whether adjustments to the rule base are required to achieve a higher rate of successful placement Statistics reports may be saved as a text file for future reference 230 Chapter 18 MAP LabelPro Label Verification MAPublisher Spatial Database Spatial databases are optimized data repositories for spatial data storage and management Many GIS environments use spatial databases to easily access and manage GIS data in a central location MAPublisher can import ESRI single user and multi user Geodatabases Personal File and ArcSDE Geodatabases and direct access to ArcSDE server The MAPublisher Spatial Database importer is built on ESRI software libraries and as such requires a valid ESRI software and license installed on the computer ArcGIS 9 2 and higher MAPublisher Spatial Database functions are available on Windows operating systems only Topics covered in this section Overview Import ESRI Personal and File Geodatabases Import ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases ee OSO M y g Import from Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server menue reme A s lt wos ous j AN ie z 4 uc a F we D n S Ay li at hasa kmiem ff gg pos La r MP e Y Qa jw AS I E ie CUN UR l Y AL hod y Tarawan i amp r d im b H D lbcrwaeraw rom is 7 rege Ee Chapter 19 Import
297. ion angle of the MAP View Click to reset to 0 click Ix to orient the MAP View north up Perform Coordinate System Transformation Enable this option to transform the data to a new i coordinate system Same as Check this option to transform to a coordinate system used by another MAP View in the 7 Show Anchors Name USA MAP View scale 1 32000000 000000 t degrees Angle 0 00 Zoom buttons zoom in out Center current MAP View extents fit preview to the extents of MAP View Center active artboard fit preview to the extents of the artboard Pan Preview Mode pan around the preview pane Move MAP View Mode move the position of the current MAP View Previews and Configure Previews Select and configure how the previews are shown i Page Alignement Affects the position of the Page Anchor LLX LLY Position of the lower left corner of the data in document units Page Alignment LLX 89 100044 jp OOO LLY 131 849518 pt Ooo Source Coordinate System United States Lambert Conformal Conic meter Destination No Coordinate System Specified alaska Sameas Perform Coordinate System Transformation Alignment Control Click a position on the grid to control the alignment of the data extent relative to the page e g center middle upper right E amp seesty Fr
298. ion in ArcGIS Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases 233 Overview Aliases ArcGIS users can give the feature classes an alias that acts as an alternate name Unlike feature class names aliases can contain spaces punctuations and start with a number In ArcMap feature classes are referred to with their alias name In ArcCatalog feature classes are represented by their true names In the MAPublisher Preferences for Spatial Database gt ESRI Geodatabase Editor users can specify to use aliases for layer names r MAPublisher Preferences foo Expression Builder Spatial Database gt ESRI Geodatabase Editor General Cx Import Map Data V Use alias as layer name MAP Attributes 7 Use abbreviated table name for layer name MAP LabelPro Display coded domain subtype description Instead MAP Location ES Q MAP Measurement Load subtypes as separate layers f MAP Selections MAP Stylesheets MAP Views 4 Spatial Database E Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Editor E ESRI Geodatabase Editor E General Spatial Database Editor Sort feature datasets alphabetically when selecting for import Sort feature classes alphabetically when selecting for import Sort attributes alphabetically when selecting for import Automatically connect to v Note Aliases for attribute field names are imported as Display Name and true field names as Name of MAP Attributes columns Subtypes and Attribute domains Subt
299. ion reported by the GPS device The plotted point is reflective of the settings specified under the Manual Plot section of the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel i e using the specified scale and point symbol When Manual Plot is clicked a single point will be plotted either on an existing point layer if selected or on a new layer which is automatically created if a point layer is not selected If the Adobe Illustrator document does not contain any MAP View a new one is created in the WGS84 geodetic coordinate system Plot By Time This method plots a single point each time the specified time interval is observed The time interval is displayed in the MAP GPS Point Plot settings panel along with other settings such as scale and point symbol Plot By Distance This method plots a single point each time the specified distance interval is observed The distance interval is displayed in the MAP GPS Point Plot settings panel along with other settings such as scale and point symbol Start Route This method creates a line feature for all valid information received by the GPS Line styling is determined by the Graphic Style selected in the Adobe Illustrator Graphic Styles panel Chapter 16 MAP GPS 203 MAP GPS Panel MAP GPS Panel Menu Accessed from the MAP GPS Panel Many of the MAP GPS features can be accessed via the MAP GPS panel options menu These features include Device Settings Point Plot Settings Autosave Settings Edit User Attribu
300. ions It is also possible to customize the visibility and zoom of each layer Double click Double Click Here To Set Layer Options to access the Layer Export Options dialog box Initial Visibility Show or hide the layer when the map is first loaded in a Web browser Zoom Range Visibility By default the layer is always shown Choose a zoom level range for the layer to be visible within When the layer is outside the zoom range it is hidden Static Content Layer By default the layer will be affected by pan and zoom Choose the second option so that a static layer is not affected by pan and zoom Map Settings Layer Export Options Layer Export Options e Initial Visibility ca Show the layer when the map is initially loaded Hide the layer when the map is initially loaded e Zoom Range Visibility Always show the layer 7 Only show the layer at zoom levels From 100 To 500 Static Content Layer Pan and zoom the layer in the viewer The layer will not be affected by panning and zooming Use these settings to change how the Flash map is displayed in a Web browser Change the width and height of the Flash map It cannot be larger than the Adobe Illustrator document Click the Set To Artboard button to reset the width and height to its original values Setthe initial position of the Flash map upon load using Pan X and Pan Y if zoomed in Setthe initial z
301. ions have been set click the Preview button to display a preview of the result The Grids and Graticules dialog box can be minimized in the preview mode by clicking Hide In Preview Grids and Gratic OK Creates the grid on the artboard mer and closes the dialog box Cancel Closes the dialog box without creating a grid Restore Restores the full size Grids and Graticules dialog box to further edit the parameters Click OK to create the grid or Restore to return to setting up the parameters The grid is plotted on the legend layer using the entered parameters Once the grid is added on the artboard use the bounding box of the generated grid View Show Bounding Box to resize if required Re sizing grids horizontally or vertically adds removes or re sizes index grid component cells in the grid After transforming a MAP View containing a grid the grid will be transformed and rescaled within its current bounds the physical extents of the grid on the page is not edited in which case the grid has to be resized manually To change any parameter without generating a new grid simply select the grid and access the Object Edit Grid Edit Graticules menu item This re opens the Grids and Graticules dialog box populated with the current parameters of the grid All parameters can be edited even the grid type selection IMPORTANT NOTES Manually editing text position font color etc is not possible on grids and
302. ip Lines tool useful for road mapping applications Easily join lines and points to create seamless datasets In addition simplify lines to reduce the amount of vertex points while retaining spatial referencing Topics covered in this section Buffer Art Line Plotter Flip Lines Join Lines Join Points Simplify Lines x w RIS gt ea WNE ASA Chapter 8 Line Functions 113 Buffer Art Object gt MAPublisher gt Buffer Art or MAP Toolbar A Buffer Art Source Layer Specify the layer to base the buffer art on To buffer only Source imc selected art on the specified layer e Layer IL usroads line E check the option below it Wok wie REIS Static Value Enter a specific 5 Buffer Width value and choose appropriate units to buffer the art by 9 Static value 100 000000 X Units Select a unit to use for the Attribute value I id D ent U buffer values The default is the Attribute Value Buffer by values contained in an attribute table current map unit Destination Existing Layer A Lowe Destination Select the Area layer Newlayer Buffered art Al which will hold the buffered T eel ei bn eee ee ee sie objects or choose to create a new layer Options Apply Style Enable to choose a J Graphic Style to apply to the buffer e E Apply style Concentric Rings Enable to apply evenly spaced
303. it Choose Update to update all of the legacy text now Choose OK to update the text later Choose Cancel to cancel opening the file C o of Update Cancel Legacy Text Conversion MAPublisher has detected that this document contains legacy Illustrator text art Update Illustrator will not recognize such text as true text art until that art is converted j and MAPublisher will not display attributes for legacy text art If you decide not to convert the text at this time and instead opt to convert it M D n manually at a later time be aware that Illustrator s legacy text conversion process l iIDlisher does NOT preserve attributes for converted text art Update e Altext art of MAPublisher text art only y Nothing New Document Format Adobe Illustrator CS3 CS4 CS5 Chapter 1 Getting Started 19 MAPublisher Compatibility Notes MAPublisher License Management MAPublisher will fail to function until activated The following instructions are for the activation of single user licenses of MAPublisher 8 only If you have purchased a floating license please refer to the floating license installation guide provided with your purchase MAPublisher 8 is available in both single user and floating license configurations Floating licenses are designed to allow an organization to deploy a specific number of licenses that can be used and shared on any number of computers over a netwo
304. ition on a map Similarly graticule longitude lines are pointing to True North as well as MAP North Arrows see chapter 14 Note The Geodesic and Rhumb Line methods are by definition using the True North as northward direction The North Type drop down list is therefore disabled in these cases The Units drop down list allows to select a linear unit for the distance By default the Units list is set to the Point Units ofthe current layer s coordinate system if it is projected If the current layer s coordinate system is geodesic the Units list is set to Meters The Direction drop down list indicates the direction of the heading angles Typically navigational headings or azimuths are given in Clockwise direction However the natural angle direction in Adobe Illustrator is Counter clockwise which may be preferred for simple drawing purpose Once all options are set click the 9 button to create a new entry of heading and distance To remove an entry select a row and click the 9 button 118 Chapter 8 Line Functions Line Plotter Flip Lines Object gt MAPublisher gt Flip Lines or MAP Toolbar FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher Flip Lines reverses the endpoints of a line or an area open or closed path Adobe Illustrator Brushes and Type on a Path tools are designed to position patterns and text depending on the direction of the endpoints Two consequences of this are e A Labels are placed upside down and backward when using
305. itor Datum Shifts For Datum Shifts you must select an Envelope appropriate geographic area of use If you are unsure of a more specific envelope leave it se to the default World Envelope The Source and Target text boxes are used to specify the two geodetic models the Transformation is valid for The Method specifies the necessary parameters to define a particular datum transformation With the proper method selected enter the appropriate parameters for your datum transformation Be sure to define the appropriate units for each parameter by clicking the Units button A2 8 amp Datum Shift Editor t3 pus Identification j Definition Envelope Ethiopia J 63 Source Adindan um ls Target WGS 1984 m Method GeocentricTranslation v Parameter Value Units amp 355 C me a 26 Cancel ae J Datum Shift Editor Ellipsoids For Ellipsoids you must enter the parameters for the Semi Major Axis and Semi Minor Axis often noted as a and b respectively define the linear units the axes are specified in by selecting a predefined unit in the appropriate fields The Inverse Flattening often noted as 1 f will automatically calculate in the field below Alternately you can make the Inverse Flattening definitive by enabling the check box at the bottom You can then manually enter the Inverse Flattening rather than the Semi Minor Axis parameter Ellipsoid Editor t3
306. itor E General Spatial Database Editor MAPublisher Preferences are saved within the Adobe Illustrator preference file called A Prefs Windows or Adobe Illustrator Prefs Mac OS which is launched each time Adobe Illustrator is started Therefore MAPublisher Preferences are not file dependent Note The Adobe Illustrator preference file is located in following directory Windows XP C Documents and Settings user profile Application Data Adobe Adobe Illustrator CSX Settings AlPrefs Windows Vista 7 C Users user AppData Roaming Adobe Adobe Illustrator CSX Settings AlPrefs Mac OS X Users username Library Preferences Adobe Illustrator CSX Settings Adobe Illustrator Prefs OPEN MAPUBLISHER PREFERENCES MAPublisher Preferences can be opened from the Adobe Illustrator main menu Edit gt MAPublisher Preferences Windows or Illustrator gt MAPublisher Preferences Mac OS X from the panel options menu of the following MAPublisher panels MAP Attributes MAP Selection Filters MAP Stylesheets and MAP Views and from double click of the tools buttons MAP Location and MAP Measurement When opened through the Adobe Illustrator menu MAPublisher Preferences opens up with no category selected When started from a specific MAPublisher panel options menu MAPublisher Preferences open on the current panel property sheet All preferences shown here are the default settings 28 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher Preferen
307. its for your system For most systems you will want to select Projected point in appropriate units Then select the Geodetic model that using the appropriate datum for your system When you select the appropriate Projection for your system the parameters needed to define the system will appear in the table below Enter the needed parameters and define the units each parameter is specified in Note Information on supported projections and their parameters can be found in the document MAPublisher Projections Guide pdf installed with MAPublisher amp Geodetic Coordinate System Editor Juidentifications Definition Envelope World by country tJ 63 Point Style geographic 3D tJ 69 Datum WGS 1984 eJ 63 Vertical Reference J NCHM NC T Geodetic Coordinate System Editor A2 12 amp Projected Coordinate System Editor t3 Identification Definition Envelope sphere 168 W to 162 W by country im Point Style Projected Point in Meters Gm Geodetic WGS 84 J Projection Transverse Mercator v Parameter Value Units central meridian 165 Degree false easting 500000 Meter false northing 0 Meter latitude_of_origin 0 Degree scale factor 0 9996 Projected Coordinate System Editor CREATE EDIT AND DELETE GEODETIC DATASOURCE OBJECTS Creating A New Object Category 1 Select Edit Custom Coordinate Sy
308. ker at the University of Ottawa in 1970 71 It was extensively tested in 1972 and was publicly communicated in the following article Algorithms for the Reduction of the Number of Points Required to Represent a Digitized Line or Its Caricature Canadian Cartographer Vol 10 No 2 December 1973 A1 24 BEZIER CURVES AND OTHER MAPUBLISHER OPERATIONS Bezier curves are defined using four control points Two of these are the end points of the curve while the other two effectively define the gradient at the end points These two points control the shape of the curve The curve is actually a blend of the control points This is a recurring theme of approximation curves defining a curve as a blend of the values of several control points Most GIS formats do not usually support Bezier curves used in graphics packages such as Adobe Illustrator As such you will typically find that curved sections of GIS data will be composed of a series of small line segments rather than an actual curve This is also how such features will first appear in Adobe Illustrator when imported with MAPublisher The Adobe Illustrator Object gt Path gt Simplify filter can be used to convert this type of feature into a Bezier curve see chapter 8 If Bezier curves are exported from Adobe Illustrator using any of the MAPublisher Export filters they will be converted to link and node topology i e the end points of the curve will simply be joined as straight lines It is therefo
309. kly create expressions use Simple Detailed expressions can be created using Advanced Expressions See chapter 5 for more information about the Expression Builder and chapter 11 for MAP Selection Filters Note Property and read only attributes cannot be selected in the Simple Expression mode To use property and read only attribute values use the Advanced option 130 Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheet Editor Simple Expressions The Simple Expression panel is intended to facilitate quick expression generation First select an attribute column from the drop down list or manually type in a name Secondly choose a Comparison There are six operators available gt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to lt Less than lt Less than or equal to Equalto l Not equal to Finally select the Value against which the comparison will be applied Select the value from the drop down list or enter the value manually Similarly the value does not have to appear in the list to be valid To create an expression based on a range click the Range operator check box to enable an additional Comparison and Value input pair If the operator Equal to e g Attribute1 A is selected and a new rule is added the new expression will be automatically written using the same attribute Equal to the next value on the list e g Attribute1 B This may be helpful when creating direct one to one relationship rules This does not occur with the
310. l The Adobe Illustrator native postscript file format Refer to the Adobe Illustrator User Guide for more information DOQ Digital Orthophoto Quadrangle DOQ are geographic images from the United States Geological Survey USGS and are stored in the JPG format They can be placed by Adobe Illustrator and registered by the MAPublisher Register Image filter DOQ are usually very large files 30 40 MB or more and will require extremely large amounts of RAM DRG Digital Raster Graphics DRG are scanned images of published topographic maps from the USGS stored in TIF format They can be placed by Adobe Illustrator and registered by the MAPublisher Register Image filter DRG are also usually very large files 30 40 MB or more and will require extremely large amounts of RAM for any manipulation within Adobe Illustrator EPS The Encapsulated Post Script EPS file is used to transfer PostScript language artwork between applications also see PostScript in the glossary section of the User Guide EPS files are easily opened by Adobe Illustrator because the format is widely supported by most graphics programs It is the preferred format for export to most illustration and page layout programs EPS files are by their nature vector based but can contain embedded raster graphics and fonts GIF Graphic Interchange Format GIF is a colour indexed graphics format commonly used for web pages and image file transfer Adobe Illustrator can export 8 bit index
311. l Add sessions see chapter 3 for more information on Advanced Import functionality The feature classes objects and attributes are imported on separated MAP layers The layer naming convention is set in the MAPublisher Preferences for Spatial Databases gt ESRI Geodatabase Editor USING IMPORT ESRI PERSONAL AND FILE GEODATABASES In the Simple Import or the Advanced Import gt Add dialog box set the Format drop down list to ESRI Personal Geodatabase or ESRI File Geodatabase Personal Geodatabases can be selected with the lt Auto detect format gt option but not File Geodatabases because they are directories Click the Browse button and select a file with the extension mdb Personal Geodatabase or a directory with the extension gdb File Geodatabase only one Geodatabase can be accessed at a time Click the Open button to finalize the selection This opens the Select Feature Classes dialog box for the selection of the specific feature classes to be imported Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases 237 Import ESRI Personal and File Geodatabases Select Feature Classes In the Select Feature Classes dialog box users have the option to directly import one or more feature classes or to build SQL queries to select subsets of feature classes For a direct selection of feature classes click the names of the feature classes to import selected classes are highlighted To deselect a class click the selected name Finally click OK to
312. l size of text the bounding box of the text is used for the selection Do not select art on the same layer as the Filter Using art Check this option so as not to select art that is on the same layer delimiting feature Add Adds the current artboard selection to the saved Art Selection 9 Spatial Filter Iter Using Choose where the features Spatial Filter hat delimit the spatial filter are taken Type om Y Existing MAP Selection select a MAP Selection name from the Existing MAP Selection drop down list Filter Using f Existing MAP Selection Existing MAP Selection f My MAP Selection Art Selection use the current art selection see options above for edit fox Attribute Filter enter new attribute filter parameters see Attribute Filter dialog box above Options w e Select From Layers Choose the layer s to select from By default the selection will be done on all layers Select From Layer s lt All layers Spatial Relationship Intersect and contain First letter of text E Click to make a different choice in mv Do not select art on the same layer as the Filter Using art the Select Layers dialog box see above Chapter 11 MAP Selections and Operations 149 MAP Selections FUNCTIONALITY The MAP Selections panel provides options to build edit save and apply multiple selection criteria b
313. label None Latitude Longitude or Latitude amp Longitude choose to label or not label curved lines that do not intersect with the grid extents applies even if the line hits the grid border but not the bounding box None Lat Lng or Both axis labels a click on the axis in the label placement control switches the label caption from off text grayed out Lat Lng or Both This is useful for rotated grids or for labels of curved lines Finally graphic styles for the grid lines and border and character styles for labels may be specified 166 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes Grids and Graticules MEASURED GRIDS The Measured Grid option creates a grid based on a grid cell size specified in real world units when the current MAP View is in a projected coordinate system The size is specified in the Width and Height text boxes the map units can be specified in the Units list The grid position can be specified as relative to the page extent Preset Origin or by entering an X Y position Grid Pass Through Point Finally graphic styles for the grid lines and border and character styles for labels may be selected Measured grids may contain partial cells By default the labeling of these partial cells is enabled in order to include them in the indexing process clear the Partial cells get labeled check box to disable this option The Minimum size of cells drop down list is used to set the minimum size of the partial cells to be labeled
314. lasses and non spatial tables of geodatabases ArcSDE File and Personal If the Data type drop down list is set to ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabase click the Browse button to select the ArcSDE server connection and then select the appropriate feature class or non spatial table If the Data type drop down list is set to ESRI File Geodatabase or ESRI Personal Geodatabase click the Browse button to select a feature class or non spatial table Please refer to chapter 19 for information on ArcSDE server connection and feature class selection The attribute selection is the same as for Files source data Destination The Target Layer is specified under the Destination section Choose an attribute from the Matching Column drop down list This column must match the format and values as the column chosen as the Source Matching Column Additional Option If the Case sensitive when matching option is checked the column entries from the two matching columns will only be matched by case If the Add matching column from source option is checked the source column is also imported and the column name is appended with the number 1 The Update existing columns instead of adding columns when possible option attempts to update attributes instead of appending more columns to the table RESULTS The data table is added to the attribute table on the destination MAP Layer and may be viewed in the MAP Attributes panel Notice that the matching column in the data table has a
315. le gt Place The image is placed on the artboard but is not spatially referenced at this point it needs to be registered With an image selected choose Object gt MAPublisher gt Register Image or click the Register Image button EY on the MAPublisher toolbar Notes The image can be placed to a MAP layer containing artwork but it is recommended to use a specific layer dedicated only to the image registration for better layer management and workflow When placing an image directly onto a MAP Layer it is recommended to place image on Area Line or Point layers not Legend or Text so that the image can be moved and scaled together with the MAP Vlew transforming an image is not supported on any layer type When placing an image do not use the Convert Layers to Objects option It will treat images that may have multiple layers as grouped objects and will prevent it from being registered properly USING REGISTER IMAGE If the image is placed on a MAP Layer the Register Image automatically registers the image using the coordinate system of the MAP View containing that MAP Layer If the image is placed on a non MAP Layer the Undefined Layer dialog box opens Select to create a new MAP View or to use an existing MAP View if it is certain that the coordinate system of this MAP View matches the one of the image In both cases the feature type must be specified indifferent if the layer only contains the image Note It is recommende
316. le name e g file csv Users have the following options to set Export all attributes or visible attributes only Set field delimiter in the exported text file to Comma Semi Colon Space or Tab Export or not the column names on the first line RESULTS A delimited text file is created according to the specified settings Text attributes type String are exported in on double quotes and are separated by commas in example below S Style AREA STATE NAME POPULATION Draw Aids1 121757 343000 New Mexico 1819046 true Aids3 264435 873000 Texas 20851820 true Aids1 70003 325000 Oklahoma 3450654 true Jee Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Export Attributes 97 wegian Bay of Biscay mn Napoli Tyrrhenian Sea Plateau du F demeait ALGERIA Plotting Points The ability to place points onto a map is a fundamental part of cartography Points can represent the locations of towns and cities shops and malls airports and train stations and more MAPublisher provides the functionality to create or plot points in vector format There may be times when you wish to quickly add a point or a small group of points to your map but you do not have a GIS or ASCII file containing these points ready for import Alternatively your map may be in a projection that holds coordinates in linear units yet the coordinates of your point locations are in angular units i e
317. le on which to perform a 4 Findwhat Florida T Find Next Find what variable search in the current attribute table Note this list Replace with FL X i ee Replace Replace Replace the selected value with the will also contain previous criteria l replace ej P p P Replace In Replace with variable Replace with Enter a variable on which to replace All Attributes Rs A Replace All Replace all occurrences matching the found items Note this list will also contain T Find what variable previous criteria 2 Just S STATE NAME Find Replace All Attributes Just in Column Perform V Case sensitive e the Find or Find amp Replace on all attributes in the current layer or only in a specified column Case sensitive If checked only values matching the case of the Find what variable will be found 7 Match whole word only Match whole word only If checked only words matching the Find what variable will be found words containing the variable will be ignored FUNCTIONALITY The Find amp Replace tool provides settings to search and or replace attribute values and properties contained in the MAP Attributes panel Note that only values in visible columns can be found and or replaced USING FIND amp REPLACE Click the Find amp Replace button at the bottom of the MAP Attributes panel or choose it from the panel options menu Find Only Click the Find tab and enter the search crite
318. lected at once in the Simple Import or Advanced Import gt Add dialog box To import feature classes that do not have matching spatial reference use Advanced Import and add the feature classes in several Add sessions see chapter 3 for more information on the Advanced Import The feature classes objects and attributes are imported on separated MAP layers ArcSDE Geodatabase tables are identified as databaseName userName tableName An abbreviated version using only the table name as layer name can be applied as a preference This option and other layer naming conventions are set in the MAPublisher Preferences for Spatial Databases gt ESRI Geodatabase Editor see chapter 1 and previous section When feature datasets are present in the database MAPublisher uses them to group feature classes per parent feature dataset to ease the selection process but feature datasets are not imported as such As an import setting the feature dataset name may be prepended to the name of the data layer created during import USING IMPORT ESRI ARCSDE GEODATABASES In the Simple Import or the Advanced Import gt Add dialog box set the Format drop down list to ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabase The format has to be set because the item lt Auto detect format gt will not work for ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases Click the Browse button to open the ArcSDE Geodatabase browser The Browse ArcSDE Geodatabase dialog box allows users to create edit and delete connection parameters to A
319. lines point symbols or text style l Y Y Style preview Associated style symbol A Area MAP Stylesheet Legend L Ontario PROV NAME Ontario for the MAP Stylesheet rule Point MAP Stylesheet Legend Q9 Captials CAPITAL Y Rule name name of the MAP IL Line MAP Stylesheet Legend Rivers SYSTEM St Lawrence eee T Text MAP Stylesheet Legend sme Province PROVINCE Y te aoshe n ical Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets 133 Create MAP Stylesheet Legend USING CREATE MAP STYLESHEET LEGEND MAP Stylesheet legends are added to a legend layer a Legend layer must be created first using the Add MAP Layer button in the MAP Views panel and choosing a feature type Legend see chapter 4 Select the MAP Stylesheet to use as base for the legend then choose Create MAP Stylesheet legend in the panel options menu In the Create MAP Stylesheet legend dialog box specify the output layer empty space in between rules and the legend elements to be added Adjust the Style Preview value to set the size of the legend symbol Check the the check box beside Rule name to include the rule name in the legend Check the check box beside Rule expression to include the expression in the legend By default the Rule expression option is unchecked The legend font is set by the current setting in the Adobe Illustrator Character panel Prior to creating the MAP Stylesheet legend use the Character panel to set the font and optio
320. lipboard Position the cursor at the desired location Hold the Shift key and click the mouse Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 73 MAP Location Tool The X and Y position are copied to the clipboard and can be pasted into any text editor Latitude and Longitude values are also copied if this is enabled in the MAP Location Tool preferences see below Only one set of coordinates can be copied at once When Shift click is used again the values previously copied will be overwritten MAP LOCATION TOOL PREFERENCES The MAPublisher Preferences for the MAP Location Tool can be accessed from the menu Edit gt MAPublisher Preferences or by double clicking the MAP Location Tool button in the Adobe Illustrator Tools panel In the MAPublisher Preferences dialog box specify the latitude longitude display format and number of decimals Enable the option Include Latitude and Longitude values when copying coordinates to copy both the X Y and Lat Long positions when using Shift Click see above The order of the Longitude and Latitude captions can be swapped by changing the Long Lat Order option of the layer s MAP View See the MAP View Editor Preferences in chapter 1 74 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP Location Tool She Za MAP Attributes IN 2 5 4922 en 1 a I er MAPublisher can import GIS files into Adobe Illustrator and 4 Granite Salt Creek i y i Rapids R
321. log box Chapter 1 Getting Started 21 MAPublisher License Management MAPUBLISHER LABELPRO LICENSING MAPublisher LabelPro is an optional add on to MAPublisher 8 1 and higher Purchased MAPublisher LabelPro licenses are added to the main MAPublisher license During the registration process described earlier in this chapter all valid licenses will be imported When purchasing a new MAPublisher LabelPro license on top of an existing MAPublisher license the existing license key will be tagged to support MAPublisher LabelPro and the new license must be retrieved see instructions earlier To evaluate MAPublisher LabelPro open the MAPublisher License Management dialog box from the Adobe Illustrator menu Help gt MAPublisher Licensing gt MAPublisher License Management Click the MAPublisher LabelPro branch and then click the Evaluate button as previously explained License Management Feature Version Type Status Serial Number Log 4 MAPublisher 83 Floating Licensed from server Floating MAPublisher LabelPro 1 0 Floating Licensed from server Floating The evaluation version of MAPublisher LabelPro scrambles the text of placed labels but preserves the case spacing and punctuation The results give a sense of how actual labels would be placed based on the rule settings See chapter 18 for more details on MAP LabelPro functionality and usage Note MAPublisher and MAPublisher LabelPro can only be both floating licenses or bo
322. lso been added but has been appended with a 1 if the column names were identical in the source and destination tables Note Attribute names can not contain all numbers If a source column name contains all numbers the column n is joined but the attribute column name is changed to Attribute1 Attribute2 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 93 Join Table Calculation Set the type of calculation Add Calculated Data MAP Attributes panel options gt Add Calculated Data Add Centroid Position Data aaa Calculated Data Centroid area and line layers Position point layers North Angle point layers Calculation Centroid Statistics all layers e Column X R new position x Column X Select or add the attribute column to receive the x position value ColumnY Select or add the attribute column to receive the y position value Options Apply the calculation to all art ColumnY R new position y Not available for text layers Status icon indicates that a new column is created 55 icon indicates that an existing column is being updated Type Select the type of coordinates Page coordinates position in or only selected art Target Select or add the attribute Type Page coordinates et Unit ve Options 9 Apply to all art on layer Apply only to selected art Add Statistics Data Add Calcula
323. mage compression Compress Text and Line Art is enabled Security no master or user password required To change PDF file settings compression password access etc open the exported MAP Geospatial PDF file in Adobe Acrobat Pro or Pro Extended version 9 or higher and resave the document 216 Chapter 17 Export Geospatial PDF MAP Geospatial PDF Export View MAP Geospatial PDF MAP Geospatial PDF files are compatible with the geospatial tools introduced in Adobe Acrobat 9 The availability of these tools depends on the user s Acrobat version Reader Standard Pro or Pro Extended but no additional Acrobat plug in is necessary to use MAP Geospatial PDF All traditional Adobe Acrobat tools apply with the following being the most relevant e Search selects objects with matching name first then objects that have a matching attribute value e Acrobat Layers panel displays all layers and controls the display and lock of the layers e Object Data Tool to select map objects and display their attributes in the Adobe Acrobat Model Tree Structure Pane and Object Data Pane MAP Geospatial PDF files can also be read in Adobe Acrobat 8 however the attribute information is only accessible through the menu Tools gt Object Data gt Object Data Tool and it does not have the geospatial tools that are available in version 9 Adobe Acrobat 9 has the following special tools to access geospatial information Measuring Tool to measure di
324. major transit systems of the world Weather Symbols ai A library of weather related point symbols A4 1 Helpful Styles amp Symbols gt S 57 Symbolization The S 57 Symbolization folder contains nautical graphic styles and symbols libraries inspired from the International Hydrographic Office M 4 publication Regulations of the IHO for international INT charts and charts specifications of the IHO Graphic styles and symbol names are mostly based on the S 57 naming conventions The folder also contains templates with a series of MAPublisher Stylesheets linking S 57 imported features to appropriate nautical symbols and graphic styles The basic template allow users to quickly apply styles to the imported data The advanced template is more detailed to help users learn the format and make use of the data Nautical_Graphic_Styles ai Graphic style libraries for use with S 57 data Nautical_Symbols ai Symbols library for use with S 57 data main symbols S57 Advanced Template ait Adobe Illustrator template with detailed MAP Stylesheets for use with S 57 data S57 Basic Template ait Adobe Illustrator template with simplified MAP Stylesheets for use with S 57data US5FL12M Sample ENC file in S 57 format chart of Tampa Bay courtesy of NOAA Use of the S 57 templates To create a new document choose File gt New from Template Select S 57 Basic Template ait Import a S 57 file for example use the sample file In the MAP Stylesheet
325. map attribute table The second method allows for the replacement of all found records simultaneously accomplished by clicking the Replace All button 90 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Find amp Replace Attributes Apply Expression MAP Attributes panel gt Apply Expression Apply to Select the attribute r column on which to apply Apply Expression Expression Builder Opens the Expression the expression Attribute and Builder dialog box MAPublisher Property columns can Apply to I POPULATION DENSITY X LL Expression Library Opens the Expression be assigned expressions Expression Enter the expression into the text box or Click the Expression Builder or Expression Library button Expression POPULATION AREA Library dialog box s The expression is valid e Expression Validity Indicates if the expression is valid or invalid If invalid additional info is reported FUNCTIONALITY Use the Apply Expression function to assign new values or edit attribute properties For example it can be used to compute attribute values based on the values in other columns to assign a style by editing the Style property attribute or to rotate symbols by assigning a fixed value to the Rotation property attribute Read only attributes cannot be edited with Apply Expression Note that property attributes are dynamic Changes made to them in the map attribute table are refl
326. me result Expression 1 IF CAPITAL Y MAP Symbol 01 IF CAPITAL C MAP Symbol 02 MAP Symbol 03 Expression 2 IF_CASE MAP Symbol 01 CAPITALZ C MAP Symbol 02 CAPITALZ N MAP Symbol 03 Therefore If the capital is Y assign the symbol MAP Symbol 01 If the capital is C assign the symbol MAP Symbol 02 All other symbols assign MAP Symbol 03 NOTES FOR EXPORTING IMAGES If the document colour mode is CMYK exporting an embedded image may result in increased file size compared to RGB mode If the image is LINKED consider the following 1 The image will be exported in the original colour mode of the image irrespective of the current colour mode of the document i e a linked grayscale image in a CMYK document will be exported as a grayscale image whereas a linked RGB image in an CMYK document will be exported as a RGB image 2 Alinked image with Alpha channels may be exported in a different colour model For example a grayscale with two alphas will export as an RGB or an RGB with an alpha channel will export as CMYK 3 Linked images in CMYK mode regardless of the color mode of the document will export with an incorrect result and should therefore be avoided see chapter 12 If the image is EMBEDDED consider the following 1 The image will be exported in the colour mode of document i e an embedded grayscale image in a CMYK document will be exported as a CMYK image whereas a
327. miliarize yourself with the main MAPublisher functions and in particular those under the MAP Views section see chapter 4 before proceeding Before beginning to georeference an Adobe Illustrator file you must be in possession of the following information 1 The real world scale of your data 2 Details of the coordinate system the data is in i e Projection Datum etc 3 The X Y coordinates of one tie in point in the coordinate system of your data A1 22 To determine the real world scale of your data use the scale bar drawn on the map for reference measure the page size using the Adobe Illustrator Measure tool and divide by the scale size indicated make sure to correct for the measurement units If no scale bar is available try measuring distances in page units in Adobe Illustrator and compare with the same distance measured in real unit with a mapping or GIS software beware that differences in coordinate systems may affect the distance measurements Determining the coordinate system of the map may be difficult If no information is provided as meta data or in the map legend try to compare with other maps of the same area or with traditional coordinate systems used in the area e g US State Plane zone matching a county name in the USA To determine the real world tie point find a specific location in your document for which a real world coordinate location is known or can be easily determined such as known feature or grid or gratic
328. mine the number of new graduated styles you wish to create Create two rectangles with the Rectangle Tool aligned vertically one at the top of the page the other at the base Colour the first top and last bottom elements with two end colours for the ramp Choose Object gt Blend gt Blend Options Choose Specified Steps from the list Enter the value you determined in the first step minus two Click OK Select the two rectangles Choose Object gt Blend gt Make The legend elements will be blended between the two end colours 7 Choose Object gt Expand then choose Object gt Ungroup This ungroups the art so that the new styles can be added to the Graphic Styles panel and be used in the MAP Stylesheets AN RWNS gt ASSIGNING INCREMENTAL VALUES TO STYLES It is very straightforward to assign styles to values for stylesheets based on Equal to expressions The following examples can be used as a basis for new stylesheets providing the functionality which was previously available in the Unique Occurrences option in Auto Assign Legend Info Example 1 Rule 1 assigned first listed value and first style 1 Create the first Equal to rule using the first listed style and an expression based on the first listed value in a specified attribute column i e Style A assigned to Column X Value 1 2 Click the Add button The second rule will be automatically assigned an incremental expression i e Style B assigned to Column X V
329. ming labeling process Just overall totals X as obstacles during the Statistics type hd Setup Layers Open the labeling session Pop up menus By default only generate text labels for all data contained on Label only selected art on source layers Label all art on source layers Statistics type Choose an option from the drop down list to display labeling statistics after the process the source layers When enabled generate text labels for currently selected data on the source layers Right click Windows or Ctrl click Mac to display the menus In Source Set destination layer Set the same destination layer for all source layers in the MAP View Set suppression layer Set the same suppression layer for all source layers in the MAP View In Source column header Resize COLUMN_NAME to fit content Resizes only the selected columns Resize all to fit contents Resize the width of all columns to fit content In a Obstacle Layers 220 MAP LabelPro Source MAP View Source MAP Layer SENS Add to obstacle list Add all or the A Edit style L e Set suppression layer selected layer to obstacle list 8 Etditrmles Addallto obstacle list C Add to obstacle list Moveallto obstacle list Move to obstacle list Move all or Move to obstacle list
330. ml frame over Web art Framesets or target supported HTML tags must be created to direct the Web D rc Cancel page to a specific frame Previous and Next Click Previous or Next button to switch from one Web tag to another enabled when multiple artwork is selected Callout Bubble example E si ig N Callout title e Santa Fe Depot r Address l Callout Image as set in the Callout Image section l a Major Intersection 1050 Kettner Boulevard Callout Contents can contain text images and graphics Set in the contents frame L d FUNCTIONALITY Click the Edit button in the the MAP Web Author panel to open the Web Tag Dialog Multiple Web Tag Dialog if multiple artwork is selected These dialog boxes are used to design the Web tags callout bubbles using HTML These callout bubbles appear when objects in the Flash map are clicked or hovered over Not all objects in the map need to be associated with a callout Use the Callout Preview to see how the HTML affects the Web tag Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 185 Web Tag Dialog PREREQUISITES In the Web Tag Dialog text and image parameters are edited using HTML tags HTML tags are key codes written between less than lt and greater than gt signs that indicate how the Web browser should display the text There are opening and closing version for most but not all of the tags and the text to be affected i
331. n the product was purchased Complete the form and click Register Note The license key serial number for MAPublisher 8 x starts with MP80 RETRIEVE YOUR MAPUBLISHER LICENSE To retrieve an activated MAPublisher license click the Retrieve button in either the License Management dialog box or Welcome Screen The license file will be downloaded from the Avenza Systems licensing server CHECKOUT A FLOATING LICENSE If you have purchased a floating license please refer to the floating license installation guide provided with your purchase Once the server license is fully operational follow these instructions to checkout a license from the client machine the computer running the actual MAPublisher application 1 After installation of MAPublisher 8 click the Floating button of the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or MAPublisher License Management dialog box 2 Enter the name or IP address of the server where the license manager resides 3 Click the Checkout button to retrieve the one of the licenses from the server Notes If you wish to use Adobe Illustrator without MAPublisher then click the Check in button from the MAPublisher License Management dialog box at Help MAPublisher Licensing License Management This releases the license so other users can use it The link to the server is set once The next time Adobe Illustrator is started just click the Checkout button on the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or License Management dia
332. n embedded CMYK image in an RGB document will be exported as an RGB image 2 Embedded grayscales do NOT pick up the document colour model i e an embedded grayscale image will be exported as grayscale 3 The export of embedded Bitmap images is not supported A1 26 Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems Overview In the MAPublisher application the coordinate system option must be entered at two levels coordinate system of the source data when importing GIS data and coordinate system of the final map SOURCE DATA COORDINATE SYSTEM The Source coordinate system is usually detected when the coordinate system information is available with the GIS data being imported and when supported in the native GIS format such as Shapefile e00 However in some cases this information is not imported because it is not supported in the original GIS format e g DWG DXF or when using a non referenced Adobe Illustrator files In that case the coordinate system must be specified by the user It generally can be found from an attached metadata document by contacting the data provider or in textual information on the original data itself e g title or legend of a scanned map In all cases the source coordinate system must be known with certainty Then only can the proper parameter be specified in the MAPublisher interface A wrongly specified source coordinate system would make the map data unusable for transformations and merging with other datasets
333. n if ired 4 Faise When selecting an attribute click the pression if require ABS Refresh unique values 5 i x H IRI acos link Display unique values to display Functions List of functions for use in the ASIN id the attribute values of the selected expression if required R atan pe A attribute column IB CONTAINS California IR cos 7 Colorado Display unique values only lists up to a maximum set in the MAPublisher Preferences for the Expression builder see chapter 1 for more information Save Expression This dialog box appears when the Save button is clicked Save Named Expression Name Expression Name X FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Edit Expression tool is used for the entry and editing of expressions It is used in a number of locations such as creating new attribute values and properties to make selections or to apply styles Expressions are built using a combination of names operators and functions Edit Expression provides functionality for a number of tools Edit Schema To create or edit an expression for the generation of values in an attribute or column MAP Attributes panel gt Edit Schema gt Derive value from expression gt Browse Apply Expression To apply an expression to an attribute or property column for selected art only MAP Attributes panel gt Apply Expression gt Browse New Edit MAP Selection chapter 11 To create or edit expression criteria for use in s
334. n is explained later in this chapter New MAP View For Photoshop Paths The New MAP View For Photoshop Paths function creates a new MAP View using a reference file and associated Adobe Illustrator file exported from Geographic Imager for Adobe Photoshop Adobe Photoshop offers a function to create vector paths and export them to Adobe Illustrator Adobe Photoshop uses Geographic Imager to maintain the spatial reference and outputs it as an rsf reference file To import the paths into Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher use the New MAP View For Photoshop Paths from the MAP View panel options menu to create a new MAP View based on the rsf file After doing this the Adobe Illustrator layers can simply be dragged from Non MAP Layers to the newly created MAP View to finalize the georeferencing The vector data can now be used in a current MAPublisher project edited transformed or exported to any external GIS format 2 New MAP View For Photoshop Paths Reference file OK V Move non MAP Layers into MAP View as Destination Artboard Artboard 1 v Tip use the artboard tool to display artboard numbers New MAP View For Photoshop Paths allows the creation of a MAP View using a reference file and associated Illustrator file created in Photoshop and Geographic Imager e In Photoshop create a vector path Export this with referencing from Photoshop as an Illustrator file With the Geographic Imager plug in you can also export the associ
335. n new MAP View the incoming data will be treated separately from the matching data as if it was the first import The incoming data will overlap with the existing data use the MAP View Editor to rescale and move the data on the page see chapter 4 on MAP Views Note Importing ESRI Geodatabases require further settings Refer to chapter 19 for a detailed description 50 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Simple Import RESULTS The data is imported as individual Adobe Illustrator layers with appropriate feature type matching the original source data type Layers are named based on the file name or on the layer name in the source file By default the appropriate feature type extension is appended e g name_area and a layer name is already present in the document it appends a number e g name_area 1 but this may be disabled in the MAPublisher Preferences Import MAP Data property sheet The layers are automatically placed as sub features of a MAP View existing or new that contains the geospatial scaling and positioning information Notes When importing data exceeding the allowable 32 000 points per path in Adobe Illustrator MAPublisher automatically simplifies the imported object and shows the following warning message MAPublisher Your map file contains elements that exceeds Illustrator s point per path A limitation MAPublisher has imported the file however certain objects were simplified The simplification algo
336. n the cropping rectangle and symbol with center point in rectangle are maintained The MAP view can be re scaled to fit better to the document size Create Inset Create a map inset using MAP Vector Crop Open any map and make a copy of it choose File gt Save a Copy Leave the original map open make the copy the active document Use MAP Vector Crop to crop the area of special interest e Make the original map active In the MAP Views panel select the option menu Import MAP View from document Select the MAP View from the copy Original Copy and Crop The map now contains two MAP Views at least Their relative position can be managed from the MAP View Editor as well as the scale of the inset map Show Anchors Previews Thumbnails amp Boxes v Name France 1 Data Extents LL Corner Scale Angle X 279 910614 mm OOO ga58788 560837 e _ Von Y oo0 j jo 4 Y 1 065489 mm um Auto Scale x A Le Chapter 7 Drawing Tools 109 MAP Area Tools MAP Measurement Tool Tools gt MAP Measurement Too N FUNCTIONALITY The MAP Measurement Tool measures distances between two points path distances multiple points azimuths and the perimeter and area of closed paths page or map units Furthermore the measuring path can be converted to a line or area in the currently selected layer PREREQUISITES To measure ground distances great circle distance in
337. n the main MAP LabelPro configuration dialog box Units for margins are determined by Document Setup in Adobe Illustrator 222 Chapter 18 MAP LabelPro MAPublisher LabelPro Settings SOURCE AND ATTRIBUTE COLUMNS T MAP LabelPro These settings determine which attribute information is converted into text labels for a respective layer The Source column shows m Attribute the Area Point and Line layers in the document that have been pp SSS SS sm mm ss SM enabled for labeling through the Setup Layers option For each Public Schools point S SCHOOL NAME layer listed in Source column the Attribute column holds a drop E Streets line S STREETNAME down list populated with the attribute structure of that MAP layer A Parks area S PARK NAME Specify the appropriate attribute to be used for generating that layer s labels Note By default label case is left exactly as it is found in the attribute table To modify a label s case see the options in the Label Case drop down list located in the Style dialog box of each layer DESTINATION AND SUPPRESSION TEXT LAYERS The layers on which generated labels should be placed are specified in the Destination and Suppression Layer column drop down lists Destination layers will contain only the labels that could be placed successfully on the map based on the defined rules Suppression layers are repositories for labels that could not be placed successfully according to the rules and have
338. n the selected or default coordinate system is projected X and Y coordinates are entered in the unit Point Style of the coordinate system e g metre kilometre feet When the selected or default coordinate system is Geodetic Lat Long coordinates can be entered in degrees in the following formats Decimal degrees D d Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds D MM SS s Degrees Minutes D MM m Degrees MinutesSeconds D MMSS s Packed DMS with decimal point D DDMMSS s Packed DMS D DDMMSS s Notes Items in are optional means zero or more digits means one or more digits Lines of latitude run East West the Equator is an example whereas lines of longitude run North South the Greenwich Meridian is an example Positive degree values represent north latitudes and east longitudes Negative degree values represent south latitudes and west longitudes Directions can be entered either with positive negative values or using the N S E or W letters preceding or following the numerical values separated or not with a space Valid delimiters for Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds format are gt space hyphen colons or underscore e g 43 41 48 98N 43 41 48 98N 43 41 48 98N or 43 41 48 98N gt d degree single quote minute double quote second e g 43d41 48 98 N Packed formats require the use of two digits for degrees of latitude e g 1 N must be written 01 and 3 digits for degree
339. n when Plot by Time MAP symbol 18 Plot by Distance or Start Route are being T MAP Symbol 19 used the settings will be applied I MAP Symbol 20 MAP Symbol 21 amp amp MAP Symbol 22 MAP Symbol 23 MAP Symbol 24 da MAP Symbol 25 Select a symbol FUNCTIONALITY The MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel is used for controlling all of the settings related to points to be plotted by the GPS In this dialog box users define parameters such as scale interval and point symbol The Point Plot Settings panel also controls the additional auxiliary settings such as change in speed and change in heading Point symbols reflect the symbols found in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel New symbols created or loaded in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel will be appended to the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel Use the Type drop down list to enter the settings for Manual Plot Plot By Time Plot by Distance Plot by Change in Speed or Plot by Change in Heading Each option corresponds to the button on the main MAP GPS panel USING THE POINT PLOT SETTINGS PANEL Manual Plot There are two settings for the Manual Plot Scale and Plot symbol The scale controls the size of the point symbol to be plotted With a scale of 100 percent selected the point is plotted at the original size of the symbol The second option is the Plot Symbol which determines which symbol is plotted Plot By Time Three separate setti
340. nation layer Existing Layer option in which case this layer must be included in the file before running the function Furthermore the desired symbol must be present in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel USING PLOT CENTROIDS Plot Centroids is located in the Point Plotter panel options menu Select first the MAP View that contains the layers whose centroids are to be plotted Select the Source Layer containing the polygons or lines for which the centroids will be plotted MAP Layer of type Area or Line Select the symbol Style and Scale to apply e Choose the Destination Layer in which the centroids will be added select an existing Point layer or create a new one Chapter 6 Plotting Points 103 Plot Centroids The high placement accuracy option makes more advanced calculations for the centroid positions so as to force them to fall within the area boundaries useful for areas with strange shapes for example some S shape islands Note When the New Layer option is enabled the attributes from the source MAP layer are copied to the new Point layer However when using an existing point layer attributes do not get transferred unless the Point layer was created with its attribute schema based on the same source MAP Layer see chapter 4 for more information on the Base attribute schema on option when creating new MAP layers RESULTS Symbols are added to the specified Point MAP Layer Depending on the type of polygon or line
341. nce multiple layers are created one per unique value This function is particularly useful to split a layer that contains a lot of objects For example a road layer with classes such as street highway and toll road could be split in three distinct layers Split Layer can be used as a preliminary to running MAPublisher LabelPro to allow labelling of multiple classes with different styles see chapter 18 or to exporting layers to external GIS formats USING SPLIT LAYER The MAP Layer to be split must first be selected in the MAP Views panel or in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel then choose Object MAPublisher Split Layer or click the MAPublisher toolbar button ed In the Action options specify if the split art should be either copied or move to the new layer s Note If the source layer is locked the only option is to copy to the new layer s Chapter 11 MAP Selections and Operations 153 Split Layer If the Split art that satisfies this expression method is selected enter a valid expression in the Expression field click the amp button to use the Expression Builder dialog box or click the mj button to select an expression from the Expression Library see chapter 5 for more details the Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report amp 9 and include additional warning notes A layer name for the new layer must be entered in the Destination frame If the Splitart
342. nd reprojecting data on the fly USING THE MAP VIEWS PANEL Creating New MAP Views To create a new MAP View click New MAP View in the panel options menu This opens the MAP View Editor discussed in MAP View Editor section Specify a coordinate system and enter values for scale rotation and page anchors After creating a new MAP View the Specify Anchors item from the MAP Views panel options menu must be used to define the tie in point between Map Anchors and Page Anchors Note Creating a new MAP View is only recommended when registering a non referenced Adobe Illustrator document To transform an existing MAP View to a new coordinate system and scale e g to create an inset map use the duplicate MAP View function and transform or rescale the copied MAP View Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 59 MAP Views Panel Duplicate And Delete MAP Views MAP Views can be duplicated For example to create inset maps make a duplicate and drag MAP Layers into the new MAP View Then use the MAP View Editor to edit the placement scale or coordinate system of the duplicate Note that MAP Layers can only be duplicated in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel Delete a MAP View or MAP Layer using the Delete button at the base of the panel or through the MAP Views panel options menu To delete a MAP View its MAP layers must first be deleted Create New MAP Layers New MAP Layers are necessary in order to digitize geospatial data or generate artwo
343. ngs can be adjusted Scale Every and Plot symbol The Every setting is used to specify the time interval between plots For instance if the Every setting is set to 5 a new point is plotted every five seconds These settings may be changed while plotting Changes to scale or a different point symbol while plotting are reflected in the next point to be plotted Chapter 16 MAP GPS 205 MAP GPS Point Plot Settings Plot By Distance Three separate settings can be adjusted Scale Every and Plot symbol The Every setting is used to specify the distance interval between plots For example if the Every setting is set to 5 a point will be plotted every five metres Changes to scale or a different point symbol while plotting are reflected in the next point to be plotted Plot By Change in Speed Change in speed points are plotted in addition to the points plotted while completing one of the standard plot options Plot by Time Plot By Distance or Route To enable this setting choose Plot by Change in Speed then check the Enable this Auxillary GPS Plot Type check box from the bottom of the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel The settings for Scale Every and Plot Symbol must also be specified The Every setting has an additional option which allows specification of the speed units km h knots or mi h When plotting begins a new layer is automatically created specifically for the change in speed points The layer name is based on the name of the cu
344. nhanced Buffer functionality The Buffer Lines function has been redesigned and improved and is now known as Buffer Art Create buffer areas for Area Line and Point layers See chapter 8 New option for Labeling Label Features and MAP Tagger Tool have a new option to create depth sounding labels number with subscript Enhanced MAP Web Author preview The Web tag preview has been redesigned to give a more accurate preview of the expected results New CSS and API functions have been added See chapter 15 and Avenza Resources online New MAP Views transformation engine The MAP Views transformation engine has been redesigned Transform maps crossing the 180 dateline without requiring a succession of import and export More Geospatial PDF Export settings The Geospatial PDF export function has been enhanced with new export settings See chapter 17 New MAP View for Adobe Photoshop Paths function Create a MAP View using a reference file and associated Adobe Illustrator file exported by Geographic Imager for Adobe Photoshop And many more enhancements The MAP Views panel now contains layer notes and layers operations In addition the MAP View editor has new options for MAP Views preview and scaling See chapter 4 Simple Import and Advanced Import automatically open the New Document dialog box if no document is open What s New in MAPublisher 8 3 xiii Getting Started Before using MAPublisher please read this section t
345. nks the selected font by 0 5 pt Allow overlapping label Check this option to allow point labels to overlap with other labels in the same labeling session For each point label there is a fixed minimal zone of 0 3 inches within which no other point feature can be labelled Consequently when two point features are closer than 0 3 inches of each other their labels are automatically placed in the suppression layer if selected SAVE AND LABEL Once the layers main configuration style and rule based options have been completed proceed to label the map data by clicking the Save amp Label button Clicking the Save amp Label button will save the current settings close the main MAP LabelPro configuration dialog box and begin the labeling process Due to the complexity of the calculations involved in rule based text placement it is likely that a progress meter will be displayed for most labeling processes except those that are sufficiently simple or small Cancel the labeling process at any time by clicking on the amp button in the progress dialog box Alternatively save the current settings without labeling by clicking the Save button This will close the main MAP LabelPro configuration dialog box and will not label any features The dialog box can be reopened later to edit the saved label settings or be used to label the map Chapter 18 MAP LabelPro 229 MAPublisher LabelPro Rules Label Verification
346. ns Legends are not dynamically linked to the MAP Stylesheets Each element can be further edited freely easily using the Direct Selection tool in isolation mode or if un grouped menu Object gt Ungroup 134 Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets Create MAP Stylesheet Legend Labeling Functions One of the most useful features of MAPublisher is the ability to create labels for map objects using values from the MAP Attributes panel Manually entering and placing labels is not necessary provided that the labeling information is included in the map attributes of the MAP Layer being labeled MAPublisher provides two methods of adding labels to a map both of which contain options to place labels intelligently using defined label settings One way to create feature labels is to first select all the features to be labeled and use Label Features to label all of them by specified attribute values An alternate method involves using the MAP Tagger Tool to apply labels individually also by specified attribute values As acomplement to the labeling functions Create Knockouts masks the part of line features covered by text labels for improved text legibility Topics covered in this section are Label Features MAP Tagger Tool Create Knockouts For more advanced labeling capabilities refer to chapter 18 about MAPublisher LabelPro additional license required Chapter 10 Labelling Functions 135 Labeling Tools
347. nsure that the layers to be trimmed are visible and unlocked in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel invisible and locked layers are not cropped Similarly layers that are not supposed to be cropped should be locked or invisible The extent of the map that will remain after cropping must be visible on the screen so make sure to zoom out sufficiently prior to starting the vector crop tool Users should save a copy of the Adobe document prior to performing a crop Due to some Adobe Illustrator limitations text typed on a path might not return to their prior state after an undo USING THE MAP VECTOR CROP Click the MAP Vector Crop Tool button E in the Adobe Illustrator Tools panel then click and drag a rectangle over the artboard Upon release of the mouse button the crop function is completed If the remaining map is too large the MAP Vector Crop can be run again on the remaining data If the remaining map is too small the MAP Vector Crop can be undone menu Edit Undo and run again RESULTS On all visible and unlocked layers e Text objects that have their anchor outside of the cropping rectangle are deleted Text objects with their anchor inside the cropping rectangle are retained completely A Points falling outside of the cropping rectangle are deleted the position of the center of the symbol is relevant Symbols that have their center inside the cropping rectangle are maintained as a whole Linesare clipped at the boundary
348. nt of the visible layers only Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 65 MAP View Editor MAP View Name The current name of the MAP View is listed in the Name box which is editable MAP Views are ordered alphabetically in the MAP Views panel so changing a MAP View name may change its position in the panel Page Alignment During the import process MAPublisher sets the page and map anchors so that the page origin 0 0 coincide with the lower left corner of the map extents Use the Page Alignment settings to precisely move the data on the page In the LLX LLY boxes edit the position of the lower left corner of the data extent in document units Alternatively the alignment control provides pre set positions of the map extents relative to the page center middle lower left upper right etc Click one of the alignment control grid locations to align the MAP View Note Editing the lower left corner position does not affect data integrity It simply means that the data is shifted on the page but the corresponding real world coordinates remain unchanged Note The Page Anchor does not always coincide with the lower left corner of the map extent When manually registering an Adobe document users can also enter a specific position using the MAP Views panel options menu Specify Anchors see first section of this chapter Scale The scale of the current MAP View is shown in the Scale box For MAP Views in a projected coordinate system the
349. ntain general settings but has sub categories for the MAP Stylesheets editor and panel see chapter 9 for a full description of the MAP Stylesheets editor and panel MAP Stylesheets gt Editor Preferences MAPublisher Preferences foo Expression Builder 4j General Import Map Data MAP Attributes amp MAP LabelPro MAP Location amp MAP Measurement P MAP Selections 4 MAP Stylesheets E Editor 7 Panel Q MAP Views j Spatial Database MAP Stylesheets gt Panel Preferences MAP Stylesheets gt Editor Maximum unique values to load for Simple Mode 200 Maximum unique values to load for Simple Mode Maximum number of attribute values that are loaded in list of values of the Simple Expression dialog box MAPublisher Preferences fo Expression Builder I General Import Map Data MAP Attributes amp MAP LabelPro l MAP Location S MAP Measurement P MAP Selections 4 MAP Stylesheets E Editor 7 Panel Q MAP Views Spatial Database MAP Views Preferences MAP Stylesheets gt Panel MAP Stylesheet sort style Use General preference 7 Sort list using natural string comparison MAP Stylesheet sort style By default the General sorting style is applied option Use General preference Set to Name then type for an alphabetical sorting Set to Type then name to first sort the layers per data type Legend Text Point Line or Area
350. ntrol the Nar Vale a Close Clos style and position of l SUE once Navigation Callout Bubbles Cmm navigation objects and WP 2 V Enable Navigation IV Show the Clic Callout Bubble map elements A I ae E V Show Panning Widget E Use Lightbox Style for Click Callout P hed i i REENA m f Show Zooming widget V show the Hover Calout Bubble changes to the default Left 19 5 V Show Search Box 7 Use Full Callout Content for Hover Callout settings will output a 4 Pan Left Button El Automatically Zoom to Search Results 7 Show the Fixed Position Callout Bubble new CSS file bed El Show cic Caout for Search Results T Use Centroid Instead of Mouse for Calout Poston 4 Pan Right Button IV Show Layer List IER H V Show Overview Map Animations a BEES a Drag ep wih Mouss to Pan Bl De ewe Het minatore Top 19 E Use Low Stage Quality During Animations Use External CSS File If d 2 Expressions an external CSS file i o 5 AO Attributes is specified it will Left 19 Wi Ale Expemasionsi Web Tage E Export All Attributes With Map Features T 4 Zoom Out Button override any of the Top 186 19 settings specified Li 5 above When a CSS file Reset To Defaults is specified an Edit link e Use External CSS Fie is enabled It opens the file in the system s default text edtior 190 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Web Export Dialog Viewer Settings Customize the navigation controls of the map The default
351. nu Within the MAP Attributes panel select the column to be edited right click the column heading or cell and click Edit column name Edit Schema opens with the same column immediately selected in the column list Edit Schema lists all of the columns which currently exist in the MAP Layer attribute structure including MAPublisher Property attributes see previous section By default imported or created attributes will be visible whereas property columns will not be shown by default Please note some Property column structures cannot be edited read only Edit Column Format Each column has a name and display name The name is used in the expression builder and for export The display name is used when exporting to geospatial PDF see chapter 17 and is shown by default in the column name in the MAP Attributes panel see MAPublisher Preferences in chapter 1 The punctuation characters are not supported in column names to avoid complications when exporting to external formats The following illegal characters are replaced with an underscore _ upon data import or join table space A8 amp 2 EJ 1 5 lt gt Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 81 Edit Schema To rename a column enter new text directly into the Name field All expressions referring to this attribute name are updated instantaneously Note Some external file formats have limits on the number of characters allowed for field names Therefore during the
352. nza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In To quickly access the MAPublisher license file directory right click a row in the License Management dialog box and click Browse to license folder Copy or move MAPublisher license files directly into this location r License Management O Evaluate 4 gt Register j Retrieve Floating al Checkin license Check license usage Feature Version Type Status Serial Nun a 4 MAPublisher 83 Floating Licensed from server Floating Register product MAPublisher LabelPro 1 0 Floating Licensed from server Floating Evaluate Retrieve licenses Ea Browse to license folder BJ Checkin V Automatically checkout license Machine ID 00222221111 Duration w 1 day s Chapter 1 Getting Started 23 MAPublisher License Management The MAPublisher Tools MAPublisher tools can be found in a number of locations in Adobe Illustrator The MAPublisher Import functions can be found under the File menu ei ess Object Type Select Effect View Window Help New CtrleN New from Template Shift Ctri N Open Ctri 0 Open Recent Files gt Browse in Bridge Alte Ctrl O Import Map Data Simple HET E Adanet Device Central Close Ctriew Save Ctri S Save Asin Shifts CtrleS Save a Copy Alt Ctrl S Save as Template Checkin Save for Web amp Devices Alt Shift
353. o ensure that you have a suitable hardware environment are familiar with the installation and activation procedures and adequately prepare your system and workspace to make maps with Adobe Illustrator and MAPublisher 8 3 Topics covered in this section System Requirements Installation Instructions MAPublisher Compatibility Notes MAPublisher License Management The MAPublisher Tools The MAPublisher Toolbar MAPublisher Preferences Preparing the Workspace Chapter 1 Getting Started 15 System Requirements Before installing MAPublisher please ensure that these minimum system requirements are met recommended requirements are mentioned as necessary WINDOWS e Adobe Illustrator CS3 CS4 CS5 Intel Pentium 4 processor Intel Core 2 Duo or better recommended Windows XP Vista 7 compatible with 64 bit versions 2 GB of RAM minimum 4 GB of RAM or higher recommended e 500 MB of available hard disk space MAC OS X e Adobe Illustrator CS3 CS4 CS5 Intel processor Intel Core 2 Duo or better recommended e MacOSX 10 5 or higher 2 GB of RAM minimum 4 GB of RAM or higher recommended e 500 MB of available hard disk space Notes Not all foreign language versions of Adobe Illustrator may be supported Please contact support avenza com for more information Installing MAPublisher on a system that does not meet the minimum requirements may produce unexpected results or errors These issues may not be
354. o isl cr Close recently used in MAP Attributes or STATE ABBR amp amp SUB REGION MAP Stylesheets during the current session Select one or more entries in the list I Delete Delete the selected Delete expression enabled for Recent and Named Expressions only Named Expressions Lists all the expressions saved through the Save Named Expressions dialog box Select one or more entries in the list Attribute Filter Expressions Lists the Attribute Filter expression saved in the MAP Selections Panel see chapter 11 Select one or more entries in the list Named Expression Insert Adds the selection to the expression builder Multiple selections are concatenated with the AND statement Expression Library Select one or more expressions s Named Expressions Recent fo Attribute Filter Name Expression Population Den POPULATION AREA Attribute Filter r Expression Library Select one or more expressions foe Attribute Filter Name Expression Toll TOLL_RD Y Interstate ADMN_CLASS Interstate 88 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Expression Builder Insert lose Closes the dialog without adding expressions Recent Expressions Expressions in the Recent tab of the Expression Library are expressions saved in memory for the time of the Adobe Illustrator session they are reset if the
355. o the Sort Order list If all the values contained in the first Sort By column are unique it is not required to set a secondary column If the first Sort By column contained any similar values a secondary column must be specified Again click a column in the Sort By Available Columns list and then click the Add button to place the column in the Sort Order list Similarly third fourth and fifth Sort By columns can be specified in the same manner if previous columns contain similar values Note that the Sort By columns are a hierarchy with the topmost specified column being used for the primary sort then the second then third etc To move columns up or down the hierarchy after they have been specified simply select the appropriate column in the Sort Order list and click either the Up or Down button To remove any Sort By columns from the hierarchy select the column in the Sort Order list and click the Remove button Note that a maximum of five columns can be used to sort points into a logical order If the columns specified to sort by do not distinguish an ordering between certain points the order of these points in the attribute table will be used to determine the order of the nodes in the generated line string RESULTS When all the options have been set click OK to join the points on the specified layer An JA Area or L Line layer will be generated depending on the specified output layer type which will be placed in the same MAP V
356. o to Objects MAPublisher Label Features or the MAPublisher toolbar button to access the function LABEL FEATURES SETTINGS Source Layer and Column First set the options in MAPublisher to determine the attributes that will be converted to text labels The Source Layer list shows the Area Point and or Text layers currently containing selected data For each layer the Column drop down list s is populated with the attribute structure of that layer Choose the appropriate column that holds the attributes you wish to label the map with Target Text Layer In the Text layer drop down list s specify a Text layer that the labels will be output to Note that labels can only be created on text layers in the same MAP View as the Source Layer Chapter 10 Labelling Functions 137 Label Features LABEL SETTINGS MAPublisher provides options to specify label preferences such as label position alignment to lines of latitude minimum font sizes and horizontal scaling to best place labels within polygons and paths These label settings are common to Label Features and the MAP Tagger Tool L Line Labels MAPublisher places Line labels depending on the curvature and length of the line string Click the Line Labels button to assign MAPublisher Line Label Settings MAPublisher controls where text is placed along lines by using the Distance from start option Selecting Auto will place text at the midpoint for straight lines and for curved lines
357. od creates an index by matching label text on a selected Label Layer to the indicated attribute on the Feature layer creating an index entry for every grid cell in which the feature can be found Note that only features that have labels can be indexed For example if High Street passes through grid cells A3 B3 and C4 each grid cell will be in the index on a single or multiline see advanced options For example as High Street A3 B3 C4 Use this function as follows Select the Make index based on label and matching feature position option to generate an index using this method Choose the layer containing the text to be indexed from the Label layer drop down list Choose the layer that was used to generate the labels from the Feature layer drop down list In the Label text matches attribute list select the attribute column in the selected Feature layer which matches the labels to be indexed Index Based on Feature Position and Attribute Value This method creates indexes for map features without creating labels beforehand The map features to be indexed are contained in the selected Feature layer Any MAP Layer of type Point Line or Area contained in the same MAP View as the grid can be selected The index position is based on each feature on the grid for Area and Line layers all cells that intersect with the feature are indexed for Point layers the cells that contain the center of the feature symbol are indexed The actual
358. ode Support Exporting File Directory x lt lt x Attribute Column Name v FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES Attribute Value FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES X 5 FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES A1 13 Mac OS X Unicode Support Importing Attribute Value File Attribute Column Name Delimited Text V Data Format Directory FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES ESRI ArcInfo FORMAT HAS NO Generate ATTRIBUTES ESRI ArcSDE NOT SUPPORTED ON MAC OS X Geodatabase ESRI File NOT SUPPORTED ON MAC OS X Geodatabase ESRI Inter change File di ESRI Personal Geodatabase P aes EGET Y NOT SUPPORTED ON MAC OS X GML Simple Features v MapInfo cupide rages d MicroStation FORMAT HAS NO Design ATTRIBUTES B FORMAT USES SIMPLE v ASCII TEXT FOR ATTRIBUTE NAMES AND MOST VALUES S57 Windows Unicode Support Working with Images Filename Register Image File Directory Register Image File Directory Data Format Export Image World File tfw Image Report irp Mapinfo TAB tab ListGeo 1go GeoTIFF tif Mac OS X Unicode Support Exporting Attribute Value Attribute Column File Data Format Directory Delimited Text FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES CAD DWG FORMAT HAS NO CAD DXF ATTRIBUTES ESRI
359. of raw GPS data directly in Adobe Illustrator Connect to many NMEA compliant GPS devices collect data points and then use the information to apply it to maps The data can be reprojected styled and scaled automatically when it is received MAPublisher License Management The new MAPublisher License Management system helps users manage their licensing in a more streamlined and user friendly manner Users can now evaluate the product register retrieve their licenses and checkout a floating license all in a single dialog box Additionally MAPublisher panels are now marked with a lock icon when the software is not licensed MAPublisher 8 Features xi What s New in MAPublisher 8 3 Adobe Illustrator CS5 support MAPublisher is now supported on Adobe Illustrator CS5 on both Windows and Mac New Import MAP Objects function MAP Views MAP Stylesheets and MAP Selections can now be exchanged between open Adobe Illustrator documents Import all objects or choose only objects you want See chapter 4 More Export MAP Stylesheets options The MAP Stylesheets panel presents a new option to export MAP Stylesheets to a new Adobe Illustrator file containing rules and related styles and symbols Exported MAP Stylesheets can be used as a template for a new map or can be imported to existing projects using the new Import MAP Objects function See chapter 9 New Create Knockouts function Create Knockouts automatically generates masks behind texts to
360. of the cropping rectangle e A Areas polygons that are completely out of the cropping rectangle are deleted Areas intersecting with the cropping rectangle are clipped and closed following the edge of the rectangle The overall result is a map coverage reduced to the cropping rectangle outline Subsequently the MAP View s can still be transformed rescaled etc See examples on the next page Chapter 7 Drawing Tools 107 MAP Vector Crop Tool Note The purpose of the MAP Vector Crop is to cut vector data types points lines and polygons Some Adobe Illustrator specific objects might not be cropped properly using this tool for example Blend and Live Paint objects Any art using effects that have been rasterized Custom art such as scale bars grids graticules north arrows expand custom art to crop Images cannot be cropped with this tool Legacy Text Note Due to an Adobe Illustrator limitation text on a path may flip after a crop operation This is corrected by checking the Flip option from Type on the Path Options dialog box choose Type gt Type on a Path gt Type on a Path Options Examples Crop vector data lille m EN Strasbour Brest ro o m Ye um d 2 EX e Es epe arseille P oi Original map 108 Chapter 7 Drawing Tools MAP Area Tools w Paris Ne Nahtes MD Bordeaux groue Crop result lines and area are clipped text with 1st letter withi
361. oint By Point v ej Y 1 2 3 X y 1 795 261 941000 1 856 355 190000 1 731 324 455000 1 844 732 389000 1 748 759 998000 1 850 545 132000 3 additional point s Close Path Check this option to automatically close the path recommended when using the Line Plotter on Area layers Add Remove Click to add a new row Select a row and click 5 to remove it Line Plotter Course amp Distance Line Plotter Additional Line Points Choose Course amp Distance to enter a series of heading and distance values Current Layer A STATES area Coordinate System United States Albers E Input Coordinate System Use Current Layer s coordinate system V Close path requires at least three points Use NAD27 Format Projected Units M x 1899885 941 e E 222922292 106 Options 2 Additional Line Points Course amp Distance v m Method North Type Grid North X Units Direction Clockwise X Cartesian w a Heading Distance ad E 35 0000 625 0000 m 2 128 0000 417 0000 m 3 8 0000 178 0000 m o 3 additional point s Heading Distance Enter here a series of heading and distance to define the consecutive vertices of the line Chapter 8 Line Functions Additional Line Points Choose Point By Point to enter the consecutive vertices of the line by their coord
362. om Fie Source Coordinate System Displays the current coordinate system assigned to the MAP View From File Load a source 9 9 Spedfy From File Destination Coordinate i system dialog box to select a coordinate system From File Load a destination Datum Shift coordinate system from an external file Specify Datum Shift Change the datum shift for the transformation FUNCTIONALITY coordinate system from an t external file Info View the parameters of a selected coordinate system Clear Remove all references to a coordinate system Specify Open the Specify Source Coordinate System dialog box to select a new source coordinate system To be used only if the source coordinate system is undefined or is not matching the data To apply a new coordinate system to a MAP View use Perform Coordinate System Transformation The MAP View Editor displays and controls the geospatial parameters of the MAP View coordinate system and scale on the artboard the position of the data extents on the page alignment and rotation and provides a way to change the MAP View name A preview pane shows and allows users to move the current MAP View relative to the artboard and to the other MAP Views in the document The MAP View Editor is also where coordinate system transformations are performed Transformations affect
363. on Matching Column Select a Add matching column from source Add T y column from the destination layer to the matching source column into the Case sensitive when matching match to a column in the Source Table destination attribute table Add matching column from source Update existing columns instead of adding columns when possible Update existing column values instead of adding more Update existing columns instead of adding columns when possible FUNCTIONALITY Join Table provides the ability to merge external data tables directly into an existing MAP Layer attribute schema in order to create a single extended attribute table Four of the most common table formats are supported dBase dbf USGS SDTS ddf Delimited Text csv tsv txt Excel xls When exporting tables from spreadsheet applications for use with MAPublisher the preferred format to use is Delimited Text csv Note dBase tables created or edited in Microsoft Excel must have a proper data type assigned to each column through cell formatting before being saved as dbf For example numerical values specified in a cell set with a format General will import as an Integer type by default therefore loosing all decimal values Windows users with licensed ESRI software can join tables with feature classes and non spatial tables of geodatabases ArcSDE File and Personal For information on ESRI software requi
364. on depicting its feature type Area layer e g county boundaries urban areas country outlines etc L Line layer e g rivers roads railways etc Note Point layer e g town and city symbols railway stations etc Text layer e g text labels Legend layers do not contain any attributes MAPUBLISHER PROPERTY ATTRIBUTES In addition to the attribute values that were imported into a work session Area Line Point and Text layers are also assigned a number of additional MAPublisher attribute columns These property columns prefixed with a are designed to indicate the physical properties of map art on the Adobe Illustrator canvas Art can be modified directly from the attribute table by making edits to values in these columns The following property columns are attached to valid map layers in this version of MAPublisher Area layers LayerName ID Name AreaDirection VertexCount Style StrokeWeight Perimeter PathClosed ArtScale Area describes the name of the containing layer This property cannot be set describes the internal unique ID to refer to Adobe Illustrator artwork within the document Read only describes the name of the polygon Editing this property will change the name in the Layers panel describes the direction as clockwise or counter clockwise Editing it will reverse the direction describes the number of points in the art This property cannot be set describes the Graphic Style
365. on folder only For export to ESRI or MapInfo formats click the Browse button to specify a destination folder Click the OK button to export your MAP Layer When exporting to AutoCAD format it is required to specify a name for the exported file and select the file extension DXF or DWG to be used For MicroStation formats it is required to specify a name for the exported file To export to either of these formats click the Browse button to name the export file and then choose the file format from the Format drop down list ADDITIONAL NOTES Valid Area Direction Area Layer Exports When exporting area layers to GIS formats polygon outlines must have a positive Area value whereas holes contained inside compound paths or complex shapes must have a negative Area value If some polygons in the Area property column of the MAP Attribute table contradict these guidelines use the following tools to convert the MAPublisher area calculation from a negative to a positive value or vice versa Flip Lines tool chapter 8 to convert multiple areas Create a Selection Filter chapter 11 to select all elements that have an Area of less than zero to select negative values or greater than zero to select positive values Then use the Flip Lines tool e Editthe ZAreaDirection property value chapter 5 to convert areas one by one select the area to edit and then choose the alternate value for ZAreaDirection in the MAP Attributes panel Text
366. on provides a fast uncomplicated method of importing map data into Adobe Illustrator Its purpose is to import a single piece of map data or several files sharing the same format and coordinate system PREREQUISITES Use Simple Import either before or after an Adobe Illustrator document is created If no document is open Simple Import will initiate the New Document dialog box MAPublisher will interpret the artboard dimensions during the import process and calculate a map scale for the document accordingly If the document size is changed in the Adobe Illustrator document settings the scale will have to be recalculated using the MAP View Editor see chapter 4 for more information Remember a map of the world would fit well into a page with a landscape orientation whereas a map of South America would fit best into a page with a Portrait orientation Some import options are specified in the MAPublisher Preferences Import MAP Data category such as attribute order layer naming convention or display of extents in the import dialogs For a full description please refer to chapter 1 on MAPublisher Preferences USING SIMPLE IMPORT The MAPublisher Simple Import function is accessed from the Adobe Illustrator menu File gt Import Map Data gt Simple Import or from the MAPublisher toolbar button Overview The dialog box itself is split into two sections The upper section provides options to choose a file format select the dataset to import
367. onized For example the second geometric entity in the mif file has the attributes held in the second row of the mid file The number and type of attributes associated with each entity is specified by the user There must be at least one attribute field in the mid file Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions mif mid Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses Yes Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute mif type Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import Import as Visible Attributes Enable this option to view the pen and brush pattern values in the imported attribute table The MAPublisher MID MIF importer supports the storage of point line polyline arc ellipse rectangle rounded rectangle region polygon and text geometric data in mif files Each geometric entity present in a mif file has display properties such as pen and brush width pattern and colour Supported MID MIF properties are as follows MAPublisher supports the import of line weights 0 7 colours 24 bit RGB strokes 1 71 It also supports fonts family style justification for text
368. ool Chapter 10 Labelling Functions 141 MAP Tagger Tool TAG MAP DATA When the label settings are set click OK to close the dialog box and confirm these settings With the MAP Tagger Tool enabled click a map object to add a label for it It may be convenient to lock the layers in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel that do not require labeling to avoid tagging undesired objects The following list of keyboard modifiers may be used for additional labeling options Note click map object with MAP Tagger Tool selected Labels placed using current Adobe Illustrator Type and MAPublisher settings Line labels are placed at click point and assigned angle of line at click point A Area labels are placed horizontally at click point Point labels are placed horizontally at click point 4 Shift Only applicable for Line labels Labels placed using current Adobe Illustrator Type and MAPublisher settings El Line labels are placed horizontally at click point gt Shift drag Labels placed using current Adobe Illustrator Type and MAPublisher settings and leader line created on drag Line labels are placed horizontally Leader line connects text to line feature Al Area labels are placed horizontally Leader line connects text to area feature Point labels are placed horizontally Leader line connects text to point feature drag Labels placed using current Adobe Illustrator Type and MAPublisher settings
369. oom upon load Set the minimum and maximum zoom that the map is allowed to have Additional Settings Images in Adobe Illustrator are exported as JPEG The JPEG Image Quality amp Resolution slider sets the compression level of exported images This setting does not apply to images included in Web tags The option Use Preserve Appearance Settings For Flash Export flattens the artwork to a single layer before exporting It is recommended to maintain the artwork quality However some known issues with Adobe Illustrator Flash export cause some documents to fail to export with this option enabled The Flash Player Security Sandbox provides a secure area in which a Flash map will load Three options are offered e Auto If the file is opened from a Web based URL the sandbox is automatically switched to Network If the file is opened from a file folder the sandbox switches to Local Network When Network is selected Flash Player classifies assets including SWF files from the Internet in separate sandboxes that correspond to their Website origin domains By default these files are authorized to access any resources from their own server but can not load any local files or resources unless these are enabled through the Flash Security Settings see later in this chapter Local With this option Flash Security Settings are not required however only contents from the local host computer can be accessed by Flash Player i e hyperlinks API will
370. or right click Windows or Ctrl click Mac on a column in the dialog box to edit the column visibility either toggling visibility for individual columns or for all columns It is also possible to edit the visibility of attribute columns with the Edit Schema tool This function also allows to Show All Show All Except Properties show only attributes that are non property attributes consequently hiding any visible property attributes or Hide All Zoom to Feature and Auto Zoom To zoom into a specific feature in the attribute table select a single attribute and click the Zoom to Feature button This will automatically fit this feature to the screen and highlight it useful for closer examination or to simply locate it on the map To highlight a specific feature on the page maintaining the current zoom level click another attribute of that feature To automatically zoom to a selected feature enable Auto Zoom in the panel options menu As long as it is enabled the zoom will change every time a different feature is selected Use Lock Zoom Level to maintain the same zoom level for all features selected afterwards Property Attributes The attribute table can also be configured to display property attributes for datasets These attributes describe the current assignment of graphical properties such as the stroke weight style rotation and scale Some of these fields can be edited and provide the ability to modify a map objects graphical properti
371. ords will cause the join to fail Examples of Complex Expressions MAP SELECTIONS or MAP STYLESHEET Expression Result LIKE NAME New All items with the string of letters New in the NAME column are selected e g New Brunswick and Province of Newfoundland STARTSWITH NAME o All items that starts with the letter o Ontario are selected EDIT SCHEMA Expression Result ROUND POPULATION AREA 3 applied to column density All items are calculated as population divided by area rounded to three decimals IF CASE null VALUE gt 0 positive VALUE lt 0 negative A default status of null is assigned unless the value is strictly greater than or less than zero SUBSTITUTE_RX ROAD_NAME D All non digit characters D is the regular expression for non digit char acter are replaced by nothing two double quotes indicate that the new string is blank therefore only numerical values are kept For example if the ROAD NAME equals Route 66 the result is 66 This can be useful to prepare an attribute table prior to labelling roads with road number rather than road names SPLIT GEOLOGIC UNIT 0 All items containing one or more open parenthesis are split in several text blocks as many as there are open parenthesis plus one and returns the first block found index 0 For example if GEOLOGIC UNIT equals Qmw Qc the result is Omw
372. ort for the selected layer IL usroads line 7 A Lower48_area V B US Image Vl _ Model Tree Preferences Set the gt Model Tree display options for 4 World i Vi the selected layer IP Capitals 7 A World area v En purap i ho Sins rA Enable display of attribute A waterbackground Wi i name rather than the Adobe 4 alaska v M Illustrator object name in the E z Adobe Acrobat Model Tree Then Model Tree Preferences P uscities_point choose an attribute from the 7 Use attribute for item name S CITY NAME Y m i drop down list Item Sorting Item Sorting Sort Order Ascending i Sort order choose Ascending or a i Descending for the sorting order v ing Comparison Ei Use Natural String Check Use Natural String Include round trip data Enable this e M 25d option to preserve the Adobe E Indude round trip data 10 rather than 1 10 2 a Illustrator editing capabilities in iu the exported PDF FUNCTIONALITY The MAP Geospatial PDF Export function exports any MAPublisher document containing a MAP View with a specified coordinate system to the Adobe Acrobat Geospatial PDF format while retaining the georeference and attribute information All layers are exported to PDF including non MAP layers regular Adobe Illustrator layers The MAP Geospatial PDF files exported from MAPublisher are compatible with Adobe Acrobat 9 and later The Adobe Acrobat Analysis Tools allow viewing and marking coordinate
373. ote Traditionally slanted text in italic represents depth values in metre straight text represents depths in feet On official nautical charts the actual depth symbol is not plotted the label itself indicates the depth position Two options are possible for the soundings placement relative to the depth point Use standard label style soundings are placed in such a way that the centre of gravity geometric centre of the set of numerals integer and decimal parts coincides with the position referred to This option is the most commonly used e Center on whole number soundings are placed in such a way that the center of gravity of the integer part of the number coincides with the position referred to Depth J position relative to label if it was drawn i f 4 Standard style Centered on whole number Note More information on these standards can be found on the International Hydrographic Office Website www iho int see publication S 4 formerly M 4 The relative size and position of the decimal subscript relative to the integer number regular type is controlled by the Adobe Illustrator document setup Choose the menu File gt Document Setup to change the subscript size and position under Type Options These settings should be performed prior to running the labeling function because they affect the labels placement relative to the source symbols LABEL FEATURES RESULTS When all the Layer Label Options h
374. otoshop Paths Delete LAKES area m Layer Note Click this button to add a layer note A note with no symbol contains a note Switch MAP View Click this button to switch the selected layer from one MAP view to another Remove GIS data moves the selected layer to the Non MAP layers section and removes the georeferencing and attributes in the process Add MAP Layer Creates a new MAP layer in both the MAP Views panel and the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel Opens the Add MAP Layer dialog box Delete selection button Delete the currently selected MAP Layer or MAP View provided it does not Zoom to alaska area Lock alaska area Unlock alaska area Hide alaska area Show alaska area Lock all layers except alaska area Unlock all layers except alaska area Hide all layers except alaska area Show all layers except alaska area contain any map layers Layer Operations Zoom toggle lock and toggle visibility of MAP Views and MAP layers Duplicate Selection Create a duplicate of the currently selected MAP View New MAP View Create a new MAP View and specify its name and coordinate information New MAP View For Photoshop Paths Specify a new MAP View based on paths exported from Geographic Imager Adobe Photoshop Edit Selection Open the MAP View Editor to edit the name and coordinate system of the currently selected MAP View Add MAP Layer
375. ox and then click the Edit button This opens the Edit ArcSDE Geodatabase Connection where connection parameters can be edited To copy an existing connection click the connection name in the Connections tree of the Browse ArcSDE Geodatabase dialog box and then click the Copy button This opens the Copy ArcSDE Geodatabase Connection where connection parameters can be edited To delete an existing connection click the connection name in the Connections tree of the Browse ArcSDE Geodatabase dialog box and then click the Delete button Only a connection that has no dataset associated to it can be deleted so make sure to first delete all recent saved datasets using that connection Important Note for SQL Server Express Users There is an exception for connections to SQL Server Express servers ArcSDE Desktop called Personal in ArcGIS 9 2 and Workgroup Geodatabases In ArcCatalog users set a Database Servers connection where only the server name followed by sqlexpress is required to establish a connection In MAPublisher there is no specific interface for SQL Server Express connections the same interface as for the other types of ArcSDE Geodatabases must be used with specific settings Server name of the server followed by _SQLEXPRESS Service the server name must be preceeded by sde sqlserver and followed by sqlexpress e g sde sqlserver ServerName sqlexpress Database name the name of the database must be known Operating System Aut
376. ox of the generated grid or scale bar choose View gt Show Bounding Box to resize Resizing scale bars horizontally will add or remove intervals from the bar s Resizing scale bars vertically will adjust the width of the bar s Resizing grids horizontally or vertically will add or remove component cells in the grid EXPORTING GRIDS To export a grid you must first expand the object choose Object Expand then move it to an Area layer Alternatively expand your grid move the legend layer to the Non MAP layers category then move it back into the MAP View specifying the feature type as Area MISSING DATA IN GRIDS ON PROJECTED MAP VIEWS Certain projections may cause incomplete grids and graticules to be drawn Such issues may occur if the MAP View is in a polar projection or the extents of the data cross the 180 degree west east meridian If the generation of a grid graticule causes blank or incomplete results the following workflow should be used Reproject the MAP View to a standard Lat Long projection e 9 NAD27 Lat Long Degrees Generate your grid or graticules on this MAP View Expand the object choose Object gt Expand Create a new Area layer in the MAP View Drag the expanded grid to this new layer Reproject the MAP View back to the original projection Uy GRO UNI A3 3 Copy and Paste The MAP Copy Paste function was removed in MAPublisher version 7 You can now achieve the same functionality via Adobe Illustrato
377. p file to open the WinZip self extractor When the files are unzipped proceed to the MAPublisher directory and double click the Setup exe file e Proceed through the installation screens as instructed Options are given to install documentation and tutorial data If these components are selected the files can be subsequently be found here Start gt All Programs Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Tutorials e Launch Adobe Illustrator Proceed to the section about Registration and Licensing MAC OS X Make sure that a compatible version of Adobe Illustrator is installed on the computer If Adobe Illustrator is running exit the program DVDversion Insert the MAPublisher 8 3 DVD Navigate to the MAPublisher 8 3 directory on the DVD and double click the Install MAPublisher 8 3 icon e Electronic version Unstuff the mp83mi e dmg file if this operation has not been completed automatically Then proceed to the MAPublisher 8 3 folder and double click the Install MAPublisher 8 3 icon Proceed through the installation screens as instructed Note that documentation and tutorial data will also be installed After installation these files can be found in the Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Tutorials An Alias to this folder will be created at the end of the installation process which will be placed on the desktop e A Launch Adobe Illustrator Proceed to the section about Registration and Licensing Chapter 1
378. patial parameters coordinate system anchors map scale and rotation Every MAP Layer is shown in this panel as belonging to a particular MAP View Adobe Illustrator layers that do not have georeferencing information e g non map objects such as diagrams and supplemental art are placed in the Non MAP layers category Categories are symbolized in the following manner MAP View Contains layers with georeferenced and attribute information A Non MAP layers Contains layers with no georeferenced or attribute information Each layer that belongs to a MAP View is symbolized in MAPublisher panels and dialog boxes with an icon identifying its feature type A Area layer e g county boundaries urban areas country outlines etc Li Line layer e g rivers roads railways etc Point layer e g town and city symbols railway stations etc Text layer e g text labels O Legend layer for MAPublisher Legend items North Arrows Scale Bars Grids Note Layers are sorted alphabetically or by data type as specified in the MAP Views category in the MAPublisher Preferences see chapter 1 FUNCTIONALITY MAP Views are designed to give eay access to settings for specifying and transforming coordinate systems for editing scale and data placement on the page and for exporting to GIS formats The MAP Views panel allows for merging Adobe Illustrator layers georeferencing existing Adobe Illustrator artwork changing multiple layer names a
379. pecific name for the selection at the top of the dialog box The MAP Datasets previously saved are selectable directly from the Browse ArcSDE Geodatabase dialog box by clicking a MAP Dataset name in the Recent saved MAP Datasets tree The name and connection settings of previously saved MAP Datasets can be changed in the Edit ArcSDE Geodatabase MAP Dataset dialog box opened by clicking the Edit button MAP Datasets may need to be deleted in order to remove the connection that they are based on Click the Delete button to delete a dataset The maximum number of recent MAP Datasets saved with the default name is set in the MAPublisher Preferences for Spatial Database General Spatial Database Editor user named datasets are saved until deleted Settings Parameters relative to the Geodatabases encoding are accessed by clicking the Settings button These settings are described in chapter 3 of this user guide Additionally users can choose to prepend the feature dataset names to the layer name created on import Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases 243 Import ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases Import from Basic ESRI ArcSDE server Format Select Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Simple Import Advanced Import gt Add Simple Import lt Auto detect format gt cannot be used Connections List of connections already ss_ Connections created within MAPublisher MAP Datasets List of recently selected MAP dataset
380. phabetically when selecting for import Sort attributes alphabetically when selecting for import E Automatically connect to z Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases Feature Classes List of directly selected feature classes Use abbreviated table name for layer name ArcSDE Geodatabases tables are identified as databaseName userName tableName The abbreviated version uses only the table name as layer name If this option is used in combination with the use alias option the alias is applied first FUNCTIONALITY ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases can be imported through the Simple Import and Advanced Import functions of MAPublisher Importing ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases requires users to create a connection to the database server containing the database Once a connection is established the feature classes selection is done the same way as for Personal and File Geodatabases by direct selection or SQL query see previous section and using spatial filters The connection parameters to an ArcSDE server are saved with the application The dataset selections called MAP Datasets are also saved the maximum number of default MAP Datasets kept is set in the MAPublisher Preferences for Spatial Database gt General Spatial Database Editor MAP Datasets saved with a specific name other than the default one given are always saved Like the other Geodatabase formats multiple feature classes sharing the same source coordinate system may be se
381. played here 8 Aids2 Ir 66 063 District of Colu E table to the current attribute table D Recordset Navigation Navigate through table records using L is offs b bi Zoom to Feature Click the Feature these controls and indicator e49 areas selected s cmne number or right click the attribute and select Zoom to Feature Selected objects Number Highlight Feature Click the feature p bl of objects selected on the attribute to highlight that feature Show Hide Columns Enable or current layer disable column names to show or hide columns Or choose to show all columns or hide all columns on your map Pop up menus Right click Windows or Ctrl click Mac to display the menus Edit Column Edit the properties In column header In a row ofthe selected column Pe Resize all to fit content 31 Zoom To Feature Hide Column To hide the Delete Col Del h gt Resize AREA to fit content currently selected column Panel options elete Column Delete the Hide Column e ecu Currently selected column fi lew Column E OAA L3 New Column e New Column Adds a new CX Ee Auto Zoom When enabled the Ld New Column WJ Edit AREA column to the attribute table Delete suB REGION e map document will zoom to the LHe Di pese E selected attribute automatically Delete AREA Show Hi
382. plied to the Flash map from Land_area top left corner ial MAP_TITLE Initial Zoom Zoom level when the Flash map is opened Compress Metadata File Check Map Settings Minimum Zoom The minimum this option to compress the zoom level that the map can map data file map xml Width 1585px PanX Opx t Initial Zoom 100 i be set to Height 1585 px PanY 0px t Minimum Zoom 100 4 Maximum Zoom The maximum Preserve Appearance When re E um g izoom level that the map can iximum Zoom H unchecked path simplifications gehia Aiboani be set to are applied by Adobe Illustrator Simplify Outlines Check to V Compress Map Data File map xml recommended Flash Player Security Sandbox Auto Flash Player Security Sandbox simplify outlines of tagged IB Use Preserve Appearance Setting For Flash Export Mad areara area for i i the map that prevents access artwork in the Flash map V Simplify Outlines of Tagged Artwork to private data Depending JPEG Image Quality amp Resolution JPEG Image Quality amp Resolution Low High on location of final Flash map Drag the slider to control choose Local or Network It is the amount of JPEG file set to Auto by default compression Viewer Style Viewer Settings See next section for more details See next section for more details Web Export Dialog Web Export Dialog Viewer Style Use ees D ewer Sve Mewar Sets TBipertSetings vener siie Vener senos m setting to co
383. pose the scale bar To subdivide some of the intervals or cells in the bar s choose a number from the Number of intervals to subdivide list The subdivided cells will begin from the left of the bar s The Number of sub intervals that compose each of these cells can be specified in the next list As required choose to Add an interval left of zero Labelling Options Choose a Character style for the scale bar labels by choosing a style from the list The label options allow adding extra scaling information to the generated scale bar The text that is generated by this tool is displayed in the Preview panel when the options are set Generate Scale Bar Click OK to place the selected scale bar on the legend layer at a default position lower left corner of the artboard The Adobe Illustrator editing tools may be used to move the scale bar to a desirable location Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows 177 Scale Bar EDIT ASCALE BAR Use the bounding box of the generated scale bar View gt Show Bounding Box to resize Resizing scale bars horizontally will add or remove intervals from the bar s Resizing vertically will adjust the width of the bar s Scale bars can also be resized using the Adobe Illustrator menu Object gt Transform gt Transform Each by changing the horizontal or vertical scales To change the design of the scale bar or to modify any parameter without generating a new version select the scale bar and access the
384. ption is enabled or not Adjust the Priority value of layers to adjust the sequence of label placement Existing rules may be deleted by selecting them from the Rule drop down list and then clicking the delete button Faj Rules are saved to the location set in MAPublisher Preferences see chapter 1 The default locations are Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Rules Windows Vista 7 C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Rules Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In LabelPro Rules Note Labeling results will vary depending on which rules are enabled If no rules are enabled MAP LabelPro will not perform any labeling 226 Chapter 18 MAP LabelPro MAPublisher LabelPro Rules AREA RULES The Area Rules dialog box contains the label configuration options for labeling Area layers Rules can be set by selecting an area feature type layer and clicking the Rules edit button Lai in the Rules column The placement settings in the screenshot below represent the default configuration however these settings may be changed to match any labeling requirements Click the Save As button to save the label configuration The rule will be saved with a user assigned name Click OK to apply the current settings r Area Ries Allow stacking Labels are Allow horizontal inside Placement i allowed to stack up toa La
385. r in a hierarchical order and can be reordered by clicking the rule and clicking the Up or Down button The Reduce font size option provides for reducing the size of the font to a specified minimum size in points Reduce horizontal scaling allows text to be scaled down horizontally by the percentage specified Label Features also provides an additional option not applicable in MAP Tagger If any of the labels have been adjusted in size due to the activation of a line adjustment rule all labels can be resized to the same size by checking the Set all labels to the same minimum font size option If no rules are enabled MAPublisher will not perform any label scaling If none of the rules specified in the panel can be satisfied MAPublisher will default to placing the label centered over the line Also note that text generated for Line labels will be automatically orientated above the lines irrespective of the direction of line digitization 138 Chapter 10 Labelling Functions Label Features MAPublisher places Area labels depending on the shape and size of the area polygon Click the Area Labels button to assign MAPublisher Area Label Settings The High Placement Accuracy option makes more advanced calculations for the label positions so as to force them to fall within the area boundaries useful for areas with strange shapes for example some S shape islands However it does slows down the labeling process so a Low accuracy can be prefer
386. r mapwebauthor css This site includes full maps CSS samples and examples of CSS code WEB EXPORT DIALOG VIEWER SETTINGS In the Viewer Settings tab check uncheck any of the options to enable disable them Most of these options are enabled by default unless otherwise specified The visibility of these controls may also be set through an external CSS file specified in the Viewer Style tab Navigation e Enable Navigation Displays all of the navigation buttons search box layers list and overview map Show Panning Widget Show pan widget in map viewer Show Zooming Widget Show zoom widget in map viewer Show Search Box Show search box in the map viewer Automatically Zoom to Search Results Zoom the map viewer to search results Disabled by default Show Click Callout for Search Results Show click callouts for search results Disabled by default Show Layer List Show the layer list in the map viewer Show Overview Map Show the overview map in the map viewer e Drag Map With Mouse to Pan Allows the user to pan the map using the mouse in the map viewer Callout Bubbles Show the Click Callout Bubble Display a callout bubble when a feature with a Web tag is clicked e Use Lightbox Style for Click Callout Disabled by default Show the Hover Callout Bubble Displays a callout bubble when a feature with a Web tag is moused over e Use Full Callout Content for Hover Callout Displays full callou
387. r native Copy Paste tools Use Edit gt Copy or Edit gt Cut to copy art Deselect the art Select the destination layer in the Layers panel Use Edit gt Paste in Front or Edit gt Paste in Back to paste the art into the new layer at its previous location SU When pasting to layers which already contain an attribute structure the destination layer must have an attribute schema which matches the source layer only attributes in common will be transferred When pasting to layers which contain no attribute structure the destination layer will be assigned the same attribute schema as the source layer The destination layer can be contained in any MAP View as required Thedestination layer must be of a matching feature type as the source layer Pasted data will always maintain its attributes If you paste into a non map layer drag this layer into a MAP View then recreate the schema attributes will be populated appropriately Legacy Text Conversion Opening legacy files you may be prompted to update text legacy text conversion Only text objects that are associated to attributes are required to be updated For other text with no attributes you do not necessarily need to update Legacy Text Conversion MAPublisher has detected that this document contains legacy Illustrator text art Upd Illustrator will not recognize such text as true text art until that art is converted and MAPublisher will not display attribute
388. rcSDE servers and also to load previously selected MAP datasets ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabase Connection In MAPublisher users apply the same connection parameters as they do in the ESRI application interface such as ArcCatalog with an exception for SQL Server Express connections Connection name recognizable name in the list of connection Server server name provided by the database administrator Service service name provided by the database administrator e Database name provided by the database administrator e Account information Database authentication user name and password provided by the database administrator or Operating system authentication uses the Windows login name must be enabled by the database administrator Connection details Transactional version provided by the database administrator or historical version enter date and time Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases 241 Import ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases The same connections parameters are available when creating a new connection editing or copying an existing one To create anew connection click anywhere on the Connections tree of the Browse ArcSDE Geodatabase dialog box This enables the Create New button that opens the Create New ArcSDE Geodatabase Connection dialog box where the connection parameters are to be entered To edit an existing connection click the connection name in the Connections tree of the Browse ArcSDE Geodatabase dialog b
389. rdinate values MAPublisher supports the following delimiters between data values comma return end of line and tab To import delimited text data first specify the Format Projected Units Decimal Degrees Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds Degrees Minutes Degrees MinutesSeconds Packed DMS with decimals and Packed DMS see chapter 6 for more details In the Coordinate Columns specify the fields in the source file that contains the coordinate information The caption of the fields display Longitude and Latitude or X and Y depending on the selected format If the first line of the text file contains column headings check the Use first line as a header option although MAPublisher generally detects it automatically If the file does not appear to contain column headers MAPublisher will assign the default headers Column Column2 to the attribute columns on import Importing Data Once the files are selected and settings specified click OK to start the import process If the Adobe Illustrator document contains a MAP View with a coordinate system matching the incoming data the Matching MAP View dialog box will open with the following options Add to choose the MAP View from the drop down list in which to add the incoming data Check the option Resize MAP View to fit to rescale all the data existing and incoming to fit on the artboard If this option is not checked the imported data may fall outside the page extents Fitto page based o
390. re necessary to create additional points to curves to retain their true shape This can be done globally by using the Adobe Illustrator Add Anchor Points function via Object gt Path gt Add Anchor Points This version of MAPublisher supports Bezier curve features during the following operations Scale and Projection transformations via the MAP View Editor A Area and length calculations CREATING SYMBOLS FOR USE IN POINT STYLESHEETS A MAPublisher Symbol Library and a National Parks Symbol Library are supplied in the Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder on the MAPublisher DVD You may also find that a search on the internet may be useful for finding additional libraries If you are required to create new symbols the steps below will help you to quickly create symbols manually in Adobe Illustrator 1 Use Adobe Illustrator Tools for the manual creation of artwork that will comprise the new symbol If you wish to use a character that are contained in a font library select the text character instance and click the menu Type Create Outlines to convert the text to vector art 2 Open the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel Window gt Symbols 3 Select the artwork that will comprise the new symbol and drag it into the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel double click the symbol in this panel to assign a name 4 When MAP Stylesheet Editor is accessed for Point Stylesheets this symbol will be available in the Style column CREATING A STYLESHEET TEMP
391. re organized in different categories This structure allows grouping into a logical collection for convenience per continent country or local sub divisions The folders listed below represent the default schema for the coordinate systems in the Custom Coordinate Systems dialog box Each folder option may be expanded by clicking the node adjacent to the folder name A2 11 ALL Lists all the coordinate systems available in the database RECENT Lists the last 10 coordinate systems used SEARCH Lists the most recent results of a Search operation GEODETIC Lists the geodetic coordinate systems in the database PROJECTED Lists the projected coordinate systems in the database Folder amp Angular Units Coordinate Points 5 Coordinate Systems All Recent Projected coordinate system options Recent Search Africa Antarctica Arctic Asia Europe Example Systems NOT FOR USE North America E amp amp Oceania amp Other Outdated Deprecated South America w UTM World Datum Shifts Ellipsoids Envelopes Horizontal Datums Linear Units Prime Meridians To define or edit Coordinate Systems you must select an Envelope defining the appropriate area of use If you are unsure of the appropriate envelope you can leave it set to the default World envelope The Point Style is how you will select the style of linear un
392. re the native files created for Bentley Systems Inc MicroStation product These files consist of a header followed by a series of elements The header contains global information including the transformation equation from design units to user coordinates as well as the dimension of the elements in the file Each element contains standard display information such as its colour level class and style as well as a number of attributes specific to its element type For example a text element has fields for font size and the text string in addition to the standard display attributes Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions dgn Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support No Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses Yes Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute igds type Point Yes 3D Support Yes Line Yes Text Yes Supported Versions Windows V7 V8 Mac OS X V7 V8 Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import Note versions V7 and V8 are supported for import attached raster files are ignored Group Elements Choose how you want to group the elements of the file on import If you group the elements by level it may result in a large number of output file
393. rements for this option please refer to chapter 19 of this user guide PREREQUISITES In order to join a table into an existing attribute schema both MAP Layer and data table must share at least one common attribute column with matching values The column must be of a matching type i e String Real Integer Boolean in both the Source and the Destination table If not the join may not be successful 92 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Join Table USING JOIN TABLE x Click the Join Table button or choose Join Table in the MAP Attributes panel options menu Source Data Files Click the Browse button to select the data table for import If a Microsoft Excel file is selected use the Worksheet drop down list to specify the sheet to be used for joining Select a column in the Matching Column drop down list This is the attribute column to join on In MAPublisher double byte characters are supported in attributes on import allowing such attributes to be used for labelling and export To assign a codec suitable for the selected dataset choose an appropriate entry from the Character Encoding drop down list If the table contains column names as headers check the First line contains column names option If it does not contain headers do not check this option and each column will be assigned a default heading name Column1 Column2 etc Source Data ESRI geodatabases Windows users with licensed ESRI software can join tables with feature c
394. response within any specified time MAPublisher Maintenance Program subscribers receive free and unlimited support All others are eligible for support at the rate of US 49 per incident email support avenza com online form http www avenza com support form phone 1 416 487 6442 A1 16 MAPUBLISHER MAINTENANCE PROGRAM MMP The MAPublisher Maintenance Program is a subscription based service plan that guarantees its members unlimited priority technical support guaranteed same business day 9 4 EST or next business day response unlimited telephone support 1 416 487 6442 free MAPublisher updates free MAPublisher version upgrades additional discounts and offers available to MMP members only Your MAPublisher purchase includes a one year membership in the MAPublisher Maintenance Program so you are well on the way to worry free use of MAPublisher for the first year and will be able to enjoy all the benefits of the MMP immediately All MAPublisher Maintenance Program subscriptions begin on the date of purchase and run for one calendar year Your email address has been automatically entered in the mp maintenance l online email list for MMP subscribers so that you are assured of receiving all the latest MMP news and access to all the update and upgrade files If you purchased your MAPublisher license from a reseller or are the end user but not the person who purchased the software please contact us at sales avenza com to en
395. rform Coordinate System Transformation check box the MAP View must contain data for this option to be available Users have three options to select the destination coordinate system Select a coordinate system from the MAPublisher database click the Specify button in the Perform Coordinate System Transformation frame to open the Specify Destination Coordinate System dialog box Select a coordinate system used by another MAP View in the document click the Same as check box and select the appropriate MAP View in the drop down list This does not affect the page position Select a coordinate system from another file click From File to set the destination coordinate system using an external file e g wkt map prj or tab The Preview Pane displays the new data extents for the transformed MAP View however the thumbnails view is not available until the transformation is finalized by clicking the 0K button in the MAP View Editor Some coordinate system transformations require a datum shift When this is the case MAPublisher selects the most appropriate datum transformation This can be edited by clicking the Specify button in the datum shifts frame and selecting another datum transformation see appendix A2 and Avenza Projections Guide pdf for more information Note Coordinate system transformations are also performed by layer drag and drop between MAP Views Specify Coordinate System The Specify Source Destination Coordinate System di
396. ria directly into the Find what entry field previous criteria can be selected from the list A search may be performed on all attributes by default or only on specific columns contained within the MAP Attributes panel by enabling the Just option and choosing a column from the list Criteria may be further refined by enabling the Case sensitive and Match whole word only options Click the Find Next button to perform the search Search results can be seen in the MAP Attributes panel the column header and row number containing the first matching record will be displayed in bold text At this point a search for individual records can be done again by clicking the Find Next button Find amp Replace To replace records selected through the Find operation click the Replace tab Find amp Replace criteria can be typed directly into the Find what and Replace with entry fields previous criteria can be selected from the lists A find and replace may be performed on all attributes by default or only on specific columns contained within the MAP Attributes panel by enabling the Just option and choosing a column from the list Criteria may be further refined by enabling the Case sensitive and Match whole word only options There are two methods to replace values The first method requires approving each replacement manually by Clicking the Replace button so that each instance of the attribute located via the search parameters is successively replaced in the
397. ries and all countries with populations less than one million are assigned the selected style CONTAINS CONTINENT America AND POPULATION gt 1000000 Result only countries in North and South America with populations more than one million are assigned the selected style CONTINENT Europe AND POPULATION gt 1000000 OR CONTINENT Asia AND POPULATION gt 10000000 Result countries in Europe with populations more than one million and countries in Asia with populations more than ten million are assigned the selected style A3 2 Grid and Scalebar Operations EDITING CUSTOM ART Manually editing type position font colour etc is not possible on Grids and Scale Bars in their default grouped state Manual editing is possible but objects must be first expanded choose Object gt Expand Note that this will negate any opportunity to subsequently edit the art using MAPublisher editing tools If you require a different design to be used for your Grid or Scale Bar or wish to change any parameter without generating a new version simply select the Grid or Scale Bar and choose Object gt Edit Grid or Scale Bar This will re open the Grids and Graticules or Scale Bar dialog box with the current parameters of the object for subsequent editing Editing the style of text text colour font alignment etc used in the Grid or Scale Bar can be achieved by modifying the properties of the style in the Character Styles panel Use the bounding b
398. rings around points FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher Buffer Art creates A Area objects around points and lines This may be useful when attempting to calculate distances on each side of a road or creating proximity around city points For example this tool could be used in the planning of new roads where the actual width of a highway is a major consideration PREREQUISITES To use Buffer Art the artwork must be on a Point layer USING BUFFER ART If required select the art to buffer and choose Object MAPublisher Buffer Art or the MAPublisher toolbar button H Buffers are added to all art on the specified layer unless the option to only buffer select art is checked The buffer width can be entered as a fixed value or by selecting an attribute column that contains numeric values With the Static Value option checked a buffer is created by the specified value With the Attribute Value option checked a buffer is calculated and created based on the value related to the selected object in the attribute table Set the buffer value units in the Units drop down list For example a value of 10 map units would create a buffer of 5 map units around a point or line Choose an existing Al Area layer as the destination for the new buffer Alternatively specify a new layer name to create a new layer where the buffer areas will be stored Click OK to generate the buffers Buffer Options Enable the Apply Style option and choose a preset
399. rithm compares points in a line or polygon in groups of three When the shortest segment is found the center point is removed and the total segment distances are recalculated This removal process continues until the maximum allowable number of points is reached Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 51 Simple Import Advanced Import File Import Map Data Advanced and MAP Toolbar y Coordinate System coordinate a Advanced Import system of the data source Data Source Map file s to be imported full path or just file name depending on MAPublisher Preferences see chapter 1 Coordinate System DataSource Features File List This is a table in WGS 84 3 world mif 220 where all files selected for import are listed 2 Robinson J worldeast shp 164 3 NAD27 3 usa tab 51 Destination MAP View Add Remove tdt P New based on Imports all of the files to one of the coordinate systems in the Destination MAP View Fletst LU e nenban Use existing Allows users e Use existing to import all ofthe files in E Auto a coordinate system that already exists in a MAP View Create new Editor in the document Auto scale If multiple files are Coordinate System WGS 84 Page Anchors 0 0 Visual Scale 1 143439510 133121 Map Anchors 180 0000 90 0000 Map Angle 0 Features Number of objects to be
400. rk IMPORTANT Some peripheral components might interfere with the activation process Before activating MAPublisher users must temporarily unplug or disable mobile phone blue tooth wireless or GPS systems Laptop users with a docking station must activate MAPublisher in the undocked state After the installation of MAPublisher 8 launch Adobe Illustrator The MAPublisher Welcome Screen will appear automatically This screen gives four licensing options Evaluate Register Retrieve and Floating Note To continue to use Adobe Illustrator without MAPublisher cancel this dialog box and activate MAPublisher license later by navigating to the Help menu in Adobe Illustrator and then to MAPublisher Licensing gt License Management MAPublisher panels are marked with a lock icon when the software is not licensed r Welcome to MAPublisher Machine ID When moving or activating a license through the internet or by e mail computer s Jason Anderson David Andrec Tara Dennis Garvan Keeley dosh Knauer Michael Law Shane Li V ronique Lutes J gat SYSTEMS INC www avenza com Michael Marsella Stephen Maxwell Andrew Patterson liya Varaev Kimiko Watanabe Michael Yakubovsky amp Peter Zhang Avenza Support 1 416 487 6442 Avenza Sales 1 416 487 5116 Machine ID here can be found here r License Management Evaluate Register L Retrieve ai Floating s License status Licensed
401. rk using MAPublisher tools plot points labels legends grids scale bars and north arrows Click the Add MAP Layer button a to create a new Adobe Illustrator layer placed directly into the selected MAP View Specify the appropriate Layer name and Feature type for the new layer To generate artwork using MAPublisher tools specify the Feature Type as follow T for Text items Label Features MAP Tagger chapter 10 and MAPublisher LabelPro chapter 18 require a Text layer as destination for Point symbols Point Plot see chapter 6 will not function without a Point layer selected for Legend items Grids and Graticules see chapter 13 Scale Bars and North Arrows see chapter 14 must be placed on Legend layers Note The Advanced option Base attribute schema on allows to copy the attribute schema from an existing MAP Layer see chapter 5 for details This option is required to enable the copy of attributes from source to destination layers in the MAPublisher labelling tools and Plot Centroids function See respective chapters Reproject MAP Layers using the MAP Views Panel The MAP Views panel can be used to move Adobe Illustrator layers from one MAP View to another enabling to reproject vector art quickly Layers can be moved via drag and drop or with the new Switch MAP View button gt i Raster imagery cannot be reprojected with MAPublisher Alternatively use the drag and drop method For example to reproject a layer
402. rnative method of importing map data into Adobe Illustrator This function can import files in multiple formats and coordinate systems All files flagged for import are displayed in the dialog box with information relative to their coordinate system All imported files are reprojected to match a selected coordinate system Note Advanced Import is recommended when importing data that will require a coordinate system transformation that implies redrawing and path divisions e g world data reprojected from European to North American aspect Applying a coordinate system transformation during Advanced Import allows MAPublisher to split paths during transformation which is not possible at a later stage Divided paths are grouped as compound paths PREREQUISITES Use Advanced Import either before or after an Adobe Illustrator document is created If no document is open Advanced Import will initiate the New Document dialog box Please refer to the Simple Import Prerequisites section in this chapter USING ADVANCED IMPORT The MAPublisher Advanced Import is accessed from the Adobe Illustrator menu File gt Import MAP Data gt Advanced Import or by clicking the MAPublisher Toolbar button 3 or by using the keyboard shortcut Alt Shift Ctrl A Dialog Box Overview The top part of the Advanced Import dialog box provides a list of the selected files their coordinate system information and the number of features they contain The bottom part of the di
403. rnings may appear when opening files exported with Local option enabled These can be ignored 196 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Web Export Dialog MAP Web Author Workflow MAPublisher 8 is installed with tutorial materials It is recommended that users work with the exercises in order to gain familiarity with MAPublisher tools The tutorial materials have an exercise dedicated to the new MAP Web Author panel The following workflow can be used for guidance 1 MAP COMPILATION WITH ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR MAPUBLISHER 8 Users must create their map document using MAPublisher 8 and Adobe Illustrator tools If the only purpose of the map is to create a Flash map consider at this stage the document size parameter as this determines the size of map viewer extents in the Web browser 2 PREPARING FOR MAP WEB AUTHOR a Create a working directory Create a folder on your computer This folder is used to store all the components for the Web Flash map and the exported Flash files b Prepare graphics for callouts Images or Flash animations that will be used in the Web tagging process must be grouped in a Source Media Folder When inserting graphics using a MAP Attributes field for multiple artwork note that it is not possible to change the graphic dimensions in the Web Tag Dialog Graphic dimensions should be set beforehand c Set document size for the Flash map If the document size hasn t been set at step one document creation it should be mo
404. roblems such as complex conflict resolution across multiple layers the ability to specify data as obstacles and the ability to create complex labeling conventions via user defined rules The MAPublisher LabelPro engine uses map data attributes for labeling and provides a much greater level of sophistication and control that can be configured through an intuitive user interface Data layers may be assigned an order of prioritization for labeling sequences and existing text can be recognized as obstacles for multiple labeling sessions if necessary Placement rules and properties once set can be saved to a file and imported into other files or shared over a network Only Point Line and Area layers can be labeled using MAPublisher LabelPro however Text layers may only be used as obstacles PREREQUISITES MAPublisher LabelPro can only be used in conjunction with MAPublisher documents MAPublisher LabelPro generates static text meaning the map extent and scale should be established prior to labeling Once placed labels do not maintain a link with the source data Before labeling with MAPublisher LabelPro it is necessary to create the destination 1 Text layer s layers on which the new labels will be contained To use suppression layer s for labels that could not be placed by MAPublisher LabelPro create other text layer s for this purpose To create a new text layer use the Add MAP Layer function in the MAP View panel see chapter 4
405. rojected map PREREQUISITES Any Adobe Illustrator artwork path or symbol may be used as a base to create a north arrow The only requirement is that the art resides on a O Legend layer and be selected This Legend layer must be hosted by the MAP View base for the alignment of the north arrow Note Sample north arrow symbol designs are included on the MAPublisher DVD Go to Window gt Symbol Libraries gt Other Library navigate to the Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder on the DVD and load the MAP NorthArrows ai file To add the base North Arrow symbol drag the required symbol from the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel onto the Legend layer and then execute Create North Arrow CREATING A NORTH ARROW Select the piece of art to be converted to a north arrow and then choose Object MAPublisher Create North Arrow or click the MAPublisher toolbar button hs Upon creation the selected art is aligned to true north based on the coordinate system of the host MAP View and its position on the map If the north arrow symbol is repositioned on the map it will be re oriented to the true north at the new location Note Ifthe selected art is not already a symbol it is converted to an Adobe Illustrator symbol and is added to the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows 179 Create North Arrow i Tm i Eit PTS jr MAP Web Author Users should h
406. rom the menu Object gt MAPublisher gt MAP LabelPro Chapter 18 MAP LabelPro 221 MAP LabelPro MAPublisher LabelPro Settings SETUP LAYERS Before labeling the Setup Layers dialog box must be configured to specify which MAP Layers are to be labeled and which layers if any will be denoted as obstacles Obstacles are map objects that are included in the conflict resolution decision making process and are considered objects that must be avoided when trying to place a label The Setup Layers dialog box displays all valid MAP Views and their MAP Layers in the document To mark a layer for labeling purposes or as an obstacle check the appropriate check boxes to the right of the layer name All layers are listed but only layers that are checked will be included in the labeling process or considered as obstacles Note Layers may be used as both a label and an obstacle concurrently It is possible to perform labeling operations for multiple MAP Views simultaneously however source data layers and destination text layers must belong to the same MAP View Label Enable the check box for Setup Layers each data layer to be labeled Enabling the option beside the L Name Label Obstacle wr MAP View name will enable Name Displays all MAP Views and Ree cain the label option for all the data l 4 San Francisco Downtown a layers that belong to it that may be specified for m HIGHWAY INTERSTAT
407. rotation e g degrees or radians Coordinate Points Point Style A coordinate point is used to define the orientation of axes used and the type of units used in the system Coordinate Systems Coordinate Reference Systems A coordinate system is a complete definition needed to express the context of a set of map data Datum Shifts Parameters to transform coordinates from one Datum to another Ellipsoids An Ellipsoid gives a horizontal datum its size and shape An ellipsoid does not have an origin and cannot be used as a base model for coordinates on its own Envelopes Defines a geographic area of use for a particular object Horizontal Datums A horizontal datum more commonly referred to as just datum is the base model maps are built on All coordinate systems must have a datum associated with them to be related to any other map Without a known datum coordinates are meaningless Linear Units Units for measuring straight line cartesian distances PrimeMeridians The prime meridian represents the line of longitude that is designated as 0 degrees All other lines of longitude are expressed by the angle by which they deviate from the prime meridian Together with the equator of an ellipsoid the prime meridian defines the origin of a geodetic coordinate system A prime meridian is defined by the angle that separates it from the Greenwich meridian A2 4 Users have the possibility to define new coordinate systems
408. rrent layer upon which the plotting operation is being conducted and is prefixed with change_in_speed For example if plotting is in progress on a layer called ABCD the layer created for the change in speed plots will be named change_in_speed_ ABCD Plot By Change in Heading Change in heading points are plotted in addition to the points plotted while completing one of the standard plot options Plot by Time Plot By Distance or Route To enable this setting choose Plot by Change in Heading then check the Enable this Auxillary GPS Plot Type from the bottom of the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel The settings for Scale Every and Plot Symbol must also be specified When plotting begins a new layer will automatically be created specifically for the change in heading points The layer name is based on the name of the current layer upon which the plotting operation is being conducted and is prefixed with change_in_heading For example if the main plotting is in progress ona layer called ABCD the layer created for the change in heading plots will be named change_in_heading_ ABCD 206 Chapter 16 MAP GPS MAP GPS Point Plot Settings MAP GPS Autosave Settings Accessed from the MAP GPS panel options menu MAP GPS Autosave Settings Automatic Save Click the check box Automatically Save Document every 5 gt minute s to enable this option and set it to the desired time for Automatic saving to occur Ga
409. rted SELECTFC Point Shape FC Point Valve ID FROM FC Point In feature class FC Line import lines vector only that have the attribute Id equals to 1 2 3 or 4 SELECTFC Line Shape FROM FC Line WHERE FC Line ld IN 1 2 3 4 Use the Validate button in the Create SQL Select Query dialog box to verify the query syntax prior to import Multiple feature classes can be imported using multiple SQL statements separated by a semi colon as long as all classes share the same source coordinate system SOL queries can also be used to import a feature class and the attribute information from a related non spatial table see previous section To perform SQL queries on multiple feature classes with different source coordinate systems use the Advanced Import and add the feature classes in several Add sessions see chapter 3 for more information on the Advanced Import Recently used SOL queries are saved and accessed by clicking the Recent button The number of recent queries saved is set in the MAPublisher Preferences on Spatial Database General Spatial Database Editor see chapter 1 Settings Parameters relative to the Geodatabases encoding are accessed by clicking the Settings button These settings are described in chapter 3 of this user guide Additionally users can choose to prepend the feature dataset names to the layer name created on import 238 Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases Import ESRI Personal and File Geodatabases
410. s Note The nput Coordinate System is not applied to the distance settings when plotting a line by Course amp Distance In that case the layer s coordinate system applies Starting Point Enter the coordinates of the first point of the line in the X Y or Long Lat fields Options The Close Path option controls if the path will be closed automatically or not When using Line Plotter on a layer this option is disabled by default On an A Area layer the Close Path option is enabled by default it i is not recommended to create open paths on an area layer A minimum of three vertices are required to create a closed path If less points are entered the path is left opened by the Line Plotter Plot Line Point by Point The Point by Point option in the Additional Line Points drop down list provides a method to add consecutive line vertices or nodes by typing in the coordinates of each point This option is typically used to create a line from a list of known locations Note Alternatively the Join Points function could be used to connect points already plotted on the map To add a new point click the 9 button Then enter the new point coordinates based on the selected Input Coordinate System and Format if the coordinate system is geodesic To remove a point select a row and click the 8 button Plot Line by Course and Distance The Course amp Distance option of the Additional Line Points drop down list allows to def
411. s A document can contain as many MAP Stylesheets as desired The MAP Stylesheets panel options menu offers functions to delete and duplicate stylesheets A MAP Stylesheet can be deleted only when it contains no MAP layers the Delete MAP Stylesheet button is disabled itis not empty Associated MAP Layers must be moved to No MAP Stylesheet or into another stylesheet using drag and drop or with the Switch MAP Stylesheet button gt Select a MAP Stylesheet and click the Delete MAP Stylesheet button at the base of the panel or by choosing Delete Stylesheet in the panel options menu If a MAP Stylesheet is deleted by accident simply use Undo to restore it Note Note that moving a stylesheet to No MAP Stylesheet will not restore the data to its default symbology it will simply remove the relationship between attribute value and style symbol Choose Duplicate Stylesheet to create a copy of an existing MAP Stylesheet Although the copy does not contain any MAP Layers the style rules which exist between attributes of the original layer and the symbology are intact This is useful when creating different versions of a map for each stylesheet duplicate edit the styles that relate to each value in each stylesheet To apply the different styles move MAP Layers from one stylesheet to another using drag and drop or with the Switch MAP Stylesheet button rs 128 Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheets Panel Name Edit name of the MA
412. s Create new Opens the Create new Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server connection dialog box Format Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server OK Dataset J ead Encoding Unicode 8 bit UTF 8 Source Coordinate System No Coordinate System Specified Same as Browse Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Browse Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Select Connection or MAP Dataset ArcSDE Basic Connection Recent saved MAP Datasets ed Edit createNew icon Delete Create Edit Copy Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server connection Connection Settings Specify the connection settings Connection Name Server Service and Database Name as specified in the database Connection Properties in ESRI ArcCatalog See next page for specific details for SQL Server Express connection Desktop and Workgroup Geodatabases User Name Password Specify if the authentication information provided by the database administrator Note Create New Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Connection Test Connection Connection Name New_Connection Cx MR Service Service name Database Name Database name Version Version S 1 User Name user Password LIII E Check if you want MAPublisher to remember your password Test Connection Tests the connection parameters prior to accessing datasets Brows
413. s 123 Simplify Lines RESULTS All selected lines or areas are simplified according to the settings Simplified lines or areas will not be simplified again unless the tolerance value is increased For example if a line has been simplified with a proximity of 1 5 km then it will not be simplified again until the tolerance is set to a value larger than 1 5 km In practice it means that simplified lines can be selected again with non simplified lines to run the function again when the Simplify Lines function is run only the new lines will be simplified unless the proximity value is increased Notes It is a good idea to perform simplify lines on artwork before exporting a Flash map This will reduce the file size and improve performance and loading times To smooth the appearance of paths using Bezier curves use the Adobe Illustrator Simplify tool located in the menu Object Path Simplify 124 Chapter 8 Line Functions Simplify Lines MAP Stylesheets MAPublisher MAP Stylesheets provide extensive tools for quick easy and accurate styling of points lines areas and text MAP Stylesheets are able to read and work with the Kristus Piedz ve av f data found in the MAP Attributes panel and apply symbols graphic styles and character styles to artwork based on specified criteria The topics covered in this section are as follows MAP Stylesheets Panel MAP Stylesheet Editor Create MAP Stylesheet Legend Chap
414. s By Level is the default Coordinate Units Choose Master or UOR Unit of Resolution as the coordinate units Master is the default White Lines and Fills Enabling the Import as is option will instruct MAPublisher to import the data true to the original colour settings contained in the file Check the Change white lines and fills to black box to import black lines instead of the files native white lines Check the Create black background option to incorporate a layer containing a black background to mimic the AutoCAD environment Other Check Drop complex chains if you want each component of a complex chain to be returned as its own feature otherwise all elements of the complex chain will be merged into a single linear feature Note Line weight in Microstation are integer number only as such the Microstation export will round the Adobe Illustrator stroke width 0 is a valid line weight in Microstation A1 9 S57 FORMAT 000 S57format is intended for the exchange of digital hydrographic data between national hydrographic offices and for its distribution to manufacturers mariners and other data users It is used for the supply of ENC cells Electronic Navigational Charts to ECDIS Electronic Chart Display and Information System The format is public developed and maintained by the IHO International Hydrographic Office CHRIS working committee Committee on Hydrographic Requirements for Information Systems The objects spatial
415. s before contacting Avenza technical support as your situation may be easily addressed by one of the answers contained therein MAPublisher Online Resources The Avenza Systems Inc Website provides additional source of information to assist you in the use of MAPublisher The Avenza Resources are located at http www avenza com resources Avenza Resources Blog tips how tos and news on MAPublisher and Geographic Imager software Map Gallery examples of maps created with MAPublisher User Forums and Frequently Asked Questions answers to common technical questions may be found in the Common Support Issues and FAQs category All users with a MAPublisher license evaluation or permanent can post and read topics under the General Questions for Evaluation and Licensed Users category Additionally users with maintenance have access to the Maintenance Users category There users can find additional information relative to software updates etc MAP Web Author API and CSS find advanced information on MAP Web Author API functions and CSS support see chapter 15 for more details Contacting Avenza Technical Support Avenza offers a number of methods for direct communication with our qualified and experienced technical experts Please have your MAPublisher registration details handy to get prompt attention and include it in any email correspondence Support issues are handled on a first come first served basis Avenza does not guarantee a
416. s etc for geodetic coordinate systems linear units such as metre feet for projected coordinate systems The Proximity value or simplification tolerance is based on the vertical difference between the begin end line and points off a line not the distance between anchor points on the line The Douglas Peucker algorithm takes the proximity value and iterates through the line vertices to determine the points that fall within the specified proximity distance off the line and removes those vertices Once all vertices are determined to be greater than the proximity value the line processing ends A smaller proximity value will usually result in a fewer number of nodes being removed USING SIMPLIFY LINES To use Simplify Lines choose Object MAPublisher Simplify Lines or the MAPublisher toolbar button F Entera proximity value in Page Units or Map Units by making a selection from the Units drop down list Page Units are the units of the current document Enter a proximity value in the unit specified by typing a value or by using the arrows Click the Preview button to see the simplification result before committing to it The Vertex Count shows how many vertices are in the simplified result and calculates a percentage of overall simplification Adjust the proximity as necessary in order to achieve the desired results particular to the scale and coverage area Click OK to perform to complete the simplify function Chapter 8 Line Function
417. s viewing attributes measuring distances perimeters and areas With Acrobat Pro and Pro Extended the measurement tool is always enabled To enable this tool in Acrobat Reader 9 standard the file must first be opened in Acrobat Pro to enable annotations on the PDF menu Comments Enable for commenting and analysis Note MAP Geospatial PDF files can also be opened in Adobe Acrobat 8 however no geospatial information will be visible only attributes 212 Chapter 17 Export Geospatial PDF MAP Geospatial PDF Export PREREQUISITES MAP Geospatial PDF Export can only be used with MAPublisher documents that is to say the document must contain at least one MAP View with a specified coordinate system All coordinate systems within MAPublisher are supported including user defined systems Multiple MAP Views are supported with no limitation With some unusual coordinate systems measurements in Adobe Acrobat may not give proper results This is an Adobe Acrobat limitation Predefined coordinate systems with an EPSG code will provide accurate results Users should complete their map using MAPublisher and Adobe Illustrator tools prior to exporting styling simplification etc Depending on the expected behavior of the geospatial PDF attributes layers and MAP Views might need additional manipulations as explained hereafter MAPublisher legacy files created with version 8 1 or earlier must first be saved with MAPublisher 8 3 prior to
418. s contained between the both tags Both the opening and closing tags use the same key code but the closing tag is preceded by an initial extra forward slash sign Examples of text formatting Opening Tag Closing Tag Result lt b gt Maps of the worl d lt b gt gt Maps of the World lt i gt Maps of the world lt i gt gt Maps of the World Examples Some HTML tags are used to insert links and images e a href http ww avenza com gt Avenza Web Page lt a gt Creates a link to www avenza com accessed when clicking Avenza Web Page text e img src sourcemedia picture jpg hspace 0 vspace 0 align left gt gt Inserts an image picture jpg located in the Source Media Folder HTML ignores extra spaces and returns therefore tags such as lt br gt to create line breaks and p to start a new paragraph should be used In addition to the HTML tags MAPublisher can use text extracted from the MAP Attributes table The reference to the attribute field name is indicated between two percent 96 signs For example AttributeName Examples of using attribute fields e lt b gt Street_Name lt b gt gt Main Street e lt img src sourcemedia image hspace 0 vspace 0 align left gt Displays image indicated in the attribute called image a string text hspace and vspace sets the horizontal and vertical space left blank around the image The align setting sets the image alignment to t
419. s distribution to manufacturers mariners and other data users It is used for the supply of ENC cells Electronic Navigational Charts to ECDIS Electronic Chart Display and Information System The objects spatial geometry can be of Point Line or Area geometry while object descriptions are categorized in object classes organized in specific attributes schemas To make full use of this format refer to the online object catalog available on www s 57 com MAPublisher imports non encrypted S 57 data into MAP layers named per S 57 object acronym of type Area Line or Points All S 57 Attributes are converted into MAP Attributes An Adobe Illustrator template is supplied to automatically style the map after import The template contains a series of MAPublisher stylesheets linking S 57 imported features to nautical symbols and graphic styles libraries provided by Avenza This representation is non exhaustive and meant to assist users with limited knowledge of the S 57 format to interpret the data contents more easily The S 57 template and the symbols and graphic styles libraries can be found in the MAPublisher Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder see Appendix 4 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 41 Import and Export Supported Data Formats Spatial Data Transfer Standard SDTS catd ddf Import only Digital cartographic products of the USGS are available in the Spatial Data Transfer Standard format and are generally distributed over the Internet
420. s for legacy text art If you decide not to convert the text at this time and instead opt to convert it manually at a later time be aware that Illustrator s legacy text conversion process does NOT preserve attributes for converted text art Update All text art Choose this option to convert all text to the Adobe Illustrator current version Alltext art MAPublisher text art only Choose this option to MAPublisher text art only convert only the MAPublisher text on MAP layers Nothing Nothing Choose this option if no conversion is necessary A3 4 Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files The following files may be found in the Helpful Styles amp Symbols files folder on your MAPublisher 8 DVD or with your MAPublisher 8 download Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Avenza MAPublisher 8 Helpful Styles amp Symbols Windows Vista 7 C Users Public Public Documents Avenza MAPublisher 8 Helpful Styles amp Symbols Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 Helpful Styles amp Symbols Helpful Styles amp Symbols gt QuickMap Styles QuickMap styles are graphic styles and symbol libraries meant to allow users to quickly style their maps by the use of MAP Stylesheets To ease the process areas are classified in land and water styles lines are classified in borders contours roads rails and rivers styles QuickMap Styles Area ai
421. s of longitude e g 1 E must be written 001 Chapter 6 Plotting Points 101 MAP Point Plotter Examples of Latitude Longitude values Decimals Delimited Degrees Minutes Degrees Packed DMS with Packed DMS Degrees Degrees Minutes MinutesSeconds decimal point Seconds Avenza Office Li 43 6969N 43d41 48 98 N 43 418163N 43 414898N 434148 98N 43414898N 43 41 48 98 N 79 23 32 38 W 79 3922W 79d23 32 38 W 79 235396W 79 233238W 0792332 38W 079233238W 48 41 8163 N 79 23 5396 W 43 6969 43 41 48 98 N43 418163 N 43 414898 434148 98 N 43414898 48 6969 N 79 3922 W 79 3922 W 079 23 32 38 W79 235396 W 79 233238 0792332 38 W 079233238 N 43 6969 N 43 41 48 98 43 418163 43 414898 N 434148 98 43414898N 079 3922 W 79 23 32 38 079 235396 079 233238 W 0792332 38 079233238 Warning Double quotes are supported in MAP Point Plotter but not in the import of Delimited Text Set up the Symbol Selection The symbols used by Point Plotter are a direct reproduction of those that exist in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel To open the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel click the menu Window Symbols To add symbols to the Symbols panel create symbols as closed Adobe Illustrator objects and drag them into the panel Alternatively open the MAP Symbols file from the Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder on the MAPublisher DVD or local drive see Appendix 4 and drag the symbols into the Adobe Illustrator Symbols pan
422. s panel move the layers from No MAP Stylesheet to its corresponding stylesheet when available gt Advance template the corresponding stylesheet has the same name as the layer but not all layers have a stylesheet therefore stay under No MAP Stylesheet gt Basic template all layers have a stylesheet with the same name as the layer or if not with the name others The letters A L and P have be pre pended to the names to sort the stylesheets by feature type Area Line or Point Depth points are contained in the layer SOUNDG point Use the DEPTH attribute to create labels with the Feature Text Label Use sounding style option for points labels To round the depth values according to hydrographic standards a the pre made expression is provided in the Expression Library see chapter 5 on MAP Attributes and chapter 10 on labelling Note This representation is non exhaustive and meant to assist users with limited knowledge of the S 57 format to interpret the data contents more easily The created map must not be used for navigation unless further processing is supervised by a trained hydrographer A4 2
423. s with values less than one million in the POPULATION column are POPULATION lt 1000000 selected Only items containing the value Ontario in the NAME column AND 10 NAME se corso AND RORULATION lt 1000000 values less than one million in the POPULATION column are selected Note MAP Selections created in versions earlier than MAPublisher 8 3 are converted to MAP Selection Attribute Filters based on the lt current layer gt Art Selection To store a current selection done through the MAP Selections panel or using the Adobe Illustrator selection functions e g Selection tool menu Select or Layers panel select the MAP Selection type Art Selection No parameters are required for this type of MAP Selection The current selection must be performed before creating a new MAP selection Spatial Filter A Spatial Filter MAP Selection selects sets of objects based on their position on the artboard A Spatial Filter is based on a selection of features the boundaries of which are used as a limit for the final selection The Filter Using drop down list sets the selection of these features Three options are available f Existing MAP Selection the delimiting features are taken from a saved MAP Selection The MAP Selection name is chosen in the Existing MAP Selection drop down list below gt Art Selection the current artboard selection is used the selection must be performed before creating the new Spat
424. select the record and drag it to another category if necessary Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file AN RWN gt Saving Coordinate Systems xml file 1 Select Edit Custom Coordinate Systems from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 Customized the coordinate systems actions above 3 Click the Save As button type the file name This file can be exchanged with another computer using MAPublisher using Load Custom Coordinate Systems EXPORTING A REFERENCE FILE The defined coordinate system for a Map View can be exported as a reference wkt file via MAPublisher Export Coordinate System to File option Select Export Coordinate System to File from the MAP Views panel options menu to access the export dialog box where you can save the wkt definition Export coordinate system Savein C3 Calfomia referenced fie oap ET New Folder Exporting a coordinate system A2 14 IMPORTING ADDITIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM DEFINITIONS By using the From File buttons in the MAPublisher MAP View Editor source or destination coordinate systems additional coordinate system definitions can be imported and merged with the existing datasource information MAPublisher imports the following coordinate system file formats WKT definitions wkt MAP files map ESRI PRJ files prj and MapInfo TAB files tab Import coordinate system Look in C SHP ESRI Shape EE My Docum
425. selecting the artwork and clicking the Edit button To remove Web tags select artwork with an associated Web tag and click the Remove button Note Document artwork lines areas points associated with callout bubbles are also called Web Art Only Web Art will be searchable in the resulting Flash map see Export to Web Text cannot be tagged as Web Art Selection Select any artwork in the document and the MAP Web Author panel displays the number of Web tags assuming the artwork contains a Web tag To select all the artwork with Web tags in a document click the All Web Art button To select all the artwork with Web tags on a specific layer select the layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel and click the Web Art On Layer button Use the navigation buttons to consecutively move to the previous or next artwork that contains a Web tag The Zoom To Selected Art option centers the Adobe Illustrator document view to the selected artwork with Web tags Check this option and use the Previous Next Web Art buttons to navigate between them Export to Web The Export to Web button opens the Web Export Dialog described later in this chapter 184 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author MAP Web Author Panel Web Tag Dialog Callout Title The title of the callout bubble Web Tag Dialog Callout Image Choose Manually tie Callout Preview 41 Callout Preview Open or close the tobrowse to the media n review o
426. sets Edit Ifa connection is selected opens the Edit ArcSDE Geodatabase connection dialog box Ifa MAP Dataset is selected opens the Edit ArcSDE Geodatabase MAP Dataset dialog box Copy Copy the selected connection Delete Delete the selected connection or MAP Dataset Create Edit Copy ArcSDE Geodatabase connection Edit ArcSDE Geodatabase Connection Connection Details Specify the transactional or historical version to be accessed The interface lists the existing versions for the database Information to be provided by the database administrator Connection Name ArcSDE 93 Connection Server gdb93 server name Service 5151 s Name DBID93 Connection Details IER J 8 Database Authentication User Name user Password eeee 7 Check if you want MAPublisher to remember your password Operating System Authentication Transactional Version sde DEFAULT lt Test Connection Test the connection parameters prior to accessing datasets Please specify the details of this connection This connection refers to a transactional version Version Name sde DEFAULT Version Description Instance default version 5 This connection refers to a historical version sing a histor 239 Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases Import ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases Feature classes Cl
427. settings shown are shown here FUNCTIONALITY Use the Web Export Dialog to set the look and feel of the Flash map style navigation objects and map elements such as buttons the search box overview map layer list callout bubble zoom slider and highlight lines and colours These are the final settings before exporting the document as a Flash map Navigation buttons Pan up pan down kand akih Search e Search box Type text into search box ea 8 pan tend SE right ae and it searches through the contents sh DAE ih i bs g 2 e of all the exported callout bubbles P e mapt E A Results are highlighted on the map original view AM Canada ivi a Zoom Slider Move the slider arrow T Ze lj x Population 31 612 897 up or down to zoom in or out Ara 9364570 km respectively Use the Zoom In or Whitehorse ee PW J Zoom Out buttons to zoom at a QE Callout Bubble Web tag or pop up specific increments Yellowknife Pe displays content created in the Web s m Tag Dialog Province New Brunswick J Population 723900 Capital City Fredericton Edme r Highlighted Lines By default objects Go to the government website St John s clicked on are highlighted in blue Victoria E objects hovered on are in green dba d uh 3 and objects found by the search are E E ru in yellow forono W cmr Overview Map Displays the full eo iS extent of the map
428. sheets on document open Subsequently Graphic Styles for line and area legends Character Styles for text legends and Symbols for point legends will automatically be generated and added to the respective Adobe Illustrator panels To qualify for legend conversion legend art in legacy documents must contain the following properties Be ofa valid art type i e polygon path symbol or text e Have a legend expression assigned via Assign Legend Info or Auto Assign Legend Info Have a target MAP Layer During the conversion process you will be asked to set additional conversion preferences e Determine if target MAP Layers should be immediately assigned to the applicable stylesheet Checking this option will immediately apply the new stylesheets to map art on target layers whereas unchecking this option means the new stylesheets will not be applied on document open allowing you to manually drag target layers into the applicable stylesheet later Note auto assignment conversions are slower Determine if you wish to merge similar converted stylesheets i e stylesheets with a matching feature type and original map layer into a single stylesheet Note this option will be disabled if it is not applicable Tables Table information held on table layers i e MPTables layers will be removed on document open Therefore ensure that all tables have been joined to the vector art prior to opening the document in MAPublisher 8 18 Chapter 1
429. sion Displays the the Point Plot Settings dialog box Indicates if Lat Long or projected Positional PDOP Horizontal coordinates are used for the HDOP and Vertical VDOP values B Start End Route Creates a path using the display of the Position data received from the GPS device selected Graphic Style using all valid GPS information received FUNCTIONALITY MAP GPS will collect interpret and apply styles to points and lines from information received from a supported GPS device within an Adobe Illustrator document based on user settings Several plotting options are available for use in MAP GPS For plotting points users can decide whether to plot single points using the Manual Plot option to plot points based on a specific time interval or to plot points based on a set distance interval For plotting lines the Start Route feature may be used to create a line feature containing all valid information received from the GPS device Additionally auxiliary settings may be used to plot points on separate layers when either a change in speed or a change in heading is observed when concurrently using one of the previously mentioned plotting options MAP GPS also provides the ability to automatically apply user defined attributes for specific layers while plotting and to record a log file of information received from the GPS device which may then be played back into an Adobe Illustrator document at a later time PRER
430. ssion Allow use of leader lines Incorporates the use of leader lines Options include the number of lines the leader line are allowed to cross the width of the leader line being used and the style of arrow to be used as the leader line Notes For Area type data labels are placed relative to an object s centroid For areas grouped in a compound path the largest area of the compound will be labeled Chapter 18 MAP LabelPro 227 MAPublisher LabelPro Rules LINE RULES The Line Rules dialog box contains the label configuration options for labeling Line layers Rules can be set by selecting a line feature type layer and clicking the Line Rules edit button Lai in the Rules column The placement settings in the graphic below represent the default configuration however these settings may be changed to match any labeling requirements Click the Save As button to save the label configuration The rule will be saved with a user assigned name Click OK to apply the current settings Placement Place labels using an offset or ona centerline Offset labels Above or Below a line Vertical Split places multiple word labels above and below the line and relative to the center of the line If the generated label only Starting Point Specify where the start of the label will be placed with options including Start Center and End Start will have the start of the label placed at the starting point of the line Center
431. st create a new MAP Layer of type Line or Area or use one of the existing MAP layers of the appropriate type USING LINE PLOTTER Select a L Line or Al Area layer in the MAP Views panel or Adobe Illustrator Layers panel Then choose Objects gt MAPublisher gt Line Plotter or click the Line Plotter button ka on the MAPublisher toolbar The name of the selected layer and its source coordinate system are displayed under Current Layer Input Coordinate System The Input Coordinate System sets the system in which the starting point coordinates are entered It also applies to the coordinates of each vertex when the Point by Point option is selected When the Use Current Layer s coordinate system option is selected coordinate values can be entered in the current coordinate system of the MAP View containing the selected layer When the Use coordinate system option is selected the Select button becomes enabled Click the Select button to open the Select Coordinate System dialog box and choose a coordinate system as required 116 Chapter 8 Line Functions Line Plotter When the selected or default coordinate system is projected X and Y coordinates are entered as the unit of the coordinate system e g meter kilometer feet When the selected or default coordinate system is Geodetic Lat Long coordinates are entered as degrees The degree format is selected from the Format drop down list see chapter 6 for details on the supported format
432. stance area and perimeter e Geospatial Location Tool to display mark and query geospatial locations Geospatial Registration Tool to spatially register any PDF document by digitizing control points Adobe Acrobat Pro Extended only These tools and the Object Data Tool are found on the Analysis Toolbar menu View Toolbars Analysis r Geospatial Registration Tool Register PDF documents Acrobat Pro Extended only Object Data Tool Enable selection Analysis x of MAP objects and display name Is T sF Gig mo and information in the Adobe Acrobat Model Tree menu View gt Navigation Panels gt Model Tree Measuring Tool Measure Geospatial Location Tool distance perimeter and area Display mark and query geospatial locations Snap Types Measurement Types NNN os So The settings for the Measurement and Geospatial tools are found in the Adobe Acrobat Preferences menu Edit gt Preferences under the category Measuring Geo es ES E Use X Y Order Longitude Latitude e Bl Enable Measurement Markup F Use Custom Label V Snapto Content IV Pahs V Path Endpoints V Path Midpoints Y Path Intersections snapHint Color NE seswiy fo E Don t Show Transparency Layer in GeoTIFF and JPEG 2000 images Chapter 17 Export Geospatial PDF 217 View MAP Geospatial PDF These analysis tools are described in detail in the Adobe
433. start the import process Specify Spatial Filter A spatial filter consists of a four corner polygon defining the extents for the imported data When first opened the Specify Spatial Filter dialog box displays the four corner coordinates that correspond to the actual data extent of the selected file To enter new coordinates values using the selected file source coordinate system or using an alternate coordinate system click the Specify Input Coordinate System button No specific order is required for entering the corner coordinates but Point 1 2 3 and 4 should be entered in a loop so as not to create a crossing polygon only data included in the crossed area would be imported Choose whether or not to import objects that intersect with the spatial filter boundaries by setting the Relationship Intersects allows the import of the whole objects which geometry intersects with the spatial filter e Contains imports only objects fully contained inside the spatial filter limits Create SQL Select Query An SQL statement can be built to limit the number of objects and attributes imported from a single feature class The SELECT clause should always contain one and one only Shape object actual spatial feature When possible use the operator button to add formatted query statements including spaces to limit the typing errors For example In feature class FC Point import all points and the Valve attribute other attributes are not impo
434. stems from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 When necessary select the Geodetic or Projected category and then click the New Category button to create a new object category Deleting An Existing Object Category 1 Select Edit Custom Coordinate Systems from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 When necessary select the Geodetic or Projected category and then click the Delete Category button to delete an object category Creating A New Object Within A Category 1 Select Edit Custom Coordinate Systems from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 When necessary select the Geodetic or Projected category and then click the New Object button to create a new object 3 Inthe New Object dialog box Identification tab enter a name for the new object Note The name must be unique 4 Select and enter the appropriate parameters for the envelope point style geodetic value projection vertical reference angular unit linear unit or scale factor unit that the new object is based upon Note Fora new coordinate system the parameters themselves may be customized Every parameter must be set in the following sequence ellipsoid datum envelop unit angular or linear geodetic system and then projected system 5 Press the OK button to create the object 6 Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file Changing An Existing Object 1 Selec
435. sure that we receive your email address and add you to the MMP notification group Renewal Approximately 6 8 weeks prior to the expiration of your annual MMP subscription you will be notified regarding renewal options You will be contacted a minimum of five times prior to expiration in order to ensure that you have ample opportunity to renew or not at your discretion You will have the option of renewing your MMP for an additional year at the then prevailing price or canceling without penalty Of course if you cancel or let your MMP lapse you will no longer be entitled to the benefits of the program as outlined above and will thus have to purchase future upgrades at the upgrade price There is a grace period of approximately 30 days from the time of the MMP expiry during which you may still renew without penalty All post expiration renewals will be backdated to the actual expiry date Lapsed Subscriptions Failure to renew your MMP within 30 days from the expiry date will result in a lapsed MMP subscription Lapsed subscriptions may not be renewed and the licensee will be required to purchase support and upgrades accordingly Please direct all MMP questions and purchase inquiries to info avenza com WISHLIST As either a new or experienced MAPublisher user we value your opinions on how we can improve our product Please let us know what functions you would like to see incorporated into future upgrades of MAPublisher email us at support a
436. sured Grid Settings Sell size Partial cells get labeled Check this option Cell Width Height Specify the width 600000 m bas to label partial cells cells that do not dimensions of each cell comprising Height 600000 m Minimum size of cells 10 reach the full size in page units the grid in the current map units Minimum size of cells set the minimum size of partial cells to be labeled Positioning Preset Origin Choose this option to Preset Origin O Grid Passes Through Point e Grid passes through point Choose this select a preset X and Y origin ooo x 0 m option to select specific coordinates 000 for the X and Y origin goo Y 0 m Grid Style Options see Index Grid settings Grid style Options Line Style MAP Grid Style V Draw Border MAPGrid Style carl lar FUNCTIONALITY The Grids and Graticules tool generates grid lines based on a number of user defined settings There are three grid types available Index Grid divides grid extents based on a specified number of cells or by entering a cell size in document units Graticules plots grid lines at specific intervals of latitude and longitude which will be automatically curved as applicable Measured Grid place grid lines based on a grid size in real world dimensions Numerous options for labels placement size and alignment are provided All grids plotted with this tool can be su
437. symbols present in e adde Style E e the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel Scale 100 o Scale Select the symbol scale V High accuracy slower forces centroid within area boundaries e 3 j Use high accuracy if the selected source layer is an Area MAP Layer check this option for a high placement accuracy The Plot Centroids function adds point symbols at the center of polygons or line while copying the attributes from the source MAP layer when the New Layer option is selected This function is useful for cartographic generalization purpose e g replacing small island area by a symbol or to simply add a meaningful symbol at the center of areas For single polygons the centroid can be assimilated to the center of mass of the surface For single lines the centroid is the mid point of the line For polygons or lines grouped into a compound path the centroid of the largest polygon or longest line is used Note The centroid of a Bezier polygon smoothed path may not be completely accurate because only the anchor points are used to calculate the centroid s position If necessary use the Adobe Illustrator Add Anchor Points function Object Path Add Anchor Points before running Plot Centroids on Bezier polygons PREREQUISITES The document must contain a fully georeferenced MAP View that includes a MAP layer of type Area or Line that contains art An existing Point layer may be used as desti
438. t Edit Custom Coordinate Systems from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 Select the object and choose the Edit Object button 3 Enter the modified parameters for the envelope point style geodetic value projection vertical reference angular unit linear unit oe scale factor unit where appropriate 4 Press the OK button to commit your changes 5 Pressthe Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file Deleting An Existing Coordinate System Object Select Edit Custom Coordinate Systems from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel Select the object and choose the Delete Object button s Press the OK button to commit your changes Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file de sh c A2 13 Copying An Existing Object Select Edit Custom Coordinate Systems from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel Select the object and choose the Copy Object button amp Press the OK button to commit your changes Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file Pw Ne Renaming Moving An Existing Object Select Edit Custom Coordinate Systems from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel Select the object and choose the Edit Object button 7 Enter the modified parameters for the identification name Press the 0K button to commit your changes In order to move the coordinate system object
439. t a column here to edit pa E Read only e decimals of Real type its properties on the right _ STATE NAME E Derive value from expression L Default Value Assign the ISI STATE HPS j same value to all items in the S SUB REGION LISI STATE ABBR Add Click to add a new Add id column to the column list selected column if required Visibility Choose to show or hide the selected column Read only Check this option to ensure that values in this Remove Click to delete Derive value from expression Check this option to assign column can not be edited the selected column an expression to the selected column Either enter the expression directly into the entry field or click the Browse button to access the Expression Builder dialog box In MAPublisher the term schema is used to define the structure of the MAP Attributes table FUNCTIONALITY The Edit Schema function provides settings to edit and manage the attribute structure of datasets create edit and delete columns set visibility preferences and assign expressions Any changes made to the schema will instantly be reflected in the MAP Attributes panel USING EDIT SCHEMA Select map artwork containing attributes to populate the MAP Attributes panel Click the Edit Schema button or menu item in the MAP Attributes panel options menu to open the Edit Schema dialog box Note Edit Schema can also be accessed via the Edit Column context me
440. t allow you to export the layer If you have an entire layer that was not created by MAPublisher then 1 Ensure that your layer contains only a single feature type Point Area Line or Text 2 Inthe MAP Views panel check that you have a designated MAP View with a matching coordinate system If you do not create a new MAP Views 3 Select the layer in the MAP Views panel 4 Dragthe layer to the MAP View containing the matching coordinate system to georeference the layer There are also a couple of additional considerations to be aware of when exporting Since the current exported vector formats are GIS formats that do not support the concept of Bezier curves you need to compensate for this If you have Bezier curves in your Adobe Illustrator file they will not be recognized in the GIS software In order for these features may be represented correctly you will need to add points to these lines in Adobe Illustrator first Simply identify and select any objects that use Bezier curves and then select Object Path Add Anchor Points Repeat this command until the line has a sufficient number of anchor points that the shape of your curves will not be lost on export Adobe Illustrator stores the origin of text that has been applied along paths differently from other text objects We have found the following steps to be the most successful way to get such Text exported to GIS files 1 Create a new Adobe Illustrator layer Select any text that h
441. t bubble when option to show hover callout bubble is enabled Disabled by default Show the Fixed position Callout Bubble Displays a fixed position callout bubble Disabled by default e Use Centroid Instead of Mouse for Callout Position places the callout bubble position of a feature with a Web tag on the centroid Disable it so that the callout position occurs where the mouse position is 194 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Web Export Dialog Animations e Disable Viewer Navigation Animations Enabling this option disables panning and zooming animations Disabled by default e Use Low Stage Quality During Animations Lowers the quality of animations for improved performance Disabled by default Attributes Export All Attributes With Map Features Forces all attributes to export regardless of whether they are used in a Web tag or not Disabled by default Expressions Allow Expressions in Search Box Allow users to type expressions into the search box Disabled by default Allow Expressions in Web Tags Evaluate expressions in web tags at runtime Disabled by default EXECUTE WEB EXPORT Click the Export button to execute Web export The export summary is displayed in the Web Export Log The export creates an index html file and an index data folder in the export location the index name is default a custom name can be substituted here in the Export Location box Some of the important files are map xml zip or map xml wh
442. t layer can be used to create knockouts it does not have to be generated by MAPublisher Labeling functions The Feature and Text layers do not have to be in the same MAP View PREREQUISITES Create Knockouts requires a L Line layer and a T Text layer to be unlocked and visible All text and all lines in the selected layers will be affected by the function Text and lines that are not supposed to be masks must be moved to a different layer beforehand Chapter 10 Labelling Functions 143 Create Knockouts USING CREATE KNOCKOUTS To access the function choose Object gt MAPublisher gt Create Knockouts or click the Create Knockouts button X fon the MAPublisher toolbar Layers In the Create Knockouts dialog box choose a Feature Layer that is a L Line layer visible and unlocked then choose a m Text layer The text in the selected text layer should overlap with some of the lines in the selected line layer to get reasonable knockout results Mask Opacity The Mask Opacity option sets the opacity of the masks created behind the text 100 creates an opaque mask the line will be invisible behind the text 0 would not hide the lines at all Knockout Size Settings Several parameters are available to set the size of the knockout By default the knockout corresponds to the Adobe Illustrator text bounding box That bounding box can be slightly taller than the characters in the selected text because it takes into account the size
443. tates Fish and Wildlife Service variety of map data in USGS DLG format e USACEIENC download US Army Corps of Engineers S 57 and ESRI Shapefile of US waterways OTHER VALUABLE MAPPING RESOURCES In some additional places on the Internet where you can find news reviews tips and general GIS cartographic and geographic information For example GIS Cafe e GIS Dictionary GIS Lounge GlSaDevelopment University of Edinburgh University of Florida Geoplan Center US Census Bureau A1 20 General Tips and Hints CREATING ASCII DELIMITED POINT FILES There may be times when you wish to add a point or a series of points to your map but you do not have a GIS or ASCII file containing these points ready for import Provided you have the real world coordinates for the locations you wish to plot you can manually create a delimited ASCII file using a text editor ex Notepad BBEdit SimpleText Ultra Edit etc or a spreadsheet program ex Excel Lotus 123 etc This file can then be imported using either Simple or Advanced Import using the ASCII Point Data import format One column in the file must contain the X coordinates of the points and another must contain the Y coordinates You can add as many additional columns as you wish containing additional information to be imported as attribute data If you are using a text editor you can simply type in your data in the following format Column 1 Header Column 2 H
444. te as well as many different log file features The following sections will outline each of the features and their uses pnm Device Settings Opens the Device Settings dialog box Point Plot Setti altima Point Plot Settings Opens the Point Plot Settings panel Autosave Settings Edit User Attribute for Current Layer Autosave Settings Opens the Autosave Settings dialog box Record Sentence Log Edit User Attribute for Current Layer Opens the Edit User Attribute for Current Layer dialog box View Sentence Log Playback Sentence Log Record Sentence Log Opens the Record Sentence Log dialog box Sat Scanned View Sentence Log Opens the View Sentence Log panel Manual Plot jot by Time Playback Sentence Log Opens the Playback Sentence Log dialog box y Distance Start Scanning Begins Scanning the GPS device Manual Plot Plots a single point Plot by Time Begins plotting points by a specified time Plot by Distance Begins plotting points by a specified distance Start Route Begins plotting a route MAP GPS DEVICE SETTINGS Accessed from the MAP GPS menu The MAP GPS Device Settings dialog box provides for the input of the specific settings for the connected GPS Device Users are required to manually select the appropriate settings prior to using MAP GPS Appropriate settings for specific devices can usually be obtained by consulting the device s user manual or by contacting the manufacturer
445. ted Data Calculation Statistics z column to receive statistic values Target R new stat col cmm Operation Deviation Im sia Source Options Apply to all art on layer D Apply only to selected art Add North Angle Data i Add Calculated Data Calculation North Angle Lx Target Select or add the attribute column to receive north angle values 94 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Add Calculated Data hca e Target new north angle Options Apply to all art on layer 5 Apply only to selected art Adobe document page units Projected coordinates available if the coordinate system of the MAP View is projected Geodetic coordinates Longitude Latitude position L Unit Set the unit when Projected coordinates or Geodetic coordinates is selected as Type Operation Specify the operation to be performed Distribution Deviation Sum Mean or Standard Deviation Source Select the attribute column to be used as source for the calculations This option only available when point data is selected FUNCTIONALITY The Add Calculated Data function populates existing or new MAP Attribute columns with values calculated from the art geometry or from another column of numerical values The calculation options are e Geographic information centroid position for lines and areas or position and nor
446. ted HTML frame Attributes may be used i e ATTRIBUTE_NAME This option occurs when the Web Art is clicked or hovered over A Web browser can be divided into multiple panes called HTML frames in order to present documents in multiple views which may be independent windows or subwindows For example within the same window one frame might display a static banner a second a navigation menu and a third the main document that can be scrolled through or replaced by navigating in the second frame An example layout could be as follow ee ee eee ovs 71 pcm m 1 l l l Frame 1 l l l p 4 Frame 3 l l l l Frame 2 l l l LP due cet 4 Names of frames created by Web designers must begin with an alphabetic character a z A Z Some special purpose HTML frames have reserved names with a leading underscore The following reserved names are available for selection from the Target drop down list blank Loads a linked document into a new blank window unnamed _ self Loads a linked document into the same frame in which the link was clicked frame containing Flash map _parent Loads a linked document into the immediate parent of the document the link is in frame containing Flash map _top Loads a linked document into the entire window clearing the frames To use the Trigger External URL options enter the URL address of the HTML document to open in the Hover URL or Click URL fields The specified URL can be any page available locally
447. ted layer is then written next to the Model Tree Preferences caption The Use attribute for item name option assigns a specific attribute value as a name to objects prior to export in order to make the geospatial PDF more readable for users By default the name of the objects displayed in the Structure Pane of the Model tree are derived from the map object s name as shown in the Adobe Illustrator Layers Panel The default names given by Adobe Illustrator to objects are often meaningless an end user For example lines and areas have a default name of lt Path gt or lt Compound Path gt points have the name of the symbol or ordering number To use a specific attribute value as an object name enable the Use attribute for item name option and choose the desired attribute column from the drop down list Note After export the Adobe Illustrator object names are also updated based on the selected attributes that corresponds to the Name property attribute value Model Tree z led i gt m canada area o 3o LM bd eg world area oa EE Non Map Layers la a E lt Path gt Ou G2 Title E LI 0 026 Ou EHS Canada MAP View G5 canada area Ld Eg lt Path gt On HE cities point ECT M l Lis E On BE word NAP Ven Y E canada mar view 5 EZ Ou pesce A PAE p Ss i Compound Path gt Om Zambia v S wortd MAP view a Compound Path gt
448. ter 9 MAP Stylesheets 125 MAP Stylesh Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Stylesheets or MAP Toolbar gt MAP STYLESHEETS MAP Stylesheet List An alphabetical list of the MAP Stylesheets and associated MAP Layers in the current document Both are depicted with their feature type Lock button Click this button T tates E State names v P US Cites P uscties_point gt IE ros of E usrcads_ine 2 with lock or unlock the layer gt A Lower states CA towerss_zres gt A other states A ateska_area A reri ores No MAP Stylesheet Lists the MAP Layers which are not associated to any MAP Stylesheet Switch MAP Stylesheet Click this button to switch a selected layer from one MAP Stylesheet to another Remove from Stylesheet moves the selected layer to No MAP Stylesheet section Name Specify a name for the new J MAP Stylesheet Feature Type Specify a feature type for the stylesheet Area Line Point or Text FUNCTIONALITY 7 No MAP Stylesheet P cosas A us image A waterbackground A word ares 2 5 MAP Stylesheets rib I i Remove from Lower States Switch to Other States eets Panel New MAP Stylesheet Selection n Delete Selection Create MAP Stylesheet Legend Export MAP Stylesheets Import MAP Objects Preferences Delete MAP Stylesheet Deletes a selected MAP Stylesheet New MAP Stylesheet
449. text in a path this will be the x coordinate of the first vertex on the associated path describes the y coordinate in the document units of the current point For text on a path or text in a path this will be the y coordinate of the first vertex on the associated path describes the internal unique ID to refer to Adobe Illustrator artwork within the document Read only describes the font size used by the text describes the font family used by the text describes the name of the text field Editing this property will change the name in the Layers panel describes the contents of the text Editing this property will edit text on the page describes the number of characters in the contents of the text art This property cannot be set describes the rotation in degrees of the art around its anchor point Editing this value will rotate art describes the Character Style in use Editing this property will apply the selected style to the art describes the x coordinate in the world units of the current point describes the y coordinate in the world units of the current point describes the horizontal scaling of a point object Editing this value will scale the text in the X axis describes the vertical scaling of a point object Editing this value will scale the text in the Y axis Warning The ID property is not persistent This means that if a document is saved and re opened the ID value might change The value will usually not change over the life
450. th an intuitive easy to understand graphical user interface for setting up labeling rules Each Point Line and Area rule dialog box has numerous label placement options for a high level of label Rules detail and a variety of configurations To access label rules click the Rules edit button 3 in the Rules column of the F Highway Labels v E IE J main MAP LabelPro dialog box Depending on the layer type this will open Default either the Area Line or Point Rules dialog box Configure label rules and if Default needed save the rules to add it to the Rules drop down list Rules operate in a very similar approach to Styles in that once added to the Rules list they can be immediately applied reused later in the same file or in other documents provided they are being applied to the same type of data Rules are saved to the Area Line or Point folder depending on the feature type of the MAP layer MAPublisher LabelPro offers a pre configured Default rule for each data type It is loaded by default and used until new rules have been created or selected The default rule is a good starting choice as it is configured to be useful for the most common labeling situations however creating custom rules can be very useful when specific labeling conventions are required In an Area Point or Line Rule dialog box the sequence in which the rule options appear and are checked have no bearing on the order of label placement only whether the o
451. th angle for points e Perform statistic calculations based on the overall attribute data of a specified column Calculated values are not updated automatically when the source column changes Add Calculated Data must be run again for updates to be applied For single polygons the centroid can be assimilated to the center of mass of the surface For single lines the centroid is the mid point of the line For polygons or lines grouped into a compound path the centroid of the largest polygon or line is used Note The centroid of a Bezier polygon smoothed path may not be completely accurate because only the anchor points are used to calculate the centroid s position If necessary use the Adobe Illustrator Add Anchor Points function Object Path Add Anchor Points before running Add Calculated Data Calculated data can be added or updated to all art on a layer or only to the selected art however statistical calculations are based on the entire dataset PREREQUISITES Add Calculated Data can populate new or existing attribute columns Only attributes of type Real can be updated so users should make sure that the proper data type is applied to these columns For statistics calculations the source column must be numerical Integer or Real type Users may need to use the Join Table function to import appropriate numerical data beforehand e g election results per county see Edit Schema in this chapter USING ADD CALCULATED DATA
452. th local licenses fixed or evaluation A user on a floating license wishing to evaluate MAPublisher LabelPro will have their main MAPublisher and MAPublisher LabelPro licenses switched to a local evaluation license At the end of the evaluation period the settings for floating license can be reset as described above MOVE A LICENSE To move a previously activated license to a new computer use the following steps 1 Uninstall MAPublisher from the current computer 2 Install MAPublisher on the new computer 3 Obtain the machine ID for the new computer as found in the MAPublisher License Management dialog box started from the Adobe Illustrator Help menu at MAPublisher Licensing License Management 4 Complete the on line form at http www avenza com support rehost license For offline users call tech support 22 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher License Management LICENSE TROUBLESHOOTING If you cannot register or retrieve an evaluation or purchased license from within MAPublisher e g firewall limitations visit the Avenza Systems website www avenza com activation and provide the Machine ID displayed in the License Management dialog box A zipped license file attachment will be sent to the registered email address on record Unzip this attachment and save the lic file to the appropriate folder Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista 7 C ProgramData Ave
453. that has a UTM projection into a Lat Long projection click it and drag it from the MAP View with the UTM projection and drop it into the MAP View with the Lat Long projection MAPublisher will automatically reproject and scale artwork on the layer to match the destination MAP View The Missing Coordinate System dialog box appears when neither the origin nor destination MAP View contains a defined coordinate system Two options are available in this dialog box 1 Specify custom coordinate system to specify the projection of the named MAP View via the Source Coordinate System function 2 Sameasto specify the coordinate system of the named MAP View by choosing a coordinate system that already exists in a MAP View in the document 60 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP Views Panel Note Many transformations will inherently cause the loss of precision by the very nature of the complex mathematical calculations that must be performed Additionally there are differences in precision between MAPublisher and Adobe Illustrator MAPublisher calculations are in 64 bit for accuracy but the results must be stored in Adobe Illustrator as 32 bit As a result please be aware that some precision may be lost if layers are dragged repeatedly from one coordinate system to another When determining a coordinate system to use via the drag method we strongly recommend to use Edit gt Undo to revert coordinate systems until the appropriate system is found
454. the MAP Attributes panel MAPublisher provides two methods of adding labels to your map Label Features labels specified layers automatically and MAP Tagger Tool labels features individually through user selection Register Image Register images accurately to your vector data MAPublisher determines the parameters of the raster image and the coordinate system of a selected MAP Layer in the registration process When no matching vector data is available a new geographic frame MAP View can be created directly from the image reference file and by specifying a coordinate system if required format dependant Grids and Graticules MAPublisher contains tools to easily create map grids and map indexes Grids can be created for reference purposes or to follow designated lines such as latitude and longitude and can also be labelled for indexing When a labelled grid has been established MAPublisher is able to generate index files containing the location of text objects in MAP Layers MAP Elements Easily add customizable map elements such as scale bars north arrows and map legends Choose from preset designs or edit an existing one Split Layer The Split Layer function splits a layer into new layers based on an expression or by unique attribute value The qualifying features can either be copied or moved to a new layer while maintaining all their attribute data MAP GPS The MAP GPS tool allows for the collection display and styling
455. the point ID the x row pixel the y column pixel the z elevation value which is usually 0 00 followed by the ground coordinates expressed as Latitude or Northing Y Longitude or Easting X and Elevation Z The last value indicates whether the point described on that line is included in the solution 0 not included and 1 included Blue Marble Reference files support storing coordinate system information all are supported ER Mapper File ers The ER Mapper header file is an ASCII file describing the raster data in the data file The entire header file holds information about the data source and is contained in the DatasetHeader block There are two compulsory sub blocks the CoordinateSpace block to define the coordinate space and location and the Rasterlnfo block to define the characteristics of the data in the accompanying data file The RasterInfo block my contain a number of optional sub blocks To completely define coordinate information in an ER Mapper header file you need to include the following data datum projection coordinate type units X and Y dimensions for cell size registration cell X and Y values registration cell coordinates and possibly null cell value Coordinate information is frequently but not always given for the upper left corner of an image This would be registration cell X and Y values of 0 0 and 0 0 Chapter 12 Working With Images 159 Register Image For most projections registration coor
456. this might be recommended for secured documents Note If a preserved Geospatial PDF is opened in Adobe Illustrator and some changes are made the file will have to be exported again using the Geospatial PDF export function Simply saving the document will not maintain the geospatial capabilities of the PDF RESULTS The exported Geospatial PDF can now be opened in Adobe Acrobat the geographic reference and attribute information are available for query see next section The MAPublisher data is accessible through the Object Data Pane of the Model Tree this displays either the coordinate system of a MAP View if a MAP View is selected in the Model Tree or the exported attribute information of a selected object E p Property Value Property Value Coordinate System WGS 84 World Mercator Name Australia Scale 1 250000000 000000 Country Australia Rotation 0 000000 Catal cau Arable_Pct 6 0 Population 17288044 000000000 PopGrwRt 15 Literacy 100 0 Infiat Rate 6 9 Unemp Rate 9 2 Indust_Grwth 5 6 Continent Australia MAP Views properties Attributes properties Note Layers exported without attributes can be seen in the Adobe Acrobat Layers panel but not in the Model Tree The default PDF settings are applied regardless of any specific preferences set elsewhere Compatibility Acrobat 8 PDF 1 7 General Embed Page Thumbnails and Create Acrobat Layers from Top Level Layers Compression no i
457. tion Makes a selection within the current selection Remove from Current Selection Removes the highlighted criteria from the current selection Add to Current Selection Adds the highlighted criteria to the current selection Apply as New Selection Makes a new selection using the highlighted criteria Ei Pane My MAP Selection b amp MAP Styleshet Show filters on two lines cleared fw 4ADMN CLASS Interstate Layer usroads line gt MaPView MAP Selections gt Panel Foo Ta TOLL RD Y Layer Using current layer 7 Show selections on two lines e Texas State Selected Art Select roads within texas Based on MAP Selection Texas State Output layer usroads line 148 MAP Selections l Ier eiwiwial Show filters on two lines selected Chapter 11 MAP Selections and Operations Name Assign or edit the name of Name My MAP Selection Cox the MAP Selection Layer s Choose the layer s to New Edit MAP Selection New MAP Selection Type new MAP Selection only Choose the MAP Selection type foo Attribute Filter base the selection on By default the selection will be done on the currently selected layer Click to make a different choice in the Select Layers dialog box Select Layers Type f Attribute Filter Bhcan art Selection m Spatial Filter f Attribute Filter Type fw Attribute Filter E Cancel L
458. to Web Opens the Web Export Dialog to finalize settings for export Web Art on Layer Select all the artwork that have a tag in the currently selected layer All Web Art Select all artwork that have all Web Art J web Art On Layer 1 a Web tag in the document Previous Next Web Artwork Navigate between Web tags Status displays how many Web tags are selected L Zoom To Selected Art Zoom Zooms to selected Web tags md gt Web Artwork 1 of 13 selected Specify Source Media Folder Specify Source Media Folder Browse Browse to the directory Absolute Path Select this option to set containing the media files images and an absolute path best used when Source Media Folder Flash animations working on a single computer e Absolute Path Relative Path Relative Path Select this option to set a Reset Reset clear the current Source Media path relative to the current location of An empty relative path indicates the same folder as the document Folder settings the Adobe Illustrator document best used when files have to be moved Newly created documents must be saved for this option to be enabled FUNCTIONALITY The MAP Web Author tool exports a MAPublisher document as an interactive Flash map for Web display Together with the map artwork Web tags also known as callout bubbles are included in the export Prior to the export process the
459. to import these files When you join layer and table you do the join based on the column from the layer matched to the RCID column of the table Note that the CATD catalog file found amongst the SDTS files explains what each table is ROTATING OBJECTS INDIVIDUALLY IN ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR On some occasions you may wish to rotate selected objects about their own centres rather than as a group about acommon origin This can be accomplished using the native Adobe Illustrator Transform Each function To use this function first select the objects you wish to rotate Then go to Object gt Transform gt Transform Each In the Rotate box enter a desired rotation value and click OK Each of the selected objects will be rotated individually about their own centres You may also use the Rotation property column to individually rotate point symbols or text items based ona specified value See chapter 5 for guidelines on how to use this function GEOREFERENCING AN ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR FILE If you are using an existing Adobe Illustrator file that was created without the use of MAPublisher and as such does not contain any geographic parameters or attribute data the following steps will enable you to georeference your Adobe Illustrator file and ultimately create an attribute rich and accurate scale and world grid structure for your map Please note that the steps that follow refer to functions that are outlined in more detail in the body of this user guide Please fa
460. tomatically To manually create a new Legend layer use the Add MAP Layer button on the MAP View panel and specify a feature type of Legend see chapter 4 for more details If a custom character style is to be used for the labels of the Scale Bar it is also advisable to establish this style Window Type Character Styles before opening this dialog box 176 Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows Scale Bar ADDING A SCALE BAR The Scale Bar dialog box is accessed by clicking the menu Object gt MAPublisher gt Scale Bar or MAPublisher toolbar button El Standard Options Use the Up and Down buttons to select a scale bar design Note that some scale bar designs contain two bars and when such a design is selected the Second Bar column of options is enabled In the Units drop down list specify the units for the scale bar interval s to be based on The default units are that of the current MAP View In the Interval field s specify a real world distance that each interval of the scale bar will represent This number will be in the unit specified in the Units list Note A scale bar cannot be created on a MAP View that contains a coordinate system using custom user defined point styles or units Specify the number of cells in the bar s by entering a number in the Number of labeled intervals entry field Depending on the chosen style of scale bar it may be required to specify the Number of horizontal lines that will com
461. tructure of each format as well as information on supported format versions and elements unique to each data type Each file format will carry a checklist covering which core elements are supported by MAPublisher during its import You can also refer to the Frequently Asked Questions section in this guide for information on any issues associated with the various file formats Also see chapter 2 on Map Data File Formats AUTOCAD DRAWING DWG AND DRAWING EXCHANGE DXF There are two formats used by AutoCAD DXF is a CAD data file format developed by Autodesk as their solution for enabling data interoperability between AutoCAD and other programs The Dwg format is used for storing two and three dimensional design data and is the internal format for the AutoCAD Computer Aided Design package DWG is also the common name for AutoCAD proprietary DWG technology developed by Autodesk for their AutoCAD package Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions dwg dxf Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support No Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses Yes Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes 3D Support Yes Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes Supported Versions Windows Releases vrs R12 to 2007 Mac OS X Releases vrs R12 to 2007 Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect
462. ts V vi Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Contents Apply Expression i e cde waned snare canes ERR rx Heeae US Uere PE ee REED aan 91 Join Table erranera E DIp YR PR NY GYTDZVYGE GR YRTIR Y YR EA EY TAY NEC d 92 Add Calculated Data oirseeiser hero reve bra sa CC FEEDER RO EG 94 Export Attrib tes codes or roa o o Pete aU RRU E PR dC Metis 97 Plotting Points 99 MAP Point Plotter cad iescu arr rr RR nia ENEDURARPERORFRNIR ESO ER prets 100 Plot CentroldS c sedie PR EPA UU UNE EDU OR UE Meee E ade eR Na UA MR 103 Drawing Tools 105 MAP Area TOOlS iic reor sed dee e ep RO EH CERO E OC REOS RD uoa 106 MAP Vector Crop Tool soe erra AR REPERURC ERA ERUEER P DUOC tea seals 107 MAP Measurement Tool 0c cece cree cece ene e hme eene 110 Line Functions 113 pig AM Lr 114 Brice 115 Flip LING eerren esi t bes YYaG Ge Y RRYIX REPE E ERE RR EEEE 119 JOUMEIMES oco eee e boda motus venne iaa P TOE eub rare Dec LOO e 120 Jot POIs esu od daca a EET RE TIR E Er aaa ne E RAAEEECEENNUEN QUAS NERO 121 Simplify Eines ueceo see e pr axeerrr qp em aree pex Rv RENE EE 123 MAP Stylesheets 125 MAP Stylesheets Panel 25 err new inte eed e eese ER Ee yea into 126 MAP Stylesheet Editor 5 5 coc eeeetex ta bl beet eorr US Ge deber ede E ed hls 129 Create MAP Stylesheet Legend sssssssssssssssss eee 133 Labeling Functions 135 Labeling TOONS E 136 Label Fea
463. tural grammar as GML KML files are very often distributed as KMZ files which are zipped KML files with a kmz extension MAPublisher imports and exports both file type based on the KML version 2 2 specifications Mapinfo Interchange mif mid Import and Export Files of this type are most commonly created by the MapInfo product though other products including MAPublisher are also capable of generating files in this format These files exist in pairs where each file has the same name but ends in either a mif or mid file extension The mif portion contains the vector geometric data and the mid contains the associated attributes Both files are required in order to successfully import a file of this format to Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher The important things to remember when importing MapInfo files are that the mif file must be the one that is selected through the MAPublisher import filter and that both files must be in the same folder MAPublisher will automatically locate and deal with the mid file Mapinfo Table tab Import and Export The TAB format is a simple non topological format for storing the geometric location and attribute information of geographic features and is an integral part of the MapInfo product The TAB format defines the geometry and attributes of geographically referenced features in several files with specific file extensions that are stored in the same folder on disk They are tab main file tabl
464. tures Object gt MAPublisher gt Label Features or MAP Toolbar FUNCTIONALITY The Label Features function adds labels to a map based on the attribute data of the selected features for Line Point or Area MAP Layers All selected features on MAP Layers which contain appropriate attribute information can be labeled using this tool Data selected on multiple MAP Layers can be labeled simultaneously Additional options can be specified such as alignment to lines of latitude minimum font size horizontal scaling and label position in order to place labels intelligently PREREQUISITES Labels will be added to a T Text layer created using the MAP Views panel To create a new text layer use the Add MAP Layer function in the MAP View panel see chapter 4 Setthe feature type to Text To enable copying the attributes from the source MAP layer to the label destination layer check the option Base attribute schema on and select the appropriate layer to copy its attribute schema For best results set up a character style for type font size justification and color Adobe Illustrator menu Window Type Character Style Select the appropriate style in the Character Style panel before starting the Label Features tool and MAPublisher will generate labels based on these settings Otherwise labels applied will appear in the current default color font and font size Once text attributes have been specified select the features to be labeled and g
465. tures iiic Ie p E RERERASETFRYYYEPSCRE DERE ERR RPE 137 MAP Tagger TOO er E EE C RR neonate aunts EEE EEEE DEL ker eE 141 Create KNOCKOUTS oos ceste melee Dus oni Yatneus qu tema ns p RE eta 143 MAP Selections amp Operations 147 MAP Selections icerseveo exis Dee ose GO EHE Wn EX RE COR Cete 148 Split Layer e FEM 153 Working With Images 155 Register Image 5ceortx UE RR RE ERROO PE NIE Ecc d dk arte mint 156 Export MAGS sse exe Weddin bec X x Kv dane EO E re pne edm ER RE KR 161 Grids and Indexes 163 Grids and Graticules i concesse veo oit ERR ER COTAR EDO RR ES SERO ne 164 Make tidex osse ERE ERU RAq AR EREPdNnerU MUR ERU Aden Sepa 170 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Appendices Scale Bars and North Arrows Scale Bar an cuicsirnedawedessag iaowedasne neu E TEE MA E dE ER Create North Arrow ccc cece cece eee cence eee n een eneenenee MAP Web Author MAP Web Author Panel 0 cece cece eee II Web Tagi Dialog ss Arneri a E aE AEEA E ES Web Export Dialogs esce cer LR e E a MAP Web Author Workflow eR Advanced Features cc cece cece cence tenet tneeneneeeenee MAP GPS MAP GPS Panel 4 de rde REY erede RA REPAS VERE YS MAP GPS Panel Menu i oid Rhe nna MAP GPS Point PlotSettings cece cece eee e ence enirir MAP GPS Autosave Settings eee eee eee eee ence teens Edit User Attribute for Current Layer 0
466. ublishe aS Create Knockouts Feature Text MAP LabelPro Alt Ctrl 3 E c Create North Arrow Grids and Graticules Make Index Scale Bar b Imagir L Export Image Register Image AAPub Document Operation Import MAP Objects Split Layer rvv vv Edit MAP Object for editing Scale Bars Grids and Graticules menu item name is adjusted accordingly 24 Chapter 1 Getting Started The MAPublisher Tools The MAPublisher panels can be found under the Window gt MAPublisher menu ve a Extensions lt Control lt Tools Actions Align Appearance Attributes Brushes Color Color Guide Document Info Flattener Preview Gradient Graphic Styles Info Layers Links Magic Wand MAPublisher Navigator Pathfinder Separations Preview Stroke SVG Interactivity Swatches Symbols Transform Transparency Type Variables Brush Libraries Graphic Style Libraries Swatch Libraries Symbol Libraries V Weather map2 ai Q 135 CMYK Preview Shift F7 Shitt F6 Cris F11 5 Fo Shift F3 Cuero Shft FS Colors H MAP Attributes MAP GPS Panel Shift Ctrl F9 V MAP Stylesheets V MAP Views Cis FIO MAP Point Plotter MAP Selections MAP Location Shift Ctr Ft MAP Web Author Shit F8 V MAP Toolbar Shifts Ctri FLO Six MAPublisher tools can be found in the main Adobe Illustrator Tools panel E MAP Area Tool Box
467. ude additional warning notes Operator Buttons Click to insert an operator at the current cursor position Available operators are as follows Open clause operator lt Logicalless than comparator Close clause operator gt Logical greater than comparator AND Logical AND operator Mathematical addition operator OR Logical OR operator A Mathematical subtraction operator Logical equal to comparator Mathematical division operator l Logical not equal to comparator Mathematical multiplication operator amp Text concatenate operator 84 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Expression Builder Expression Components Items in the Objects list fall into three categories Information on a selected item is displayed in the Description panel Double click to insert an object at the current cursor position Available objects are as follows lt MAP Layer gt List of property columns List of attribute columns Constants true Boolean true value false Boolean false value pi 7 numerical value 3 141592 Layer may vary depending on tool For Edit Schema Apply Expression and New Edit MAP Selections the current layer is displayed In the MAP Stylesheet Editor all layers hosted by the stylesheet are displayed t Unique values contained in each attribute column can be viewed in the Description panel Functions RI ABS RI ACOS RI ASIN RI ATAN B CONTAINS RI COS R DEGREES B ENDSWITH IS FIXED IF
468. ule crossing positions Record the location of this point in real world coordinates on a piece of paper When you have this information please use the following guidelines in order to georeferencing data with MAPublisher in Adobe Illustrator 1 Identify the registration or tie in point in your document for which you know the X Y or Lat Long coordinates 2 Determine the page position of the same point on the Adobe Illustrator page using the Info panel Window gt Info You should now have the location of your tie in point in both map and page units e g 79 5 43 5 in Lat Long is located at 4cm 2cm in the document 3 In the MAP Views panel choose New MAP View in the panel options menu 4 Entera name for the MAP View 5 Click the Specify button in the Source Coordinate System section Choose the coordinate system that matches that of your vector data and click OK 6 Setthe Scale to the proper scale of the map It is important to set the scale after the coordinate system but before you enter the map anchors 7 Click OK in the MAP View Editor to apply the information to the new MAP View lin the MAP Views panel choose Specify Anchors in the panel options menu 9 Set the Map Anchors to the value of the tie in location in map units using the values determined earlier e g Longitude 79 59 43 59 10 Set the Page Anchors to the value of the tie in location in Page Units using the values determined in step 2 e g X 4cm Y 2cm
469. um the hp formiat e Format Decimal Degrees D d v d MAP 2d m J or values in degrees when inpu L E MAP Symbol 18 coordinate system is geodetic 116 8008562 deg 9 MAP Symbol 19 Lat 33 300364 deg i MAP Symbol 20 Plot Click to plot the symbol after coordinates have been entered Note Points can only be plotted on point layers The plot button will be disabled if another map layer type is the active layer PREREQUISITES MAP Symbol 21 MAP Symbol 22 MAP Symbol 23 MAP Symbol 24 MAP Symbol 25 ra d LU In order to plot points using the Point Plotter a fully georeferenced MAP View must be chosen as this function will use the coordinate system in order to generate points Use an existing Point layer or create a new Adobe Illustrator layer as the destination layer to plot the points Remember to drag a new layer into the desired MAP View and specify it as P Point in the Define Layer dialog box 100 Chapter 6 Plotting Points MAP Point Plotter USING POINT PLOTTER Enter Coordinates When the Use Current Layer s coordinate system option is selected coordinate values can be entered in the current MAP units of the coordinate system of the MAP View containing the selected layer When the Use WGS 84 option is selected the Select button will become enabled Clicking the Select button will open the Select Coordinate System dialog box and choose a coordinate system as required Whe
470. ures within the same DLG data set used in a variety of contexts DLG files do not explicitly store attribute values but use a feature coding approach in which unique feature codes are assigned to the different types of features stored within the data set MAPublisher will look for the extension dlg or opt for the input DLG files Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions dlg opt Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes No Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required No Donut Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute dlg type Point Yes Line Yes Text No A1 12 MAPublisher Unicode Support This section contains information regarding Unicode character encoding in MAPublisher MAPublisher supports Unicode character encoding in MAP Views MAP Attributes MAP Stylesheets and MAP Selection Filters MAPublisher can also reference Adobe Illustrator layers graphic styles and character styles using Unicode encoding To use Unicode character encoding you require a Unicode compliant font Mac OS X users will have Unicode compliant fonts installed with OS X Windows users will require Unicode compliant fonts to render Unicode For more information on Unicode visit http www unicode org The following tables display Unicode UTF8 support in MAPublisher for GIS data formats that are Unicode UT
471. use to access a dataset SQL Query SOL query used to select the data features when used MAP Dataset New Dataset Connection ArcSDE 93 Connection X Feature Classes IA SGID93 BIOSCIENCE SWReGAPLandCover MAP Dataset Type a name for the selected dataset by direct selection or SQL query This name will be displayed in the Recent saved MAP Dataset list of the Browse ArcSDE Geodatabase dialog box The number of default recent MAP Datasets saved is set in the MAPublisher Preferences for Spatial Database gt General Spatial Database Editor Spatial Filter Spatial fiter used to limit the import extents when used MAPublisher Preferences Spatial Database gt ESRI Geodatabase Editor MAPublisher Preferences f Expression Builder General Import Map Data MAP Attributes Q MAP LabelPro MAP Location MAP Measurement P MAP Selections MAP Stylesheets Q MAP Views 4 J Spatial Database E Basic ESRI ArcSDE Server Editor E ESRI Geodatabase Editor E General Spatial Database Editor Display coded 240 Import ESRI ArcSDE Geodatabases Spatial Database gt ESRI Geodatabase Editor V Use alias as layer name 7 Use abbreviated table name for layer name E domain subtype description Instead Load subtypes as separate layers E Sort feature datasets alphabetically when selecting for import Sort feature classes al
472. useful for reducing the size of a data file by joining related lines and thus reducing the number of segments and associated data present in the file It is also very useful to run Join Lines prior to labelling with Label Features in order to reduce the occurrence of duplicate labels see chapter 10 Labelling Functions PREREQUISITES Join Lines can be executed on selections on L Line layers Choose Object gt MAPublisher gt Join Lines or click the Join Lines button on the MAPublisher toolbar USING JOIN LINES In the Join on attribute drop down list select the attribute column to join by For example to join lines based on street name the column containing the street names should be selected In the Destination Layer text box specify a name for the new L Line layer that MAPublisher will create to hold the joined lines A name is automatically assigned but can be changed A Proximity value should be entered and proximity Units assigned Units can be specified in map units or page units Entering a proximity value of zero will only join line segments that are touching If the distance between the end of a segment and the start of another is greater than the set proximity value these lines will not be joined If two line segments in the selection are separated by a distance less than the set proximity value check the Close Segment Gaps option to create a line segment that connects the two lines When not selected a compound path will be
473. user is familiar with Adobe Illustrator and has at least a basic understanding of geographic information systems GIS terminology and concepts Please refer to the Adobe Illustrator user guide for more information on using Adobe Illustrator The User Guide explains the installation process and the many features of MAPublisher All MAPublisher panels filters and tools are thoroughly detailed together with the related concepts necessary to build map and perform fundamental cartographic and GIS tasks Please refer to the document Avenza Projections Guide pdf for more information on the projections supported in MAPublisher As a complement to these guides the MAPublisher software installer includes tutorial documents MAPublisher 8 Tutorial Guide pdf MAPublisher 8 Quick Start Guide pdf and MAPublisher 8 MAP LabelPro Tutorial Guide and associated GIS datasets We encourage all users to go through these guides to gain additional experience with MAPublisher tools and functions MAPublisher and Adobe Illustrator together constitute an integrated cartographic design software system with state of the art graphics tools and geographic functions Contents Avenza MAPublisher 8 User Guide Welcome Contents Introduction MAPublisher 8 Features What s New in MAPublisher 8 3 Chapter 1 Getting Started 15 System Requirements deesse ep te rh aa RARE REEF EE EECEPEF EE 16 Installation Iristr ctions 3 445 sere Rr ERR ER EE SEKR Re REA ies Rovian 17
474. venza com A1 17 Memory Considerations RAM RECOMMENDATIONS Occasional User 2 GB of RAM is recommended A graphics or GIS user who uses MAPublisher with medium sized data sets with up to 20 layers minimal text labels and some low resolution or small coverage raster images Power User 4 GB or more of RAM is recommended A professional cartographer who uses MAPublisher daily and works with large urban data sets including large transportation layers with 20 or more layers raster based air photographs large numbers of text labels complex fill patterns etc RAM USAGE HINTS Users often ask us why is so much RAM needed to operate MAPublisher First of all Adobe Illustrator requires a significant amount of RAM itself in order to run smoothly Secondly map data sets are often large which increases the need for RAM even further Map data sets contain both vector and attribute data which must be stored in memory Since we are adding a database to Adobe Illustrator this increases the file size which increases the RAM requirements MAPublisher builds a mini GIS application inside Adobe Illustrator so that it can geo code information and attach data to objects This also has some overhead GIS users also often ask why so much more memory is needed with MAPublisher than is with GIS software The graphics environment software of Adobe Illustrator loads the entire file into memory rather than just reading it from disk thus more RAM memory is r
475. way Shield via the Auto option Empty Shield Hexagon Horizontal Oval Pentagon Rectangle Rounded Rectangle Square United states Interstate m Height Specify a height manually Symbol Choose the symbol from this drop down list m Note The label font size and a fixed symbol height not Auto size affect how a label is sized inside a symbol For example if a fixed symbol height of 0 5 in is used but the label font size of 5 pt the symbol will be 0 5 in but the label inside will be no greater than 5 pt If the label font is set to 50 pt but the fixed symbol size is 0 5 in the label will have a maximum size of whatever fits inside the symbol or the selected font size Symbols are stored in the location set in the MAPublisher Preferences see chapter 1 The default locations are Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Symbols Windows Vista 7 C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Symbols Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In LabelPro Symbols Note Each symbol file has one version in RGB colour and one in CMYK Note Labeling with symbols is only available for Line layers To label areas with symbols use the Plot Centroids function from the MAP Point Plotter see chapter 6 Chapter 18 MAP LabelPro 225 MAPublisher LabelPro Styles MAPublisher LabelPro Rules MAPublisher LabelPro provides users wi
476. will be exported as TIFF FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher has the ability to export placed raster files as georeferenced images for use in other programs and or for archival purposes This can be useful in a number of ways For example when working with an image for which there is no georeferencing file use the MAPublisher Export Image function to create a GeoTIFF or other georeferenced image file based upon the coordinate system of the host MAP View The Register Image filter can be used to accurately position and scale imagery with vector data Alternatively the imagery can be manually moved scaled or rotated to align with artwork in a designated MAP View If the host MAP View contains accurate georeferencing information Export Image can be used to save raster data to a fully georeferenced image format It is also possible to convert the vector artwork to a georeferenced raster image MAPublisher exports selected images as a TIF TIFF with a choice of the five reference file formats see the previous page USING EXPORT IMAGE With an image selected go to Object gt MAPublisher gt Export Image or click MAPublisher Toolbar button 5 The Georeference Type drop down list shows the five available reference file formats TFW IRP TAB RSF ERS LG0 and GeoTIFF A regular TIF file will be generated with a reference file carrying the extension TFW IRP TAB RSF ERS or LGO If GeoTIFF is selected a single TIF file will be produced as this
477. will contain both the image and the georeferencing information RESULTS When all of the export options have been set click the Save As button Specify a name for the TIF file and the folder location where it will be saved The reference file will have the same file name as the TIF and will be saved to the same location This image file can be subsequently used in imagery applications such as Avenza Geographic Imager for Adobe Photoshop or in other Adobe Illustrator documents using MAPublisher Notes Exporting linked images in CMYK color mode will create an incorrect result These images must either be set to a different mode or embedded prior to exporting If a MAP View is rotated the exported image will not store any rotation parameter it will be automatically rectified oriented north up Chapter 12 Working With Images 161 Export Image v Grids and Indexes b enti di c n ARK MAPublisher contains tools to easily create map grids and map indexes Grids can be created for reference purposes or to follow designated lines such as latitude and longitude graticule with optional labeling cells or axis k ca A grid or a graticule can be used as a base to generate WA F x index files MAPublisher outputs a text file containing grid B 5p indexes of text or map object locations that can contain map uc s attribute information 1 Topics covered in this section Grid and Graticules aiid Sc PEET Make Inde
478. will import The following parameters can be applied to the import Allow Random Colour Mode This option allows Adobe Illustrator to generate random colour settings for the data Expand Network Links Checking this box will enable the use of network linked KML files Import KML Properties as Visible Check this option to make KML properties visible attributes hidden by default A1 6 MAPINFO INTERCHANGE MIF MID MIF is a published ASCII storage format used by the MapInfo It is used as a file format for map and database exporting importing in MapInfo software products The MapInfo Reference Manual describes the MIF format and all constants it uses for colour style symbol and fill patterns MapInfo Interchange Format Files are often called MIF or MIF MID files A single logical MIF file consists of two physical files having the following file name extensions mif Geometric data mid Attributes for the geometric data These extensions are added to the base name of the MIF file creating separate physical files that must all reside in the same directory You must select the mif file for import Each entity in a mif file has a row of attributes stored in an associated mid file A single mif file contains many different types of geometry however the associated attribute in the mid file must have the same number and type of fields for each entity in the mif file The order of the entries in the two files is synchr
479. ws MAP layers MAP Stylesheets and MAP Selection Filters from other open documents Preferences Opens MAPublisher Preferences on the MAP Views Panel property sheet see chapter 1 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 57 MAP Views Panel RELATED TOOLS Add MAP Layer Add MAP Layer Layer name Type the name of the new Layer name Layer 1 mrn layer it will appear in both MAP Views are Woe Ba ature H rea m and Adobe Illustrator Layers panels Base Attribute Schema on Check this option to copy the attribute schema from the existing Feature Type Select the type of feature Advanced MAP Layer selected in the drop down list of the new layer This drop down list presents a choice of Area Line Point 7 Base attribute schema on P uscities point zia Plot Centroids Label Features MAP Tagger Text or Legend layer types Check this option to inherit the attribute structure from the specified layer Tool and MAP LabelPro tools make use of this option see specific chapters Feature Type Select the type of feature that Define Layer Automatically opens when dragging a Non MAP layer into a specified MAP View exists on the layer being dragged This ie Layer Layer 1 drop down list presents a choice of Area Line Point Text or Legend layer types qam B Area Cox Base Attribute Schema on Check this option to
480. x p rae rd i Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 163 Grid Graticule Selection Click the appropriate button to select the grid type required and to assign settings see below Note Measured Grids can only be created on MAP Views in projected coordinate systems Axis Labels Solid graphic denotes an enabled labeling option Click an axis label to toggle all labels on that axis ON or OFF Coordinates Labels Solid graphic shows labels will be generated labeled as X Y for measured grids or Lat Long for graticules Click the label to toggle between X Y Both OFF or Lng Lat Both OFF Label Direction Click to reverse the direction that labels increment Cell Labels Solid graphic shows labels will be generated Click a cell label to toggle all center labels ON or OFF Flip Label Axes Click to flip alpha and numerical labels Grids and Graticules Object gt MAPublisher gt Grids and Graticules or MAP Toolbar HH Object gt Edit Grid Edit Graticules Grids and Graticules Index Grid Graticules See Settings panels below Labeling Cell References Place labels off cell by 6 pt Center style Axes style Cell References Place labels of cell by Select a distanc off the grid to place the labels Center Stylet Select the Character Style to use for the Center Labels Axes Style Select the Character Style to use for the Axis Labels
481. xpression entered is valid Otherwise it will report and include additional warning notes Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 91 Apply Expression Join Table MAP Attributes panel gt Join Table x Join Table Source Data Type Choose Files or Geodatabase e pem m Cx formats Windows only reta pes les ASCII Excel Sdts Data Set Name Click the Browse button e Dataset Name 81 Main Additional Files uscities csv Browse to select the data table to be joined Name uscities M Name Worksheet Specify the worksheet to use when a Microsoft Excel file is Source Matching Column Select a column Matching Column S STATE NAME selected from the source table to match to a UI First i 5 column in the destination layer Z First ine con mes Character Encoding System First line contains column names For Delimited Text and Excel type Character Encoding Assign a codec if the attribute information held in the selected dataset uses a double byte character set tables check this box to derive column Destination names from the first row Target Layer Lower48 area A Target Layer Select the layer containing Case sensitive when matching Values from Matching Column S STATE NAME X the MAP Attribute table about to be the two matching columns will be joined with the source table matched based on case sensitivity ja Destinati
482. xternal sources metadata survey points or other When the Use Current MAP View s coordinate system option is toggled MAP Anchor coordinate values are entered in the current MAP units of the coordinate system of the MAP View When the Use coordinate system option is toggled the Select button becomes enabled Clicking the Select button opens the Select Coordinate System dialog box Choose any coordinate system the coordinates values entered will be in the unit Point Style of this coordinate system When the selected or default coordinate system is projected X and Y coordinates are entered in the unit Point Style of the coordinate system e g metre kilometre feet When the selected or default coordinate system is Geodetic Lat and Long coordinates are entered in degrees Note When the current MAP View coordinate system is a projected system the default system specified in Use coordinate system is set to the geodetic system base for the projection For example if the MAP View system is US State Plane NAD83 Colorado North ftUS the default alternative system is set to NAD83 to enter the latitude longitude coordinates in degrees The Page Anchor is entered in the current unit of the document This unit can be changed through the Adobe Illustrator menu File Document Setup Positions of points on the document in page coordinates are determined using the Adobe Illustrator Info panel menu Window Info Note for CS5 users Page
483. ylesheet to the associated MAP Layers Note Use caution when assigning a MAP Stylesheet to grouped objects or compound paths the graphic styles may not apply universally Assign a Style Rule Name The Style Rule Name column contains the name for each rule These names can be edited to describe the style rule and or its intention This name is used when creating a MAP Stylesheet legend so it is a good practice to do so For example style rules could be named Major Roads or Cities with populations greater than 200 000 Selecting Styles and Symbols The Style column contains a list of styles that currently exist in the Adobe Illustrator Graphic Styles panel for Area and Line stylesheets in the Symbols panel for Point stylesheets or in the Character Styles panel for Text stylesheets For each rule choose a symbol or style to use The Move Up and Move Down buttons moves the priority of the selected style up or down the list Assign a Scale The Scale default is 100 Editing the scale will alter the symbol size points or stroke weight areas and lines The maximum scaling factor is 1000 Assign an Expression The Expression column shows the criteria for applying the style rule Click the Expression field to open either the Simple Expression panel or the Advanced Expression panel depending on the Expression Mode and the current expression To choose an expression mode select the Simple or Advanced option For most cases to quic
484. ypes are particular attribute fields made to create groups of records in a feature class that share the same types of properties The attribute fields designated as subtype fields contain numerical coded values and have a data type of short or long integer Each coded value is associated with a description textual In the MAPublisher Preferences for Spatial Database gt ESRI Geodatabase Editor users may choose to load subtypes as separate layers Attribute domains are used to constrain the values allowed in any particular attribute of a feature class or subtypes There are two types of attribute domain A range domain limits the value of a numerical attribute in between minimum and maximum values range domains are not relevant to MAPublisher A coded value domain specifies a valid set of coded values for an attribute of any type text numeric or date Both coded values and their meaningful description are stored in the database In the MAPublisher Preferences for Spatial Database gt ESRI Geodatabase Editor users can set the option to import attributes with coded values from subtypes and attribute domains as follow Instead replace the codes by their description text Never import the actual values code In Addition create two attribute columns one containing the coded values and one containing the corresponding descriptions 234 Chapter 19 Import ESRI Geodatabases Overview Spatial Filters During the

MAPublisher 8.3 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents